iQ Sensor Solution

Reference Manual
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Read these precautions before using this product.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully, and pay full attention to safety to
handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only. For the safety precautions for the programmable
controller system, refer to the user's manual for the module used and the MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual.
In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: " WARNING" and " CAUTION".

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

WARNING death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

CAUTION minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead to serious
consequences.
Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety.
Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference.

1
 [Design Precautions]
WARNING
● Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system
operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller.
Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
(1) Emergency stop circuits, protection circuits, and protective interlock circuits for conflicting
operations (such as forward/reverse rotations or upper/lower limit positioning) must be configured
external to the programmable controller.
(2) When the programmable controller detects an abnormal condition, it stops the operation and all
outputs are:
• Turned off if the overcurrent or overvoltage protection of the power supply module is activated.
• Held or turned off according to the parameter setting if the self-diagnostic function of the CPU
module detects an error such as a watchdog timer error.
(3) All outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part, such as an I/O control part, where the
CPU module cannot detect any error. To ensure safety operation in such a case, provide a safety
mechanism or a fail-safe circuit external to the programmable controller. For a fail-safe circuit
example, refer to the user's manual for the CPU module used and the MELSEC iQ-R Module
Configuration Manual.
(4) Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a component such as a relay and transistor in an
output circuit. Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a
serious accident.
● In an output circuit, when a load current exceeding the rated current or an over current caused by a
load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an
external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
● Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power
supply. If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output
or malfunction.
● Configure a circuit so that the external power supply is turned off first and then the programmable
controller. If the programmable controller is turned off first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect
output or malfunction.
● For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to manuals for the network
used. For the manuals, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. Incorrect output or
malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.

2
[Design Precautions]
WARNING
● When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data
of a running programmable controller, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the
entire system will always operate safely. For other forms of control (such as program modification,
parameter change, forced output, or operating status change) of a running programmable controller,
read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding. Improper
operation may damage machines or cause accidents. When a Safety CPU is used, data cannot be
modified while the Safety CPU is in SAFETY MODE.
● Especially, when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device, immediate
action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication
failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine corrective actions
to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.
● Do not write any data to the "system area" and "write-protect area" of the buffer memory in the
module. Also, do not use any "use prohibited" signals as an output signal from the CPU module to
each module. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system. For the
"system area", "write-protect area", and the "use prohibited" signals, refer to the user's manual for the
module used. For areas used for safety communications, they are protected from being written by
users, and thus safety communications failure caused by data writing does not occur.
● If a communication cable is disconnected, the network may be unstable, resulting in a communication
failure of multiple stations. Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire
system will always operate safely even if communications fail. Incorrect output or malfunction due to a
communication failure may result in an accident. When safety communications are used, an interlock
by the safety station interlock function protects the system from an incorrect output or malfunction.

[Security Precautions]
WARNING
● To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the programmable controller and
the system against unauthorized access, denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, computer viruses, and other
cyberattacks from external devices via the network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls,
virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.

3
 [Design Precautions]
Precautions when connected to AnyWireASLINK
WARNING
● The AnyWireASLINK system has no control function for ensuring safety.

[Design Precautions]
Precautions when connected to CC-Link
WARNING
● To set the automatic refresh parameter, specify the device Y for the remote output (RY) refresh
device.
If a device other than 'Y', such as 'M' and 'L', is specified, CPU module holds the device status as is
even after the module status is changed to STOP.
For the method for stopping a data link, refer to the user's manual for relevant CC-Link master/local
module.

[Design Precautions]
Precautions when connected to CC-Link IE Field Network
WARNING
● To set a refresh device in the network parameters, specify the device Y for the remote output (RY)
refresh device.
If a device other than 'Y', such as 'M' and 'L', is specified, CPU module holds the device status as is
even after the module status is changed to STOP.

[Design Precautions]
Precautions when connected to Ethernet
WARNING
● To prevent the malfunction of the programmable controller system due to harmful e-mails, take
preventive measures (such as antivirus measures) so that the mail server for Ethernet module does
not receive harmful e-mails.

4
[Design Precautions]
WARNING
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables. Doing so may result in malfunction due to electromagnetic interference. Keep a distance of
100mm or more between those cables.
● During control of an inductive load such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve, a large current
(approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from off to on.
Therefore, use a module that has a sufficient current rating.
● After the CPU module is powered on or is reset, the time taken to enter the RUN status varies
depending on the system configuration, parameter settings, and/or program size. Design circuits so
that the entire system will always operate safely, regardless of the time.
● Do not power off the programmable controller or reset the CPU module while the settings are being
written. Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM and SD memory card undefined. The values
need to be set in the buffer memory and written to the flash ROM and SD memory card again. Doing
so also may cause malfunction or failure of the module.
● When changing the operating status of the CPU module from external devices (such as the remote
RUN/STOP functions), select "Do Not Open by Program" for "Opening Method" of "Module
Parameter". If "Open by Program" is selected, an execution of the remote STOP function causes the
communication line to close. Consequently, the CPU module cannot reopen the line, and external
devices cannot execute the remote RUN function.

5
 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) MELSEC programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;
i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious accident;
and
ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the
case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.
(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO
ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT
LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the
PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY
INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USER'S, INSTRUCTION
AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.
("Prohibited Application")
Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;
• Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the
public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.
• Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality
assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.
• Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator,
Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and
Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other
applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property.
Notwithstanding the above restrictions, Mitsubishi Electric may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in
one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific
applications agreed to by Mitsubishi Electric and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe,
redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details,
please contact the Mitsubishi Electric representative in your region.
(3) Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving programmable controller trouble and
system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the FA integrated engineering software MELSOFT.
This manual describes the functions provided by iQ Sensor Solution.
Before using the product, please read this manual and relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions
and performance of programmable controller/MELSOFT series to handle the product correctly.
When applying the program examples provided in this manual to an actual system, ensure the applicability and confirm that it
will not cause system control problems.
Please make sure that the end users read this manual.

6
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
RELEVANT MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

CONTENTS
PART 1 iQ Sensor Solution

CHAPTER 1 iQ Sensor Solution 14

1.1 Features of iQ Sensor Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Easy startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Easy tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sensor/device monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Data backup/restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.2 How to Use iQ Sensor Solution Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

CHAPTER 2 iQ Sensor Solution FUNCTIONS 19

2.1 Function List of iQ Sensor Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Before using iQ Sensor Solution functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2 Function List of iQ Sensor Solution for Each Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
GX Works3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
MI Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

PART 2 GX Works2

CHAPTER 3 AnyWireASLINK 26
3.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Data restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

CHAPTER 4 CC-Link 55
4.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Detecting devices connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Reading/writing parameters of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1C2AL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Monitoring devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

7
 Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Data restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

CHAPTER 5 CC-Link IE Field Network 105

5.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Detecting devices connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Reading/writing parameters of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1GFAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Monitoring devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Data restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

CHAPTER 6 Ethernet 148

6.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Data restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

PART 3 GX Works3

CHAPTER 7 AnyWireASLINK 178

7.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
7.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
7.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Data restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

CHAPTER 8 CC-Link 210

8.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Detecting devices connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Verifying devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) against a
system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Reading/writing parameters of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1C2AL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
8.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Monitoring devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

8
 Data restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

CHAPTER 9 CC-Link IE TSN 261

9.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Detecting devices connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
9.2 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Reading/writing parameters of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1GNAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
9.3 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

CONTENTS
Monitoring devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL) . . . . . . . . . . . 266

CHAPTER 10 CC-Link IE Field Network 268

10.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Detecting devices connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
10.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Verifying devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) against a
system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
10.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Reading/writing parameters of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1GFAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
10.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Monitoring devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) . . . . . . . . . . . 286
10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Data restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

CHAPTER 11 Ethernet 322

11.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
11.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
11.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
11.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Data restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

PART 4 MI Configurator

CHAPTER 12 CC-Link IE Field Network 354

12.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
12.2 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

CHAPTER 13 Ethernet 360

13.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
13.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
13.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

APPENDIX 366
Appendix 1 Useful Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

9
 Command execution to slave station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
CPU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
MELIPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Devices supporting iQSS (CPU module). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Device supporting iQSS (MELIPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
GX Works2/MELSOFT Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
GX Works3/MELSOFT Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
MI Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Appendix 4 Considerations for Using Device Supporting iQSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
AnyWireASLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
CC-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Appendix 5 Error Code List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
iQ Sensor Solution-related errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
AnyWireASLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
CC-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Ethernet (Error codes that occur on communication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Ethernet (Error codes of devices supporting iQSS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Appendix 6 Special Relay (SM)/Special Register (SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Appendix 7 Event List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Viewing an event history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
How to read the event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Appendix 8 Backup File Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Backup data file (.QBR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
System file for backup/restoration (.QSI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

INDEX 408

REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412

10
RELEVANT MANUALS
Manual name [manual number] Description Available form
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual Operation methods of the online functions for iQ Sensor Solution Print book
[SH-081133ENG] (this manual) e-Manual
PDF

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated
tool.
e-Manual has the following features:
• Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals.
• Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual.
• Hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures.
• Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked.
• Sample programs can be copied to an engineering tool.

11
 TERMS
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following terms.
Term Description
Address Device information set to a slave module to identify each node on the AnyWireASLINK network
Device supporting iQSS A device which supports iQ Sensor Solution
Engineering tool A tool used for setting up programmable controllers, programming, debugging, and maintenance
ID Information to identify whether the module is an input module or output module based on an address assigned to a slave
module of AnyWireASLINK
iQSS iQ Sensor Solution. Cooperation of sensors, programmable controllers, HMI (Human Machine Interface), and
engineering tool to facilitate the start-up or maintenance of sensors
MELSOFT Navigator An integrated development environment included in MELSOFT iQ Works
Profile Data that stores the information of a device supporting iQSS.
By registering a profile in GX Works2, GX Works3, MI Configurator, and MELSOFT Navigator, the parameter settings
and monitors corresponding to a registered module or device can be used.
Ver.2-compatible slave station A slave station that supports the remote net Ver.2 mode or remote device net Ver.2 mode

GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.
Generic term/abbreviation Description
AnyWireASLINK configuration A system configuration connected with AnyWireASLINK
ASLINKAMP Sensor amplifiers that have an AnyWireASLINK interface
ASLINKER I/O devices that have an AnyWireASLINK interface
CC-Link configuration System configuration connected with CC-Link
CC IE Field configuration System configuration connected with CC-Link IE Field Network
Ethernet configuration System configuration connected with Ethernet
Built-in Ethernet port CPU L02CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU, L06CPU-P, L26CPU, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-BT, L26CPU-PBT, Q03UDVCPU,
Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDVCPU,
Q26UDPVCPU
Ethernet-equipped module The following modules when using an Ethernet function:
• RJ71EN71
• CPU module
RnENCPU R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU
Station sub-ID number An ID number of a sensor connected to a communication unit for CC-Link and an AnyWireASLINK bridge module
Actual system configuration An actual system configuration connected to each network master module, an Ethernet-equipped module, built-in
Ethernet port CPU, and bridge module
Connection method The sensor network and each network that can be connected using iQ Sensor Solution
Sensor parameter Parameters (such as threshold or sensor operation mode) of a device supporting iQSS
Communication setting The settings (such as IP address) to communicate using Ethernet
Remote I/O module Basic digital input modules and basic digital output modules of CC-Link IE Field Network.

12
 PART 1
PART 1 iQ Sensor Solution

This part explains the overview of iQ Sensor Solution and its functions.

1 iQ Sensor Solution

2 iQ Sensor Solution FUNCTIONS

13
 1 iQ Sensor Solution
iQ Sensor Solution is a solution to manage both partner products and programmable controllers with an engineering tool.
By sharing design information including system design and programming in the whole control system, the system design
efficiency and the programming efficiency can be improved, and the total cost of design, startup, operation, and maintenance
can be reduced.

Enables a total control using

Engineering tool

Devices supporting
iQSS

1 iQ Sensor Solution
14
1.1 Features of iQ Sensor Solution
By performing the functions of an engineering tool supporting iQ Sensor Solution, the information of devices supporting iQSS
1
connected to various networks can easily be saved/restored.

Easy startup
A system configuration diagram can easily be displayed on the screen of an engineering tool by detecting devices supporting
iQSS in the actual system configuration.
In addition, the displayed system configuration can be verified against the actual system configuration, and the
communication setting for Ethernet devices can easily be configured.

Automatic detection of connected devices

A system configuration diagram can automatically be created on the screen of an engineering tool by detecting devices
supporting iQSS in an actual system configuration.
Consequently, man-hours for creating a system configuration diagram at the system startup can be reduced.

Display a system configuration diagram detected automatically on

Engineering tool.

Devices supporting iQSS

Verification of connected devices and configurations

A displayed system configuration can be verified against the actual system configuration.
The modification man-hours at the system startup can be reduced.

Verify the created system configuration against

the actual system configuration.

Devices supporting iQSS

1 iQ Sensor Solution
1.1 Features of iQ Sensor Solution 15
 Reflection of the communication setting
The communication setting, such as an IP address, for the different type of sensors can be set in the same setting screen.
The setting man-hours can be reduced since the setting can be set to a device supporting iQSS without starting dedicated
tools.

Communication settings of devices

supporting iQSS can be configured.

Devices supporting iQSS

Easy tuning
Sensor parameters can be set efficiently in the same setting screen for sensors of different manufacturers.

Sensor parameter read/write

Sensor parameters can be set by the same operation without starting dedicated tools for each manufacturer.

Various sensor parameters of devices supporting iQSS can be configured on

the same setting screen.

1 iQ Sensor Solution
16 1.1 Features of iQ Sensor Solution
Sensor/device monitor
Device supporting iQSS in the actual system configuration can be displayed in a single screen. 1
Sensor/device monitor
The status of devices supporting iQSS in the actual system configuration can be monitored.
The status and details on devices supporting iQSS can also be checked in the "Monitoring Information" window.

The status of device supporting iQSS can be

checked.

Data backup/restoration
The information of devices supporting iQSS can be backed up (saved) to /restored from an SD memory card.

Data backup/restoration
The information of devices supporting iQSS in the actual system configuration can be backed up (saved) to/restored from an
SD memory card.
Man-hours for changing settings can be reduced since data restoration/utilization are simplified.

M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4
Setting data can be backed up/restored at a time.
RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 SD1288.A
72 SET M1100

104
M1100
= H0 SD1436 MOV H1050 D1000
SD memory card Setting data
MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200

M1200
173 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

Devices supporting iQSS

1 iQ Sensor Solution
1.1 Features of iQ Sensor Solution 17
 1.2 How to Use iQ Sensor Solution Functions
iQ Sensor Solution provides iQ Sensor Solution functions using an engineering tool.
The information of devices supporting iQSS can easily be backed up/restored with the iQ Sensor Solution functions.
For the engineering tools for which these functions can be used, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

Procedures from detecting devices to backing up/restoring data

The following shows the procedure to backup/restore the information of devices supporting iQSS in iQ Sensor Solution.

Operating procedure
1. Easy startup
1. Easy startup • Automatic detection of connected devices
Detect the devices supporting iQSS connected to a network in the
configuration window of an engineering tool.
• Verification of connected devices and configurations
Verify the system configuration displayed in the configuration
window of an engineering tool against the actual system
configuration.
• Reflection of the communication setting
Apply the communication setting set in the configuration window of
an engineering tool to devices supporting iQSS.
2. Easy tuning
2. Easy tuning
• Sensor parameter read/write
Read/Write the parameters of devices supporting iQSS with an
engineering tool.
3. Sensor/device monitor
3. Sensor/device monitor
• Sensor/device monitor
Monitor the connection status of a device supporting iQSS with an
engineering tool.

4. Data backup/restoration
4. Data backup/restoration
• Data backup/restoration
Backup/restore the information of devices supporting iQSS using
the menu of an engineering tool or a program.

1 iQ Sensor Solution
18 1.2 How to Use iQ Sensor Solution Functions
2 iQ Sensor Solution FUNCTIONS
iQ Sensor Solution functions provide easy operations such as the communication setting, programming, data management,
monitoring, and data backup/restoration for devices supporting iQSS with an engineering tool.
2
2.1 Function List of iQ Sensor Solution
The following functions are available for iQ Sensor Solution.
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Description
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices To detect devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a master module or a
built-in Ethernet port CPU, and display the information in a configuration window.
Verification of connected devices and To verify the actual system configuration against the displayed system configuration.
configurations
Reflection of the communication setting To apply the communication setting to devices supporting iQSS.
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write To read and write the sensor parameters of devices supporting iQSS.
Sensor/device monitor Sensor/device monitor To graphically monitor the status of devices supporting iQSS.
Data backup/restoration Data backup/restoration To backup (save) the information of devices supporting iQSS in an SD memory card.
In addition, this function restores the information of devices supporting iQSS which
was backed up (saved) in an SD memory card.
Useful function Linkage with dedicated tools (association To start the dedicated tools that is associated with properties and display manuals by
with properties) double-clicking the images of devices supporting iQSS on 'Device map area'.
Command execution to slave stations To execute commands to a slave station connected to the master/local module.

Before using iQ Sensor Solution functions

Before using iQ Sensor Solution functions, configure the settings required for communication with devices supporting iQSS in
advance.
iQ Sensor Solution functions cannot be performed unless the communication with devices supporting iQSS is established.
For the system configuration and parameter setting, refer to the manual for the device that supports iQ Sensor Solution to be
used.

Profile registration
iQ Sensor Solution functions cannot be performed unless the profiles of devices supporting iQSS are registered to an
engineering tool.
Register a profile of a device supporting iQSS in advance.
A profile can be registered only by a user logged on to a personal computer with the administrator authority.
For details on the registration methods of a profile, refer to the following:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)
GX Works3 Operating Manual
MI Configurator Operating Manual

2 iQ Sensor Solution FUNCTIONS

2.1 Function List of iQ Sensor Solution 19
 2.2 Function List of iQ Sensor Solution for Each
Connection Method
The following tables list the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for each connection method and their references.

GX Works2
In a system configured with the following series, the iQ Sensor Solution functions can be performed using an engineering tool,
GX Works2 or MELSOFT Navigator.
• MELSEC-L
• MELSEC-Q
• MELSEC-F

AnyWireASLINK
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 27 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Verification of connected devices and configurations Page 29 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System
Configuration
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 30 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
Sensor/device monitor Sensor/device monitor Page 33 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup/restoration Data backup/restoration Page 35 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Useful function Linkage with dedicated tools (association with Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties)
properties)

CC-Link
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 57 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Verification of connected devices and configurations Page 64 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System
Configuration
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 67 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
Sensor/device monitor Sensor/device monitor Page 70 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup/restoration Data backup/restoration Page 75 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Useful function Linkage with dedicated tools (association with Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties)
properties)
Command execution to slave stations Page 367 Command execution to slave station

CC-Link IE Field Network

Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 107 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Verification of connected devices and Page 113 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System
configurations*1 Configuration
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 115 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS
Sensor/device monitor Sensor/device monitor Page 117 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup/restoration Data backup/restoration*2 Page 120 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Useful function Linkage with dedicated tools (association with Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties)
properties)
Command execution to slave stations Page 367 Command execution to slave station

*1 This function can be performed to a device supporting iQSS, which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
*2 The backup/restoration function can be performed with a program.

2 iQ Sensor Solution FUNCTIONS

20 2.2 Function List of iQ Sensor Solution for Each Connection Method
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual
Reflection of the communication setting
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write
2
Useful function Linkage with dedicated tools (association with Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties)
properties)
Command execution to slave stations Page 367 Command execution to slave station

Ethernet
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 149 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Reflection of the communication setting Page 151 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting
iQSS
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 153 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS
Sensor/device monitor Sensor/device monitor Page 155 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup/restoration Data backup/restoration Page 157 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Useful function Linkage with dedicated tools (association with Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties)
properties)

2 iQ Sensor Solution FUNCTIONS

2.2 Function List of iQ Sensor Solution for Each Connection Method 21
 GX Works3
In a system configured with the following series, the iQ Sensor Solution functions can be performed using an engineering tool,
GX Works3 or MELSOFT Navigator.
• MELSEC iQ-R
• MELSEC iQ-L*1
• MELSEC iQ-F
*1 The MELSEC iQ-L series system is configured with an LHCPU and MELSEC-L series modules.

AnyWireASLINK
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 179 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Verification of connected devices and configurations Page 181 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System
Configuration
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 183 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS
Sensor/device monitor Sensor/device monitor Page 186 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup/restoration Data backup/restoration Page 188 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Useful function Linkage with dedicated tools (association with Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties)
properties)

CC-Link
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 212 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 220 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS
Sensor/device monitor Sensor/device monitor Page 223 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup/restoration Data backup/restoration Page 227 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Useful function Command execution to slave stations Page 367 Command execution to slave station

CC-Link IE TSN
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 262 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 265 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS
Sensor/device monitor Sensor/device monitor Page 266 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS

CC-Link IE Field Network

Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 269 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 277 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS
Sensor/device monitor Sensor/device monitor Page 285 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup/restoration Data backup/restoration Page 288 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Useful function Linkage with dedicated tools (association with Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties)
properties)
Command execution to slave stations Page 367 Command execution to slave station

2 iQ Sensor Solution FUNCTIONS

22 2.2 Function List of iQ Sensor Solution for Each Connection Method
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual
Reflection of the communication setting
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write
2
Useful function Linkage with dedicated tools (association with Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties)
properties)
Command execution to slave stations Page 367 Command execution to slave station

Ethernet
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 323 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Reflection of the communication setting Page 325 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting
iQSS
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 327 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS
Sensor/device monitor Sensor/device monitor Page 329 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup/restoration Data backup/restoration Page 330 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Useful function Linkage with dedicated tools (association with Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties)
properties)

2 iQ Sensor Solution FUNCTIONS

2.2 Function List of iQ Sensor Solution for Each Connection Method 23
 MI Configurator
In a system configured with a MELIPC, the iQ Sensor Solution functions can be performed using an engineering tool, MI
Configurator.

CC-Link IE Field Network

Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 355 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 357 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual
Reflection of the communication setting
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write

Ethernet
Purpose iQ Sensor Solution function Reference
Easy startup Automatic detection of connected devices Page 361 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Reflection of the communication setting Page 363 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting
iQSS
Easy tuning Sensor parameter read/write Page 365 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS

2 iQ Sensor Solution FUNCTIONS

24 2.2 Function List of iQ Sensor Solution for Each Connection Method
 PART 2
PART 2 GX Works2

This part explains the operation methods when using the iQ Sensor Solution functions in GX Works2/
MELSOFT Navigator.

3 AnyWireASLINK

4 CC-Link

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

6 Ethernet

25
 3 AnyWireASLINK
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for MELSEC-L series, Q series, or FX
series connected to AnyWireASLINK.

System configuration
This section explains the iQ Sensor Solution functions for AnyWireASLINK using the following system configuration.

Engineering tool CPU module AnyWireASLINK master module

ASLINKAMP (Input) ASLINKER (Input)

Type Model name Manufacturer

Engineering tool GX Works2 SWnDND-GXW2 and SWnDNC-GXW2 ('n' indicates its Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
version.)
CPU module LCPU L26CPU-BT
AnyWireASLINK master module LJ51AW12AL
ASLINKAMP (Input) Photoelectric sensor B289SB-01AP-CAM20 (ASLINKAMP master) AnyWire Corporation
B289SB-01AP-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
Fiber sensor B289SB-01AF-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
B289SB-01AF-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
ASLINKER (Input) B281SB-02U-CC20

For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for AnyWireASLINK, refer to the
following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

Considerations for a system configuration

■Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function
Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system configuration, and set
PLC parameters and other settings required for communication with a device supporting iQSS such as the address setting
and the device parameter setting.

■Address settings
Make sure to set the address occupied by a slave module so as not to exceed the number of operating points set in a master
module.
For details on the settings, refer to the following:
MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

3 AnyWireASLINK
26
3.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A slave module connected to an AnyWireASLINK master module can be detected and the information can be displayed in the
"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.
For the creation method of a new project and the operation methods of the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window, refer to
the following:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

Operating procedure 3
1. Create a new project in an engineering tool.

2. Add the data of AnyWireASLINK master module to "Intelligent

1. Select Function Module" on the Project view.

2. Select

3. Double-click "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" on the Project

view.
Double-click

4. Click the [Detect Now] button in the "AnyWireASLINK

Configuration" window.
Click

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 27
 5. When an automatic address detection is required, select the
checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
1. Check
refer to the following:
2. Click
MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

The actual system configuration is displayed in the

Select
"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

List of modules
6. Select [Close with Saving the Setting] in the "AnyWireASLINK
Configuration" window.
The setting in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window is
Device map area
saved and completed.

Output window

Considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS

■Automatic address detection
When the actual system configuration was changed, perform the automatic address detection before using an iQ Sensor
Solution function.
For details on the automatic address detection, refer to the following:
MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

■Operation on error
A system configuration may not be detected if an error occurs on the AnyWireASLINK master module.
If an error code is displayed, take corrective actions by referring to the manual for the AnyWireASLINK master module, then
perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

3 AnyWireASLINK
28 3.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
3.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against
System Configuration
The system configuration displayed in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window can be verified against the slave modules
connected to an AnyWireASLINK master module.
The result is displayed in the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.
Verify a system configuration when it is manually created or edited.
3
Operating procedure
1. Click the [Verify] button in the "AnyWireASLINK

1. Click
Configuration" window.

2. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Verification of the Configuration with
the Connected Module after Address Auto-recognition," then
2. Check click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
3. Click refer to the following:
MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

The verification results are displayed in the "Verification Result of

the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.

The display is switched by right-clicking on the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected
Module" window and selecting "Display All"/"Display Mismatch Only"/"Display other than Match."
The cursor jumps to the corresponding location in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window by double-
clicking the row with "Mismatch" in the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected Module"
window.

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration 29
 3.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS
Parameters can be read from and written to a slave module.
For the operation methods of the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window, refer to the following:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

• The data backup/restoration function is useful to read/write the parameters of multiple devices supporting
iQSS in a batch. (Page 35 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS)
• The useful function (linkage with dedicated tools) can also be used in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration"
window. (Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties))

Operating procedure
■Reading parameters
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of modules' or
'Device map area' in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration"
window, then right-click it and select [Online]  [Parameter
Processing of Slave Module] from the shortcut menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Module" screen appears.

2. Select "Parameter read."

3. Select a parameter to be read.

4. Click the [Execute] button.

The selected parameter is read and the value is displayed in the
column of "Read Value."

3 AnyWireASLINK
30 3.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
■Writing parameters
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of modules' or
'Device map area' in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration"
window, then right-click it and select [Online]  [Parameter
Processing of Slave Module] from the shortcut menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Module" screen appears.

2. Select "Parameter write."

3. Select a parameter to be written.

4. Enter a value in the column of "Write Value."

5. Click the [Execute] button.

The value entered in the column of "Write Value" is written to the
device supporting iQSS.

"Parameter Processing of Slave Module" screen

Item Description
Target Module Information Information for the selected slave module is displayed.
Method selection Select processing to be executed for the selected slave module.
• Parameter read: Parameters are read from the selected slave module.
• Parameter write: Parameters are written to the selected slave module.
Parameter Information [Clear All "Read Value"] button Click this to clear all setting details that are read by "Parameter read."
[Clear All "Write Value"] button Click this to clear all setting details that are written by "Parameter write."
[Import] button Click this to read contents of parameter processing created in a CSV file.
[Export] button Click this to output contents of parameter processing set in this screen to a CSV
file.

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 31
 Considerations
■Operation after writing parameters
When parameters of a slave module are written, the slave module operates according to the parameters; therefore, note that
the slave module may change its operation. Turning the power OFF and ON is not required after the parameter writing. For
details on the parameters, refer to the manual for a slave module used.

■A blank in "Write Value"

The device parameter of which "Write Value" is blank retains the value written in a slave module. However, if no parameters
have values in "Write Value," "Parameter write" cannot be executed.

■Operation on error
If a module being used has an error, parameters of a slave module may not be read/written properly. If an error code is
displayed, take corrective actions by referring to the manual for the module used, then read/write parameters again.

3 AnyWireASLINK
32 3.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
3.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
The connection statuses of devices supporting iQSS can be monitored.

Operating procedure
1. Select [Diagnostics]  [Sensor/Device Monitor] with an
engineering tool.
3
1. Select
2. Select an AnyWireASLINK master module in the "Module
Selection (Sensor/Device Monitor)" screen, and click the [OK]
2. Select button.

3. Click

3. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
2. Click refer to the following:
1. Check MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

The "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in

'List of modules' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device
List of modules
Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
Select
Device map area
the "Monitoring Information" window. (Page 391
AnyWireASLINK)

Monitoring Information
window

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 33
 Considerations when monitoring devices supporting iQSS
■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function
The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

■Time taken to display the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen

When displaying the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen, a master module reads information from a slave
module.
Therefore, it may take time to display the screen depending on the number of slave modules.

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in an AnyWireASLINK master module.
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the AnyWireASLINK master module, then
perform the sensor/device monitor function again.
MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

■Replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor

If replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor, perform an automatic detection of connected devices
in the monitor.

3 AnyWireASLINK
34 3.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting
iQSS
Backing up the information of a device supporting iQSS to an SD memory card and restoring it to a module simplifies the
setting change for changeover.

M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

3
SET M1000

M1000 SD1288.A
72 SET M1100

M1100
104 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1050 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

M1200
SET M1200 Data backup/restoration
command
173 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
234 MOV H103 SD1437

MOV H0FFFF SD1438

MOV H3FF SD1439

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1436

Address 1 to 4 Address 5
SD memory card ID513 (201H) to ID517 (205H)
ID516 (204H)

iQSS

ASLINK

20141210_12
Data backup Address 1
0003_IN_ _0513 ID513 (201H)

Address 1
Setting data of Setting data
ID513 (201H) Data restoration

0003_IN_ _0517 Address 5

Data backup ID517 (205H)

Address 5
Setting data of
ID517 (205H) Setting data
Data restoration

In such a case as limited production of diversified products, the data backup/restoration function is useful for
switching multiple sensor settings from for product A to for product B in a batch.

Function Reference
Data backup Page 39 Data backup
Page 40 Program execution for data backup
Data restoration Page 47 Data restoration
Page 48 Program execution for data restoration

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 35
 Backup folder/file
Backup data is created in the 'iQSS' folder in the root directory when backing up the data.
If no 'iQSS' folder exists when backing up the data, an 'iQSS' folder will be newly created.
Up to 100 backup folders (date_number) can be created in the 'ASLINK' folder.
Do not change a backup folder name, configuration or saved file. Otherwise, data may not be restored properly.
For the backup file capacity, refer to the following:
Page 407 Backup File Capacity

■Backup folder configuration

The following figure shows the backup folder configuration in an SD memory card.
1) Backup folder 2) Backup folder Backup data
Root directory (Date_Number) (Start I/O number_I/O
Maximum of 100 Type_ID Number)

/ iQSS ASLINK 20141210_12 0003_ IN_ _0513

ID_IN__0513.QBR
(Backup file)

SSBRINF.QBI
(System file)
Backup data

0003_ IN_ _0514

ID_IN__0514.QBR
(Backup file)

SSBRINF.QBI
(System file)

■Backup folder name

1) Date_Number
2014 12 10 12
Arbitrary number (2-digit (00 to 99) decimal)
Backup date (2-digit decimal)
Backup month (2-digit decimal)
Backup year (4-digit decimal)
2) Start I/O number_I/O type_ID number
0003 IN_ 0513
ID number (4-digit decimal)
OUT or IN_ (OUT: output slave module IN_: input/combined slave module)
AnyWireASLINK master module start I/O number (4-digit hexadecimal) (A value of start I/O number divided by 16)

■Backup file name

ID IN_ 0513 .QBR

ID number (4-digit decimal)

OUT or IN_ (OUT: output slave module IN_: input/combined slave module)

3 AnyWireASLINK
36 3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Points to be checked before data backup/restoration
■Check the availability of data backup/restoration
The data can be backed up and restored when an AnyWireASLINK master module satisfies the following conditions.
Perform the automatic address detection function and the parameter batch read function before data backup/restoration.
Condition to be checked Master module X/Y signal Signal status
Module READY Xn0 ON
DP/DN short error Xn1 OFF
Transmission cable voltage drop error Xn3 OFF 3
DP/DN disconnection error Xn4 OFF
Slave module alarm signal X(n+1)0 OFF*1
Parameter access completion flag X(n+1)1 ON
Parameter access error X(n+1)2 OFF
Automatic address detection flag X(n+1)4 OFF

*1 Excluding when the error code is 0131H.

Considerations for data backup/restoration

■Use of an SD memory card
• During a data backup or restoration, do not perform the following actions: turning OFF the power, resetting a module, and
inserting or removing an SD memory card.
Otherwise, the data backup or restoration will be interrupted and the data will not be backed up or restored properly.
• Normal backup data cannot be created if the memory size or the number of files exceeds the maximum storage capacity of
an SD memory card during a data backup.

■Operations with a display unit during data backup

If any of the following operations are performed with a display unit during data backup, the operation will be completed
abnormally and the error is displayed on the display unit.
Operation name
Project data batch save/load function
File deletion in the "Memory card operation menu" screen of a display unit

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 37
 ■Unavailable operations and functions at the same time as data backup
If any of the following operations and functions are performed during data backup, the backup will be completed abnormally
and the error cause is stored in SD1452 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module).
The error is returned to the request source which performs the operation or function.
Operation/function name*1
Operation with an engineering tool Change TC setting
Online change (ladder mode)
Online change (inactive block) for SFC program
Write to PLC (including writing data to the CPU module during RUN)
Write title
Password/keyword
• New (registration/change)
• Delete
• Disable
Format PLC memory
Clear PLC memory (clear all file registers)
Arrange PLC memory
Delete PLC data
Write/delete PLC user data
Program memory batch download
CPU module change function with SD memory card
Sampling trace function
• Start trace
• Register trace
• Write to PLC
Writing protocol setting data to the CPU module (predefined protocol support function)
Project data batch save/load function
Operations with CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Data logging function
• Deleting/writing the data logging setting
• Stopping data logging operation
• Deleting data logging file(s)
Others Writing or deleting files using FTP or MC protocol
File transfer function (FTP server) of the built-in Ethernet function
File transfer function (FTP client) of the built-in Ethernet function
Register/cancel display unit menu
CPU module data backup/restoration function

*1 Available operations and functions differ between LCPUs and QCPUs. For details, refer to the user's manual of a CPU module used.
When data is backed up or restored during a data logging, the performance of the data logging will be reduced.
Therefore, sampled data may be partially missed and the data missing frequency may be increased.

■Communication load
When data is backed up or restored, the load of the service processing is temporarily increased. Consequently, a timeout
error may occur in other communications.
To avoid a timeout error, review the value set for "Service Processing Setting" on the [PLC System] tab in "PLC parameter."

■Backup folder name

Do not change an underscore and a subsequent number of a backup folder name (date_number).
If they are changed, the data may not be restored properly.
20141210_12

Do not change.

3 AnyWireASLINK
38 3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be saved in an SD memory card for each ID by using an engineering tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of modules' or
'Device map area' in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration"
window, then right-click it and select [Online]  [Backup
Slave Module] from the shortcut menu. 3
1. Select
2. Read the message and click the [Yes] or [OK] button.
2. Select Data is backed up.

Considerations for a data backup

■Setting the backup setting
The initial values of the backup setting (SD1438 and SD1444) are as follows:
• SD1438 (folder number setting): FFFFH (automatic specification)
• Lower 8 bits of SD1444 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when backing up data with the settings other than the one above. (Page 40 Program execution for data
backup)

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 39
 Program execution for data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up in an SD memory card with a program.

Operating procedure

Start

Acquire the right to use special relays/registers.

Page 41 Acquiring a right to use

Completion of right-to-use acquisition

Set the settings for data backup.

Page 41 Setting the backup setting

Request a data backup.

Page 42 Performing a data backup

Execution of data backup Request a cancellation of backup process.

Page 42 Requiring a data backup cancellation

Normal completion of backup process Cancellation of backup process

Backup error

Enable the next backup process.

Page 42 Releasing the right to use

Complete

3 AnyWireASLINK
40 3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Execution method of data backup
The target device for data backup can be set with a program.

■Acquiring a right to use

Set a value within the range from 1000H to 1FFFH to SD1435.

Precautions
Right to use for data backup
• Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data backup. 3
• To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time, acquiring a right to use
of them for data backup is required.
• To acquire a right to use, specify a value which is not duplicate with values for other request sources to SD1435, and check
that the value set to SD1435 is stored to SD1436.
• Normal operation cannot be assured if the data backup function is performed without confirming the acquisition of a right to
use.

■Setting the backup setting

1. Setting a target module type
Set the target module type for data backup to the lower 8 bits of SD1437.
Target module type Description
1H: AnyWireASLINK Set the target module type.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set the unit of execution for data backup to the upper 8 bits of SD1437.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the AnyWireASLINK interface module with the
specified start I/O number.
2H: ID unit Set this to specify only the device supporting iQSS with the specified ID number among the devices supporting iQSS
which are connected to the AnyWireASLINK interface module with the specified start I/O number.

3. Setting a number for a data backup folder name

Set the number for a backup folder name to SD1438.
Target folder Description
FFFFH: Automatic specification Use the smallest number for a new backup folder name among the unused numbers as the backup folder name.
(default) An error occurs when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the
upper limit.
FFFEH: Automatic specification Use the smallest number for a new backup folder name among the unused numbers as the backup folder name.
(folder deletion supported) The oldest folder is deleted and the number of the deleted folder is used for a new backup folder name when unused
number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the upper limit.
00 to 99: Target folder specification Set the number for a backup folder name.
When another folder with the same number exists, the operation will be as follows:
■For module unit
• The backup folder with the same number is deleted, and a new backup folder is created.
■For ID unit
• Data in the backup folder with the same number is overwritten.

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 41
 4. Setting a target device
• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the start I/O number of a
target device for data backup to SD1439.
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number of an
AnyWireASLINK master module, which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS, by 16.

• Setting an ID number
When '2H' (ID unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the ID number of a target device
for data backup to SD1440.
For details on the setting method of an ID number, refer to the manual of the AnyWireASLINK device used.
Target device (ID number) Description
0 to 255 (0FFH): Output slave When '2H' (ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set the ID number of a target device supporting iQSS.
module ID number
512 (200H) to 767 (2FFH): Input/
combined slave module ID number*1

*1 Specify the address + 512 (200H) for an input/combined slave module.

5. Setting the operation setting when a data backup error occurs
Set the operation on error to the lower 8 bits of SD1444 in order to backup data for multiple devices supporting iQSS.
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data backup even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting
iQSS.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data backup even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting
iQSS.

■Performing a data backup

Data is backed up if SM1436 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready).
Once data is backed up, SD1446 will be '2H' (being executed).

■Requiring a data backup cancellation

The data backup stops if SM1442 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready) or '2H' (being executed).

■Releasing the right to use

When SM1435 is turned ON after a data backup is completed (including a cancellation or an error), the right to use is released
and the next data backup is ready to be performed.
SM1435 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1435 remains ON since no processing is performed.
In that case, set SM1435 to OFF.

3 AnyWireASLINK
42 3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data backup
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

AnyWireASLINK master module start I/O number 30

Address 1 to 4 Address 5
ID513 (201H) to
ID516 (204H)
ID517 (205H) 3
Backup target

• Target module type: AnyWireASLINK

• Execution unit: Module
• Folder number setting: 12
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.30
• Operation setting on error: Stop

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 43
 ■Devices used in the program
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Backup execution trigger 
M1100 Backup right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Backup right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Backup setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Backup execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Backup execution normal completion display 
M3500 Backup execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Backup right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D5000 Backup number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Backup error cause in a module 
D5003 Backup error cause in a device 
SM1435 Backup execution enabled 
SM1436 Backup request 
SM1442 Backup cancellation request 
SD1435 Backup use request 1010H
SD1436 Backup right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Backup target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 1H
Upper 8 bits: 1H
SD1438 Backup folder number setting 12
SD1439 Backup target setting (target module) 3H
SD1444 Operation setting when a data backup error occurs 1H
SD1446 Backup execution status 
SD1448 Backup number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Backup error cause in a module 
SD1453 Backup error cause in a device 
X30 Module READY 
X31 DP/DN short error 
X33 Transmission cable voltage drop error 
X34 DP/DN disconnection error 
X40 Slave module alarm signal 
X41 Parameter access completion flag 
X42 Parameter access error 
X44 Automatic address detection flag 

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

3 AnyWireASLINK
44 3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 X30 X31 X33 X34 X40 X41 X42 X44

8

M1100
SET M1100
3
18 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1010 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200

M1200
27 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
41 MOV H101 SD1437

MOV K12 SD1438

MOV H3 SD1439

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1436

51 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

57 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
67 SET SM1435

M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300

M2000
75 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

84 END

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 45
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Executing data backup]
(8) Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(18) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(27) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(41) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the operation setting when a data backup error occurs.
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(51) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(57) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(67) Enable the data backup execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(75) Set the backup cancellation request.

3 AnyWireASLINK
46 3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data restoration
Information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS for each ID by using an engineering
tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of modules' or
'Device map area' in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration"
window, then right-click it and select [Online]  [Restore 3
Slave Module] from the shortcut menu.
1. Select
2. Select backup data to be restored, and click the [Execute]
2. Select button.

A list of the backup folder names (date_number) is

displayed in the column of "Folder Name."
Backup data is stored in backup folders for each
folder name (Start I/O number_I/O type_ID
number) in an SD memory card.
For details on the backup folder configuration,
1. Select refer to the following:
Page 36 Backup folder configuration

2. Click 3. Read the message and click the [OK] button.

Data is restored.

Considerations for data restoration

■Setting the restoration setting
The initial value of the restoration setting (SD1444) is as follows:
• Lower 8 bits of SD1444 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when restoring data with the settings other than above. (Page 48 Program execution for data restoration)

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 47
 Program execution for data restoration
The information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS with a program.

Operating procedure

Start

Acquire the right to use special relays/registers.

Page 49 Acquiring a right to use

Completion of right-to-use acquisition

Set the settings for data restoration.

Page 49 Setting the restoration setting

Request a data restoration

Page 50 Performing a data restoration

Execution of data restoration Request a cancellation of restoration process.

Page 50 Requiring a data restoration cancellation

Normal completion of restoration process Cancellation of restoration process

Restoration error

Enable the next restoration process.

Page 50 Releasing the right to use

Complete

3 AnyWireASLINK
48 3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Execution method of data restoration
The target device for data restoration can be set with a program.

■Acquiring a right to use

Set a value within the range from 1000H to 1FFFH to SD1435.

Precautions
Right to use for data backup
• Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data restoration. 3
• To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time, acquiring a right to use
of them for data backup is required.
• To acquire a right to use, specify a value which is not duplicate with values for other request sources to SD1435, and check
that the value set to SD1435 is stored to SD1436.
• Normal operation cannot be assured if the data backup function is performed without confirming the acquisition of a right to
use.

■Setting the restoration setting

1. Setting a target module type
Set the target module type for data restoration to the lower 8 bits of SD1437.
Target module type Description
1H: AnyWireASLINK Set the target module type.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set the unit of execution for data restoration to the upper 8 bits of SD1437.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the AnyWireASLINK interface module with the
specified start I/O number.
2H: ID unit Set this to specify only the device supporting iQSS with the specified ID number among the devices supporting iQSS
which are connected to the AnyWireASLINK interface module with the specified start I/O number.

3. Selecting a folder for data restoration

Set the number for backup folder name, from which data is to be restored, to SD1438.
Target folder Description
00 to 99: Target folder specification Specify the number among the numbers for backup folder name, 00 to 99.

4. Setting a target device

• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the start I/O number of a
target device for data restoration to SD1439.
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number of an
AnyWireASLINK master module, which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS, by 16.

• Setting an ID number
When '2H' (ID unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the ID number of a target device
for data restoration to SD1440.
For details on the setting method of an ID number, refer to the manual of the AnyWireASLINK device used.
Target device (ID number) Description
0 to 255 (0FFH): Output slave When '2H' (ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set the ID number of a target device supporting iQSS.
module ID number
512 (200H) to 767 (2FFH): Input/
combined slave module ID number*1

*1 Specify the address + 512 (200H) for an input/combined slave module.

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 49
 5. Setting the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs
Set the operation on error to the lower 8 bits of SD1444 in order to in order to restore data for multiple devices supporting
iQSS.
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data restoration even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data restoration even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting
iQSS.

■Performing a data restoration

Data is restored if SM1439 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready).
Once data is restored, SD1446 will be '2H' (being executed).

■Requiring a data restoration cancellation

The data restoration stops if SM1442 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready) or '2H' (being executed).

■Releasing the right to use

When SM1435 is turned ON after a data restoration is completed (including a cancellation or an error), the right to use is
released and the next data restoration is ready to be performed.
SM1435 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1435 remains ON since no processing is performed.
In that case, set SM1435 to OFF.

3 AnyWireASLINK
50 3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data restoration
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

AnyWireASLINK master module start I/O number 30

Address 1 to 4 Address 5
ID513 (201H) to
ID516 (204H)
ID517 (205H) 3
Restoration target

• Target module type: AnyWireASLINK

• Execution unit: ID
• Folder number setting: 12
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.30
• Target device (ID number): Address 5, ID517 (205H)
• Operation setting on error: Stop

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 51
 ■Devices used in the program
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Restoration execution trigger 
M1100 Restoration right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Restoration setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Restoration execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Restoration execution normal completion display 
M3500 Restoration execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Restoration right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D5000 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Restoration error cause in a module 
D5003 Restoration error cause in a device 
SM1435 Restoration execution enabled 
SM1439 Restoration request 
SM1442 Restoration cancellation request 
SD1435 Restoration use request 1020H
SD1436 Restoration right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Restoration target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 1H
Upper 8 bits: 2H
SD1438 Restoration folder number setting 12
SD1439 Restoration target setting (target module) 3H
SD1440 Restoration target setting (target device 1) 517
SD1444 Operation setting when a data restoration error occurs 1H
SD1446 Restoration execution status 
SD1448 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Restoration error cause in a module 
SD1453 Restoration error cause in a device 
X30 Module READY 
X31 DP/DN short error 
X33 Transmission cable voltage drop error 
X34 DP/DN disconnection error 
X40 Slave module alarm signal 
X41 Parameter access completion flag 
X42 Parameter access error 
X44 Automatic address detection flag 

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

3 AnyWireASLINK
52 3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 X30 X31 X33 X34 X40 X41 X42 X44

8

M1100
SET M1100
3
18 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1020 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200

M1200
27 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
41 MOV H201 SD1437

MOV K12 SD1438

MOV H3 SD1439

MOV K517 SD1440

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1439

53 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

59 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
69 SET SM1435

M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300

M2000
77 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

86 END

3 AnyWireASLINK
3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 53
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Executing data restoration]
(8) Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(18) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(27) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(41) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs.
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(53) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(59) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(69) Enable the data restoration execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(77) Set the restoration cancellation request.

3 AnyWireASLINK
54 3.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
4 CC-Link
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for MELSEC-L series or Q series
connected to CC-Link.

System configuration
This section explains the iQ Sensor Solution functions for CC-Link using the following system configuration.

Engineering tool CPU module CC-Link master/local module

Analog input module (Voltage/current input) CC-Link Sensor supporting iQSS

Type Model name Manufacturer

Engineering tool GX Works2 SWnDND-GXW2 and SWnDNC-GXW2 ('n' indicates Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
its version.)
CPU module LCPU L26CPU-BT
CC-Link master/local module LJ61BT11
Analog input module (voltage/current input) AJ65SBT2B-64AD
CC-Link sensor supporting Communication unit for SC-GU3-01 Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co.,
iQSS CC-Link Ltd.
Head-separated dual DPS-401
display digital pressure
sensor
Digital fiber sensor FX-501
Digital laser sensor LS-403

For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link, refer to the following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

Considerations for a system configuration

■Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function
Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system configuration, and set
network parameters and other settings required for communication with a device supporting iQSS.

4 CC-Link
55
 Before using iQ Sensor Solution functions
■Setting refresh devices (network parameter)
Some iQ Sensor Solution functions cannot be performed if devices to refresh the data of remote input (RX), remote output
(RY), remote register (RWr), and remote register (RWw) are not set.
Set devices used to data refresh in advance.
For setting devices used to data refresh, refer to the following:
• MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
• MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

■Checking if "Read Model Name of Slave Station" is selected

The model name of a slave station can be read only when the checkbox of "Read Model Name of Slave Station" is selected.
Check that the checkbox of "Read Model Name of Slave Station" is selected, and write data to a CPU module in advance.
If the checkbox is not selected, write data to a CPU module in accordance with the following procedure.

Operating procedure
For details on the display methods of the "Network Parameter - CC-Link Module
Configuration" screen, refer to the following:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

1. Click the [Operation Setting] button in the "Network Parameter - CC-Link Module
Configuration" screen.

2. Select the checkbox of "Read Model Name of Slave Station" in the "Operation
Setting" screen, and click the [OK] button.
2. Click
1. Check 3. Click the [End] button, and select [Online]  [Write to PLC].

4. Power OFF to ON or reset the CPU module.

Including a device connected to a communication module as a target

Some or all remote registers of a target device are used in a system while performing an iQ Sensor Solution function.
Therefore, add "Remote register use prohibited status (SW0160 to SW0163)" to the interlock when creating a program.

4 CC-Link
56
4.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A slave station connected to a CC-Link master/local module can be detected and the information can be displayed in the "CC-
Link Configuration" window.
For the creation method of a new project and the operation methods of the "CC-Link Configuration" window, refer to the
following:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

Operating procedure
1. Create a new project in an engineering tool.

2. Select "Parameter"  "Network Parameter"  "CC-Link" on 4

the Project view.
Select

2. Select 1. Check
3. Select the checkbox of "Set the station information in the CC-
Link configuration window."
4. Click
4. Select "Number of Modules."

5. Read the message and click the [OK] button.

6. Select and enter necessary parameters in the "Network

Parameter - CC-Link Module Configuration" screen.

7. Check that the checkbox of "Read Model Name of Slave

3.Enter
Station" is selected in the "Operation Setting" screen.
Page 56 Checking if "Read Model Name of Slave Station" is
selected

8. Click the [CC-Link Configuration Setting] button.

Click

4 CC-Link
4.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 57
 9. Click the [Detect Now] button in the "CC-Link Configuration"
window.
Click

10. Read the message and select the checkbox of "Set the
Module Connected to the Communication Module also as the
Read Object," then click the [Yes] button.
In any of the following cases, select the checkbox of "Set the
1. Check Module Connected to the Communication Module also as the
Read Object."
2. Click • The automatic detection function of connected devices is used
for the first time.
• The CPU module was reset or turned OFF.
• The actual system configuration was changed.
The actual system configuration is displayed in the "CC-Link
Select
Configuration" window.

11. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "CC-Link

List of stations
Configuration" window.
The setting in the "CC-Link Configuration" window is applied to the
Device map area network parameter and completed.

Output window

4 CC-Link
58 4.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS
■Mode setting and transmission rate
Once an automatic detection of connected devices is performed, the mode setting and the transmission rate which have been
set in a CC-Link master/local module are also detected.

■Operation on error
The system configuration cannot be detected if an error occurs on the master station.
Take corrective actions and perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■An error in settings

Error information is displayed in the "Output" window when an error occurred.
Double-click the information and correct the error at the jumped destination.
4
■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected
When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"

■Display of "Module With No Profile Found"

When "Module with No Profile Found" is displayed, it can be changed to "General CC-Link Module" by the following operation:
Select a target module, and select [CC-Link Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Change to General CC-Link Module].

■Automatic CC-Link startup

When the automatic CC-Link startup is used, power OFF to ON or reset the CPU module after writing the data to a CPU
module. By performing automatic detection of connected devices again, the model name of a slave station can be read.
For details on the automatic CC-Link startup function, refer to the following:
(MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual)
(MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual)

■Non-sequential station number of slave stations

When an automatic detection of connected devices is performed in a system configuration in which the station numbers of
slave stations are not sequential, a general-purpose remote I/O station is automatically set for a station without a station
number as a reserved station.
Arrange the stations and change the modules in accordance with the actual module configuration.

■Display of "General Module"

After performing an automatic detection of connected devices, a reserved station and a station which is not included in the
network parameter are displayed as "General Module."
In that case, turn the power OFF, and ON again in the order from the slave station to the master station. Then, perform an
automatic detection of connected devices again.

■System configuration change

When a system configuration is changed (stations are added or changed), a slave station may not be detected.
In that case, turn the power OFF, and ON again in the order from the slave station to the master station. Then, perform an
automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Standby master station in a system configuration

When a standby master station is included in a system configuration, the last station number is set for the station.
Change the station number in accordance with the actual system configuration.

■Operation switching from the standby master operation to the master operation
When the standby master operation is switched to the master operation, a station whose operation is switched to the master
operation will not be detected.
In that case, turn the power OFF, and ON again in the order from the standby master station to the master station. Then,
perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

4 CC-Link
4.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 59
 ■Not setting automatic refresh parameters
The following iQ Sensor Solution functions cannot be performed if the automatic refresh parameters (remote input (RX),
remote output (RY), remote register (RWr), and remote register (RWw)) are not set.
• Automatic detection function of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module
• Sensor parameter read/write function
Write the automatic refresh parameters to a CPU module before performing an iQ Sensor Solution function.
For details on the automatic refresh parameters, refer to the following:
• MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
• MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

■Unselecting the "Read Model Name of Slave Station" checkbox

The following iQ Sensor Solution functions cannot be performed because the model name of a slave station cannot be read
unless the checkbox of "Read Model Name of Slave Station" in the "Operation Setting" screen is selected.
• Automatic detection of connected devices, verification of connected devices and configurations
• Sensor/device monitor
"General CC-Link module" is displayed in the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC-Link" screen.
• Data backup/restoration
Select the checkbox of "Read Model Name of Slave Station," and write data to a CPU module before performing an iQ Sensor
Solution function.
When selecting the checkbox of "Read Model Name of Slave Station," refer to the following:
Page 56 Checking if "Read Model Name of Slave Station" is selected

4 CC-Link
60 4.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Detecting devices connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
To display devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), on a system configuration
diagram, first a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) needs to be detected in the "CC-Link Configuration" window. Then, perform an
automatic detection of connected devices in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window in order to detect and display
devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
For the considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), refer to the
following:
Page 63 Considerations when detecting devices connected to a bridge module

System configuration
CPU module CC-Link master/local module
4

CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module

ASLINKAMP (Input) ASLINKER (Input)

Type Model name Manufacturer

CPU module LCPU L26CPU-BT Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
CC-Link master/local module LJ61BT11
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module NZ2AW1C2AL
ASLINKAMP (Input) Photoelectric sensor B289SB-01AP-CAM20 (ASLINKAMP master) AnyWire Corporation
B289SB-01AP-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
Fiber sensor B289SB-01AF-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
B289SB-01AF-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
ASLINKER (Input) B281SB-02U-CC20

■Setting the operation mode for CC-Link Ver.2-compatible slave station

A bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) is a CC-Link Ver.2-compatible slave station.
To detect and display a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) on a system configuration diagram, set the operation mode in which
CC-Link Ver.2-compatible slave station works.
The following table shows the combinations of the parameter setting for a CC-Link master/local module and the CC-Link
operation mode for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
CC-Link master/local module (L26CPU-BT, L26CPU-PBT, LJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N) Bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
Parameter setting item CC-Link operation mode
Mode Station information (station type)
Remote net Ver.2 mode Ver.2 remote device station Ver.2.00
Remote net additional mode

For the information of the version and mode of CC-Link, refer to the following:
• MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
• MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
• CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

4 CC-Link
4.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 61
 Operating procedure
1. Detect and display a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) in the
1. Select 2. Check "CC-Link Configuration" window.
For the method for detecting and displaying a bridge module
(NZ2AW1C2AL) automatically in the "CC-Link Configuration"
window, refer to the following:
Page 57 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
3. Click

2. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) in 'List of stations' or

'Device map area' in the "CC-Link Configuration" window,
then right-click it and select [Open System Configuration] 
1. Select [Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from the shortcut
2. Select menu.

3. Click the [Detect Now] button in the "AnyWireASLINK

Configuration" window.

Click

4. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
1. Check
refer to the following:
2. Click
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

4 CC-Link
62 4.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
 The devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a bridge
Select
module (NZ2AW1C2AL), are displayed in the "AnyWireASLINK
Configuration" window.

5. Select [Close with Enabling the Setting] in the

"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.
The setting of the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window is
enabled and the window is closed.

Considerations when detecting devices connected to a bridge module

4
■Automatic address detection
When the actual system configuration was changed, perform the automatic address detection before using an iQ Sensor
Solution function.
For details on the automatic address detection, refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Settings required for communication

To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Settings in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window

After performing an automatic detection of connected devices, the settings of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to
a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) are not saved until [Close with Reflecting the Setting] is selected in the "CC-Link
Configuration" window.
Make sure to select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "CC-Link Configuration" window after selecting [Close with
Enabling the Setting] in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

■Operation on error
A system configuration may not be detected if an error occurs on a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
If an error code is displayed, take corrective actions by referring to the manual for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), then
perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

4 CC-Link
4.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 63
 4.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against
System Configuration
The system configuration displayed in the "CC-Link Configuration" window can be verified against the slave stations
connected to a CC-Link master/local module.
The result is displayed in the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.
Verify a system configuration when it is manually created or edited.

Operating procedure
1. Click the [Verify] button in the "CC-Link Configuration"
window.
1. Click
2. Read the message and select the checkbox of "Set the
Module Connected to the Communication Module also as the
Read Object," then click the [Yes] button.
In any of the following cases, select the checkbox of "Set the
Module Connected to the Communication Module also as the
2. Check Read Object."

3. Click
• The verification function of connected devices and
configurations is used for the first time
• The CPU module was reset or turned OFF.
• The actual system configuration was changed.
The verification results are displayed in the "Verification Result of
the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.

• The display is switched by right-clicking on the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected
Module" window and selecting "Display All"/"Display Mismatch Only"/"Display other than Match."
• The cursor jumps to the corresponding location in the "CC-Link Configuration" window by double-clicking
the row with "Mismatch" in the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.

4 CC-Link
64 4.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration
■Verification method of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1C2AL)
A system configuration of devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), can be verified
by the following operation:

Operating procedure
1. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) in 'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "CC-Link Configuration" window.

2. Select [CC-Link Configuration]  [Open System Configuration]  [Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration].

3. Select [AnyWireASLINK Configuration]  [Online]  [Verification of the Configuration with the Connected Module] in the
"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

4 CC-Link
4.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration 65
 Considerations
■Settings required for communication
To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

4 CC-Link
66 4.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration
4.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS
Parameters can be read from and written to a slave station.
For the operation methods of the "CC-Link Configuration" window, refer to the following:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

• When using a CC-Link master/local module (QJ61BT11N), the parameters of inverters (FR-A720 series and
FR-A740 series) can be read/written.
• The data backup/restoration function is useful to read/write the parameters of multiple devices supporting
iQSS in a batch. (Page 75 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS) 4
• The useful functions (linkage with dedicated tools, and command execution to slave stations) can also be
used in the "CC-Link Configuration" window. (Page 366 Useful Functions)

Operating procedure
■Reading parameters
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of stations' or
'Device map area' in the "CC-Link Configuration" window,
then right-click it and select [Online]  [Parameter
Processing of Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen appears.

2. Select a target to be read.

3. Select a parameter to be read.

4. Click the [Execute] button.

The selected parameter is read and the value is displayed in the
column of "Read Value."

4 CC-Link
4.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 67
 ■Writing parameters
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of stations' or
'Device map area' in the "CC-Link Configuration" window,
then right-click it and select [Online]  [Parameter
Processing of Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen appears.

2. Select a target to be written.

3. Select a parameter to be written.

4. Enter a value in the column of "Write Value."

5. Click the [Execute] button.

The value entered in the column of "Write Value" is written to the
device supporting iQSS.

Considerations
■Operation after writing parameters
When parameters of a slave station are written, the slave station operates according to the parameters; therefore, note that
the slave station may change its operation.
For details on parameters, refer to the manual for a slave station used.

■A blank in "Write Value"

"Parameter write" cannot be executed if there is even one blank in "Write Value."

■Operation on error
If a module being used has an error, parameters of slave stations may not be read/written properly. Take corrective actions
and read/write parameters again.

4 CC-Link
68 4.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
Reading/writing parameters of devices supporting iQSS which
are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
Parameters of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) can be read and written.

Operating procedure
1. Detect devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) in the "AnyWireASLINK
Configuration" window. (Page 61 Detecting devices
connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL))

2. Read or write parameters of the detected devices. (Page

30 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS)

4 CC-Link
4.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 69
 4.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
The connection statuses of devices supporting iQSS can be monitored.

Operating procedure
1. Select [Diagnostics]  [Sensor/Device Monitor] with an
engineering tool.

1. Select
2. Select a CC-Link master/local module in the "Module
Selection (Sensor/Device Monitor)" screen, and click the [OK]
button.

2. Select

3. Click

3. Read the message and select the checkbox of "Set the

Module Connected to the Communication Module also as the
Read Object," then click the [Yes] button.
In any of the following cases, select the checkbox of "Set the
1. Check Module Connected to the Communication Module also as the
Read Object."
2. Click • The automatic detection function of connected devices is used
for the first time.
• The CPU module was reset or turned OFF.
• The actual system configuration was changed.
The "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC-Link" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in

'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device
List of stations Monitor for CC-Link" screen.
Select
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
Device map area the "Monitoring Information" window.

Monitoring Information
window

4 CC-Link
70 4.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Considerations when monitoring devices supporting iQSS
■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function
The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave station correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a master station.
4
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the CC-Link master/local module, then perform
the sensor/device monitor function again.

4 CC-Link
4.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 71
 Monitoring devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
Devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) can be displayed in the "Sensor/Device
Monitor for CC-Link" screen by the following operation.

Operating procedure
1. Open the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC-Link" screen.
(Page 70 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS)

2. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) in 'List of stations' or

'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC-Link"
screen, then right-click it and select [Open System
Configuration]  [Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from
the shortcut menu.

3. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

4 CC-Link
72 4.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
The "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in

'List of modules' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device
Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
the "Monitoring Information" window.

4 CC-Link
4.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 73
 Considerations when monitoring devices connected to a bridge module
■Settings required for communication
To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function

The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

■Time taken to display the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen

When displaying the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen, a bridge module reads information from a slave
module.
Therefore, it may take time to display the screen depending on the number of slave modules.

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), then perform
the sensor/device monitor function again.

■Replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor

If replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor, perform an automatic detection of connected devices
in the monitor.

4 CC-Link
74 4.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting
iQSS
Backing up the information of a device supporting iQSS to an SD memory card and restoring it to a module simplifies the
setting change for changeover.

M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 X10 X1F X11 SW80.0 SW80.1 SW160.0 SW160.1

69

114
M1100
= H0 SD1436 MOV
SET

H1030
M1100

D1000
Data backup/restoration
MOV D1000 SD1435
command
SET M1200

4
M1200
181 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

Station sub-ID 1

Setting data

SD memory card

iQSS

CC-Link

20141211_15 Station No.2

Data backup Station No. 1
Station No. 1
0001_0001

Setting data of
Setting data
station No. 1 Data restoration

0001_0002
Station No.2
Data backup

Setting data of
station No.2
Setting data
Data restoration

In such a case as limited production of diversified products, the data backup/restoration function is useful for
switching multiple sensor settings from for product A to for product B in a batch.

Function Reference
Data backup Page 81 Data backup
Page 82 Program execution for data backup
Data restoration Page 93 Data restoration
Page 94 Program execution for data restoration

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 75
 Backup folder/file
Backup data is created in the 'iQSS' folder in the root directory when backing up the data.
If no 'iQSS' folder exists when backing up the data, an 'iQSS' folder will be newly created.
Up to 100 backup folders (date_number) can be created in the 'CC-Link' folder.
Do not change a backup folder name, configuration or saved file. Otherwise, data may not be restored properly.
For the backup file capacity, refer to the following:
Page 407 Backup File Capacity

■Backup folder configuration

The following figure shows the backup folder configuration in an SD memory card.
1) Backup folder 2) Backup folder Backup data
Root directory (Date_Number) (I/O number_Station (Station number)
Maximum of 100 number)

/ iQSS CC-Link 20141211_15 0001_ 0001

3) STATION0001.QBR
(Backup file)

SSBRINF.QSI
(System file)

Backup data
(Station sub-ID number)

0001_ 0002

4) SUBID0001.QBR
(Backup file)

4) SUBID0002.QBR
(Backup file)

4) SUBID0003.QBR
(Backup file)

SSBRINF.QSI
(System file)

4 CC-Link
76 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Backup folder name
1) Date_Number
2014 12 11 15
Arbitrary number (2-digit (00 to 99) decimal)
Backup date (2-digit decimal)
Backup month (2-digit decimal)
Backup year (4-digit decimal)
2) Start I/O number_Station number
0001 0001
Station number (4-digit decimal)
CC-Link master/local module start I/O number (4-digit hexadecimal) (A value of start I/O number divided by 16)

■Backup file name 4

3) Station number

STATON0001.QBR

Station number (4-digit decimal)

4) Station sub-ID number

SUBID0001.QBR

Station sub-ID number (4-digit decimal)

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 77
 Points to be checked before data backup/restoration
■Check the availability of data backup/restoration
The data can be backed up and restored when a CC-Link master/local module and a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) satisfy
the following conditions.
Perform the automatic address detection function and the parameter batch read function before data backup/restoration.
The 'n' indicates the address assigned to the master station by the station number setting.
Module Condition to be checked Remote device RX signal Signal status
CC-Link master/local module Module error Xn0 OFF
Module READY XnF ON
Host station data link status Xn1 ON
Other station data link status*1 SW0080 to SW0083 OFF
*1
Remote register use prohibited status SW0160 to SW0163 OFF
Bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) Remote READY RX(n+D)B ON
(CC-Link operation mode Ver.2.00)
DP/DN short error RXn1 OFF
Transmission cable voltage drop error RXn3 OFF
DP/DN disconnection error RXn4 OFF
Slave module alarm signal RX(n+1)0 OFF*2
Parameter access completion flag RX(n+1)1 ON
Parameter access error RX(n+1)2 OFF
Automatic address detection flag RX(n+1)4 OFF

*1 Set the target station.

*2 Excluding when the error code is 0131H.

■The "Read Model Name of Slave Station" checkbox in the "Operation Setting" screen
Check that the checkbox of "Read Model Name of Slave Station" is selected in the "Operation Setting" screen before
performing the data backup/restoration function. If it is not selected, the data backup/restoration function cannot be
performed.
For details on the "Read Model Name of Slave Station" checkbox in the "Operation Setting" screen, refer to the following:
Page 56 Checking if "Read Model Name of Slave Station" is selected

■Interlock setting
Some or all remote registers of a target device are used in the system during a data backup/restoration.
Therefore, add "Remote register use prohibited status (SW0160 to SW0163)" to the interlock when creating a program.

■The station whose operating status is switched from the standby master station to master
station
The data backup/restoration function cannot be performed to a station in which the operation was switched from the standby
master operation to the master operation.
In that case, turn the power OFF, and ON again in the order from the standby master station to the master station. Then,
perform a data backup/restoration.

Considerations for data backup/restoration

■Use of an SD memory card
• During a data backup or restoration, do not perform the following actions: turning OFF the power, resetting a module, and
inserting or removing an SD memory card.
Otherwise, the data backup or restoration will be interrupted and the data will not be backed up or restored properly.
• Normal backup data cannot be created if the memory size or the number of files exceeds the maximum storage capacity of
an SD memory card during a data backup.

4 CC-Link
78 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Operations with a display unit during data backup
If any of the following operations are performed with a display unit during data backup, the operation will be completed
abnormally and the error is displayed on the display unit.
Operation name
Project data batch save/load function
File deletion in the "Memory card operation menu" screen of a display unit

■Unavailable operations and functions at the same time as data backup

If any of the following operations and functions are performed during data backup, the backup will be completed abnormally
and the error cause is stored in SD1452 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module).
The error is returned to the request source which performs the operation or function.
Operation/function name*1
Operation with an engineering tool Change TC setting
4
Online change (ladder mode)
Online change (inactive block) for SFC program
Write to PLC (including writing data to the CPU module during RUN)
Write title
Password/keyword
• New (registration/change)
• Delete
• Disable
Format PLC memory
Clear PLC memory (clear all file registers)
Arrange PLC memory
Delete PLC data
Write/delete PLC user data
Program memory batch download
CPU module change function with SD memory card
Sampling trace function
• Start trace
• Register trace
• Write to PLC
Writing protocol setting data to the CPU module (predefined protocol support function)
Project data batch save/load function
Operations with CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Data logging function
• Deleting/writing the data logging setting
• Stopping data logging operation
• Deleting data logging file(s)
Others Writing or deleting files using FTP or MC protocol
File transfer function (FTP server) of the built-in Ethernet function
File transfer function (FTP client) of the built-in Ethernet function
Register/cancel display unit menu
CPU module data backup/restoration function

*1 Available operations and functions differ between LCPUs and QCPUs. For details, refer to the user's manual of a CPU module used.
When data is backed up or restored during a data logging, the performance of the data logging will be reduced.
Therefore, sampled data may be partially missed and the data missing frequency may be increased.

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 79
 ■Communication load
When data is backed up or restored, the load of the service processing is temporarily increased. Consequently, a timeout
error may occur in other communications.
To avoid a timeout error, review the value set for "Service Processing Setting" on the [PLC System] tab in "PLC parameter."

■Backup folder name

Do not change an underscore and a subsequent number of a backup folder name (date_number).
If they are changed, the data may not be restored properly.
20141210_12

Do not change.

■When backing up the data of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1C2AL):
Backup data is stored in the 'CC-Link' backup folder.
The 'station sub-ID number' is equivalent to the 'ID' of a slave module connected to AnyWireASLINK.
The backup file (STATION0000.QBR) of the bridge module is not created.

4 CC-Link
80 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be saved in an SD memory card for each station by using an engineering tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of stations' or
'Device map area' in the "CC-Link Configuration" window,
then right-click it and select [Online]  [Backup Slave Station]
from the shortcut menu.
1. Select 2. Read the message and click the [Yes] or [OK] button.
Data is backed up.
4
2. Select

■Execution method of data backup for a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
Data can be backed up for a device supporting iQSS, which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), by the
following method.

Operating procedure
1. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) in 'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "CC-Link Configuration" window.

2. Right-click the module and select [Open System Configuration]  [Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from the
shortcut menu.
3. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration"
window, then right-click it and select [Online]  [Backup Slave Module] from the shortcut menu.

Considerations for a data backup

■Setting the backup setting
The initial values of the backup setting (SD1438 and SD1444) are as follows:
• SD1438 (folder number setting): FFFFH (automatic specification)
• Lower 8 bits of SD1444 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when backing up data with the settings other than the one above. (Page 82 Program execution for data
backup)

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 81
 Program execution for data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up in an SD memory card with a program.

Operating procedure

Start

Acquire the right to use special relays/registers.

Page 83 Acquiring a right to use

Completion of right-to-use acquisition

Set the settings for data backup.

Page 83 Setting the backup setting

Request a data backup.

Page 84 Performing a data backup

Execution of data backup Request a cancellation of backup process.

Page 84 Requiring a data backup cancellation

Normal completion of backup process Cancellation of backup process

Backup error

Enable the next backup process.

Page 84 Releasing the right to use

Complete

4 CC-Link
82 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Execution method of data backup
The target device for data backup can be set with a program.

■Acquiring a right to use

Set a value within the range from 1000H to 1FFFH to SD1435.

Precautions
Right to use for data backup
• Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data backup.
• To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time, acquiring a right to use
of them for data backup is required.
• To acquire a right to use, specify a value which is not duplicate with values for other request sources to SD1435, and check 4
that the value set to SD1435 is stored to SD1436.
• Normal operation cannot be assured if the data backup function is performed without confirming the acquisition of a right to
use.

■Setting the backup setting

1. Setting a target module type
Set the target module type for data backup to the lower 8 bits of SD1437.
Target module type Description
2H: CC-Link Set the target module type.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set the unit of execution for data backup to the upper 8 bits of SD1437.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link master/local module with the
specified start I/O number.
2H: Station unit Set this to specify either of the following devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link master/local
module with the specified start I/O number: device supporting iQSS with the specified station number or all devices
supporting iQSS which are connected to the module with the specified station number.
3H: Station sub-ID unit Set this to specify the device supporting iQSS with the specified station sub-ID number which is connected to the
module with the specified station number among the devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link IE
Field Network master/local module with the specified start I/O number.

3. Setting a number for a data backup folder name

Set the number for a backup folder name to SD1438.
Target folder Description
FFFFH: Automatic specification Use the smallest number for a new backup folder name among the unused numbers as the backup folder name.
(default) An error occurs when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the
upper limit.
FFFEH: Automatic specification Use the smallest number for a new backup folder name among the unused numbers as the backup folder name.
(folder deletion supported) The oldest folder is deleted and the number of the deleted folder is used for a new backup folder name when unused
number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the upper limit.
00 to 99: Target folder specification Set the number for a backup folder name.
When another folder with the same number exists, the operation will be as follows:
■For module unit
• The backup folder with the same number is deleted, and a new backup folder is created.
■For station unit or station sub-ID unit
• Data in the backup folder with the same number is overwritten.

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 83
 4. Setting a target device
• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the start I/O number of a
target device for data backup to SD1439.
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number of a CC-
Link master/local module, which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS, by 16.

• Setting a station number

When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set
the station number of a target device for data backup to SD1440.
Target device (Station Description
number)
1 to 64: Station number When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set the station number of a target
device supporting iQSS or a device supporting iQSS which is connected to the module with the specified station
number.

• Setting a station sub-ID number

When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the station sub-ID
number of a target device for data backup to SD1441.
Target device (Station sub-ID Description
number)
0 to 9999: Station sub-ID number When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set the station sub-ID number of a target device supporting
iQSS.

Precautions
To backup the data of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), set the ID number of
AnyWireASLINK to SD1441.
For details on the ID number (SD1440) of AnyWireASLINK, refer to the following:
Page 41 Setting the backup setting

5. Setting the operation setting when a data backup error occurs

Set the operation on error to the lower 8 bits of SD1444 in order to backup data for multiple devices supporting iQSS.
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data backup even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting
iQSS.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data backup even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting
iQSS.

■Performing a data backup

Data is backed up if SM1436 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready).
Once data is backed up, SD1446 will be '2H' (being executed).
Check that the other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) indicates that a data link is in process before performing a
data backup.

■Requiring a data backup cancellation

The data backup stops if SM1442 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready) or '2H' (being executed).

■Releasing the right to use

When SM1435 is turned ON after a data backup is completed (including a cancellation or an error), the right to use is released
and the next data backup is ready to be performed.
SM1435 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1435 remains ON since no processing is performed.
In that case, set SM1435 to OFF.

4 CC-Link
84 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data backup
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

CC-Link master/local module start I/O number 10

Station No. 1 Station No. 2

Backup target
4
• Target module type: CC-Link
• Execution unit: Module
• Folder number setting: 15
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.10
• Operation setting on error: Stop

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 85
 ■Devices used in the program
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Backup execution trigger 
M1100 Backup right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Backup right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Backup setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Backup execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Backup execution normal completion display 
M3500 Backup execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Backup right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D5000 Backup number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Backup error cause in a module 
D5003 Backup error cause in a device 
SM1435 Backup execution enabled 
SM1436 Backup request 
SM1442 Backup cancellation request 
SD1435 Backup use request 1030H
SD1436 Backup right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Backup target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 2H
Upper 8 bits: 1H
SD1438 Backup folder number setting 15
SD1439 Backup target setting (target module) 1H
SD1444 Operation setting when a data backup error occurs 1H
SD1446 Backup execution status 
SD1448 Backup number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Backup error cause in a module 
SD1453 Backup error cause in a device 
SW80.0 Station No.1 data link status 
SW80.1 Station No.2 data link status 
SW160.0 Station No.1 remote register use prohibited status 
SW160.1 Station No.2 remote register use prohibited status 
X10 Module error 
X11 Host station data link status 
X1F Module READY 

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

4 CC-Link
86 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 X10 X11 X1F SW80.0 SW80.1 SW160.0 SW160.1

8 SET M1100

M1100
17 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1030 D1000

4
MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200

M1200
26 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
40 MOV H102 SD1437

MOV K15 SD1438

MOV H1 SD1439

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1436

50 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

56 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
66 SET SM1435

M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300

M2000
74 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

83 END

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 87
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Executing data backup and checking data link status]
Check that the other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data backup request.
(8) Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(17) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(26) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(40) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the operation setting when a data backup error occurs.
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(50) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(56) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(66) Enable the data backup execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(74) Set the backup cancellation request.

4 CC-Link
88 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data backup (bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL))
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

CC-Link master/local module start I/O number 10

Station No. 1
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module

4
Address 1 to 4 Address 5
ID513 (201H) to ID517(205H)
ID516 (204H) (Station sub-ID 517)
(Station sub-ID
Backup target 513 to 516)

• Target module type: CC-Link

• Execution unit: Station
• Folder number setting: 18
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.10
• Target device (station number): Station No. 1
• Operation setting on error: Stop

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 89
 ■Devices used in the program
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Backup execution trigger 
M1100 Backup right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Backup right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Backup setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Backup execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Backup execution normal completion display 
M3500 Backup execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Backup right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D2000.1*1 DP/DN short error 
D2000.3*1 Transmission cable voltage drop error 
D2000.4*1 DP/DN disconnection error 
D2001.0*1 Slave module alarm signal 
D2001.1*1 Parameter access completion flag 
D2001.2*1 Parameter access error 
D2001.4*1 Automatic address detection flag 
D2013.B*1 Remote READY 
D5000 Backup number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Backup error cause in a module 
D5003 Backup error cause in a device 
SM1435 Backup execution enabled 
SM1436 Backup request 
SM1442 Backup cancellation request 
SD1435 Backup use request 1090H
SD1436 Backup right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Backup target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 2H
Upper 8 bits: 2H
SD1438 Backup folder number setting 18
SD1439 Backup target setting (target module) 1H
SD1440 Backup target setting (target device 1) 1
SD1444 Operation setting when a data backup error occurs 1H
SD1446 Backup execution status 
SD1448 Backup number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Backup error cause in a module 
SD1453 Backup error cause in a device 
SW80.0 Station No.1 data link status 
SW160.0 Station No.1 remote register use prohibited status 
X10 Module error 
X11 Host station data link status 
X1F Module READY 

*1 A device used when the remote input (RX) is set to D2000.

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

4 CC-Link
90 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 X10 X11 X1F SW80.0 SW160.0 D2013.B D2000.1 D2000.3 D2000.4 D2001.0
8 K0

D2001.1 D2001.2 D2001.4

K0 SET M1100

M1100

4
23 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1090 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200

M1200
32 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
46 MOV H202 SD1437

MOV K18 SD1438

MOV H1 SD1439

MOV K1 SD1440

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1436

58 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

64 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
74 SET SM1435

M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300

M2000
82 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

91 END

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 91
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Executing data backup and checking data link status]
Check that the other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data backup request.
(8) Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(23) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(32) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(46) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the operation setting when a data backup error occurs.
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(58) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(64) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(74) Enable the data backup execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(82) Set the backup cancellation request.

4 CC-Link
92 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data restoration
Information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS for each station by using an
engineering tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of stations' or
'Device map area' in the "CC-Link Configuration" window,
then right-click it and select [Online]  [Restore Slave
Station] from the shortcut menu.
1. Select
2. Select backup data to be restored, and click the [Execute]
button.
4

2. Select A list of the backup folder names (date_number) is

displayed in the column of "Folder Name."
Backup data is stored in backup folders for each
folder name (Start I/O number_Station number) in
an SD memory card.
For details on the backup folder configuration,
1. Select refer to the following:
Page 76 Backup folder configuration

2. Click 3. Read the message and click the [OK] button.

Data is restored.

■Data restoration method for a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1C2AL)
Data can be restored for a device supporting iQSS, which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), by the following
method.

Operating procedure
1. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) in 'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "CC-Link Configuration" window.

2. Right-click the module and select [Open System Configuration]  [Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from the
shortcut menu.

3. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration"
window, then right-click it and select [Online]  [Restore Slave Module] from the shortcut menu.

When restoring data for a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), a
list of the backup data name (date_number) stored in the backup folder of CC-Link is displayed in the "Folder
Name" in the "Select Restoring Backup Data (AnyWireASLINK)" screen.
Backup data is stored in backup folders for each folder name (Station number/Station sub-ID number) in an
SD memory card.
For details on the backup folder configuration, refer to the following:
Page 76 Backup folder configuration

Considerations for data restoration

■Setting the restoration setting
The initial value of the restoration setting (SD1444) is as follows:
• Lower 8 bits of SD1444 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when restoring data with the settings other than above. (Page 94 Program execution for data restoration)

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 93
 Program execution for data restoration
The information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS with a program.

Operating procedure

Start

Acquire the right to use special relays/registers.

Page 95 Acquiring a right to use

Completion of right-to-use acquisition

Set the settings for data restoration.

Page 95 Setting the restoration setting

Request a data restoration

Page 96 Performing a data restoration

Execution of data restoration Request a cancellation of restoration process.

Page 96 Requiring a data restoration cancellation

Normal completion of restoration process Cancellation of restoration process

Restoration error

Enable the next restoration process.

Page 96 Releasing the right to use

Complete

4 CC-Link
94 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Execution method of data restoration
The target device for data restoration can be set with a program.

■Acquiring a right to use

Set a value within the range from 1000H to 1FFFH to SD1435.

Precautions
Right to use for data backup
• Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data restoration.
• To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time, acquiring a right to use
of them for data backup is required.
• To acquire a right to use, specify a value which is not duplicate with values for other request sources to SD1435, and check 4
that the value set to SD1435 is stored to SD1436.
• Normal operation cannot be assured if the data backup function is performed without confirming the acquisition of a right to
use.

■Setting the restoration setting

1. Setting a target module type
Set the target module type for data restoration to the lower 8 bits of SD1437.
Target module type Description
2H: CC-Link Set the target module type.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set the unit of execution for data restoration to the upper 8 bits of SD1437.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link master/local module with the
specified start I/O number.
2H: Station unit Set this to specify either of the following devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link master/local
module with the specified start I/O number: device supporting iQSS with the specified station number or all devices
supporting iQSS which are connected to the module with the specified station number.
3H: Station sub-ID unit Set this to specify the device supporting iQSS with the specified station sub-ID number which is connected to the
module with the specified station number among the devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link IE
Field Network master/local module with the specified start I/O number.

3. Selecting a folder for data restoration

Set the number for backup folder name, from which data is to be restored, to SD1438.
Target folder Description
00 to 99: Target folder specification Specify the number among the numbers for backup folder name, 00 to 99.

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 95
 4. Setting a target device
• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the start I/O number of a
target device for data restoration to SD1439.
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number of a CC-
Link master/local module, which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS, by 16.

• Setting a station number

When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set
the station number of a target device for data restoration to SD1440.
Target device (Station Description
number)
1 to 64: Station number When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set the station number of a target
device supporting iQSS or a device supporting iQSS which is connected to the module with the specified station
number.

• Setting a station sub-ID number

When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the station sub-ID
number of a target device for data restoration to SD1441.
Target device (Station sub-ID Description
number)
0 to 9999: Station sub-ID number When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set the station sub-ID number of a target device supporting
iQSS.

Precautions
To restore the data of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), set the ID number of
AnyWireASLINK to SD1441.
For details on the ID number (SD1440) of AnyWireASLINK, refer to the following:
Page 49 Setting the restoration setting

5. Setting the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs

Set the operation on error to the lower 8 bits of SD1444 in order to in order to restore data for multiple devices supporting
iQSS.
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data restoration even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data restoration even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting
iQSS.

■Performing a data restoration

Data is restored if SM1439 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready).
Once data is restored, SD1446 will be '2H' (being executed).
Check that the other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) indicates that a data link is in process before performing a
data restoration.

■Requiring a data restoration cancellation

The data restoration stops if SM1442 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready) or '2H' (being executed).

■Releasing the right to use

When SM1435 is turned ON after a data restoration is completed (including a cancellation or an error), the right to use is
released and the next data restoration is ready to be performed.
SM1435 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1435 remains ON since no processing is performed.
In that case, set SM1435 to OFF.

4 CC-Link
96 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data restoration
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

CC-Link master/local module start I/O number 10

Station No. 1 Station No. 2

Restoration target
4
• Target module type: CC-Link
• Execution unit: Station
• Folder number setting: 15
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.10
• Target device (station number): Station No. 1
• Operation setting on error: Stop

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 97
 ■Devices used in the program
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Restoration execution trigger 
M1100 Restoration right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Restoration setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Restoration execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Restoration execution normal completion display 
M3500 Restoration execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Restoration right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D5000 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Restoration error cause in a module 
D5003 Restoration error cause in a device 
SM1435 Restoration execution enabled 
SM1439 Restoration request 
SM1442 Restoration cancellation request 
SD1435 Restoration use request 1040H
SD1436 Restoration right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Restoration target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 2H
Upper 8 bits: 2H
SD1438 Restoration folder number setting 15
SD1439 Restoration target setting (target module) 1H
SD1440 Restoration target setting (target device 1) 1
SD1444 Operation setting when a data restoration error occurs 1H
SD1446 Restoration execution status 
SD1448 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Restoration error cause in a module 
SD1453 Restoration error cause in a device 
SW80.0 Station No.1 data link status 
SW160.0 Station No.1 remote register use prohibited status 
X10 Module error 
X11 Host station data link status 
X1F Module READY 

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

4 CC-Link
98 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 X10 X11 X1F SW80.0 SW160.0

8 SET M1100

M1100
15 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1040 D1000

4
MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200

M1200
24 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
38 MOV H202 SD1437

MOV K15 SD1438

MOV H1 SD1439

MOV K1 SD1440

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1439

50 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

56 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
66 SET SM1435

M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300

M2000
74 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

83 END

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 99
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Executing data restoration and checking data link status]
Check that the other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data restoration request.
(8) Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(15) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(24) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(38) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs.
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(50) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(56) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(66) Enable the data restoration execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(74) Set the restoration cancellation request.

4 CC-Link
100 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data restoration (bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL))
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

CC-Link master/local module start I/O number 10

Station No. 1
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module

4
Address 1 to 4 Address 5
ID513 (201H) to ID517(205H)
ID516 (204H) (Station sub-ID 517)
(Station sub-ID
Restoration target 513 to 516)

• Target module type: CC-Link

• Execution unit: Station sub-ID
• Folder number setting: 18
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.10
• Target device (station number): Station No. 1
• Target device (station sub-ID number): Station sub-ID 517
• Operation setting on error: Stop

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 101
 ■Devices used in the program
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Restoration execution trigger 
M1100 Restoration right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Restoration setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Restoration execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Restoration execution normal completion display 
M3500 Restoration execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Restoration right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D2000.1*1 DP/DN short error 
D2000.3*1 Transmission cable voltage drop error 
D2000.4*1 DP/DN disconnection error 
D2001.0*1 Slave module alarm signal 
D2001.1*1 Parameter access completion flag 
D2001.2*1 Parameter access error 
D2001.4*1 Automatic address detection flag 
D2013.B*1 Remote READY 
D5000 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Restoration error cause in a module 
D5003 Restoration error cause in a device 
SM1435 Restoration execution enabled 
SM1439 Restoration request 
SM1442 Restoration cancellation request 
SD1435 Restoration use request 10A0H
SD1436 Restoration right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Restoration target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 2H
Upper 8 bits: 3H
SD1438 Restoration folder number setting 18
SD1439 Restoration target setting (target module) 1H
SD1440 Restoration target setting (target device 1) 1
SD1441 Restoration target setting (target device 2) 517
SD1444 Operation setting when a data restoration error occurs 1H
SD1446 Restoration execution status 
SD1448 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Restoration error cause in a module 
SD1453 Restoration error cause in a device 
SW80.0 Station No.1 data link status 
SW160.0 Station No.1 remote register use prohibited status 
X10 Module error 
X11 Host station data link status 
X1F Module READY 

*1 A device used when the remote input (RX) is set to D2000.

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

4 CC-Link
102 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000
M1000 X10 X11 X1F SW80.0 SW160.0D2013.B D2000.1 D2000.3 D2000.4 D2001.0
8 K0
D2001.1 D2001.2 D2001.4
K0 SET M1100
M1000
23 = H0 SD1436 MOV H10A0 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

4
SET M1200
M1200
32 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
46 MOV H302 SD1437

MOV K18 SD1438

MOV H1 SD1439

MOV K1 SD1440

MOV K517 SD1441

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1439

60 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

66 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
76 SET SM1435
M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300
M2000
84 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

93 END

4 CC-Link
4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 103
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Executing data restoration and checking data link status]
Check that the other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data restoration request.
(8) Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(23) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(32) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(46) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device.
Set the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs.
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(60) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(66) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(76) Enable the data restoration execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(84) Set the restoration cancellation request.

4 CC-Link
104 4.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
5 CC-Link IE Field Network
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for MELSEC-L series or Q series
connected to CC-Link IE Field Network.

System configuration
This section explains the iQ Sensor Solution functions for CC-Link IE Field Network using the following system configuration.

Engineering tool CPU module CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module

24V
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK bridge module 5
0V
DP
DN
LG

ASLINKAMP (Input) ASLINKER (Input)

Type Model name Manufacturer

Engineering tool GX Works2 SWnDND-GXW2 and SWnDNC-GXW2 ('n' Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
indicates its version.)
CPU module LCPU L26CPU-BT
CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module LJ71GF11-T2
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK bridge module NZ2AW1GFAL
ASLINKAMP (Input) Photoelectric sensor B289SB-01AP-CAM20 (ASLINKAMP master) AnyWire Corporation
B289SB-01AP-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
Fiber sensor B289SB-01AF-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
B289SB-01AF-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
ASLINKER (Input) B281SB-02U-CC20

For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link IE Field Network, refer
to the following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

105
 Considerations for a system configuration
■Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function
Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system configuration, and set
network parameters and other settings required for communication with a device supporting iQSS.

■Master operating station

When a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module operates as a master operating station, iQ Sensor Solution functions
are available.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

106
5.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A slave station connected to a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module can be detected and the information can be
displayed in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window.
For the creation method of a new project and the operation methods of the "CC IE Field Configuration" window, refer to the
following:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

Operating procedure
1. Create a new project in an engineering tool.

2. Select "Parameter"  "Network Parameter"  "Ethernet/CC

IE Field" on the Project view.

Select 5

3. Check
3. Select and enter necessary parameters in the "Network
Parameter - MELSECNET/CC IE/Ethernet Module
1. Select
Configuration" screen.
2. Enter
4. Select the checkbox of "Set the network configuration setting
in the CC IE Field configuration window."

5. Read the message and click the [Yes] button.

The [Network Configuration Settings] button is changed to the [CC

IE Field Configuration Setting] button.
Click
6. Click the [CC IE Field Configuration Setting] button.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 107
 7. Enter the start device and end device to the "RX/RY Setting"
2. Select
and "RWw/RWr Setting" and select [Close with Reflecting the
3.Click Setting] in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window.

1. Enter
8. Write data to the CPU module and open the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window again.

9. Click the [Detect Now] button in the "CC IE Field

Configuration" window.

10. Read the message and click the [Yes] button.

The actual system configuration is displayed in the "CC IE Field

Select
Configuration" window.
List of stations 11. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window.
Device map area The setting in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window is applied to
the network parameter and completed.
Output window

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

108 5.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Detected devices to be displayed in the CC IE Field Configuration window
Modules detected after performing an automatic detection of connected devices are displayed differently depending on
whether a profile has been registered.

■A profile has been registered

• The module model names are displayed in "Model Name."
• "Local Station," "Intelligent Device Station," "Remote Device Station," or "Remote I/O Station" is displayed in the column of
"Station Type."
Note that a sub-master station of a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module or GOT1000/2000 series is displayed as
follows:
• For a sub-master station of a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module, the module model name is displayed in the
column of "Model Name" and "Local Station" is displayed in the column of "Station Type."
• For GOT1000/2000 series, "Gen. Intelligent Device Station" is displayed in the column of "Model Name" and "Intelligent
Device Station" is displayed in the column of "Station Type."

■A profile has not been registered 5

• "General Local Station," "General Sub-Master Station," "Gen. Intelligent Device Station," "General Remote Device Station,"
or "General Remote I/O Station" is displayed in the column of "Model Name."
• "Local Station," "Sub-Master Station," "Intelligent Device Station," "Remote Device Station," or "Remote I/O Station" is
displayed in the column of "Station Type."

When using the master station with a serial number whose first five digits are '17021' or lower, or using the
versions of devices supporting iQSS that do not support an automatic detection of connected devices, the
information will not be displayed properly in the column of "Model Name" and "Station Type" even though a
profile has been registered.

Considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS

■Operation on error
The system configuration cannot be detected if an error occurs on the master station.
Take corrective actions and perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■An error in settings

Error information is displayed in the "Output" window when an error occurred.
Double-click the information and correct the error at the jumped destination.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave station correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"
When "General Module" is displayed, it can be changed to "General CC IE Field Module" by the following operation:
Select a target module, and select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Change to General CC IE Field
Module].

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 109
 Detecting devices connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL)
To display devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), on a system configuration
diagram, first a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) needs to be detected in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window. Then,
perform an automatic detection of connected devices in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window in order to detect and
display devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
For the considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL),
refer to the following:
Page 112 Considerations when detecting devices connected to a bridge module

Operating procedure
1. Detect and display a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) in the
1. Select "CC IE Field Configuration" window.
2. Check For the method for detecting and displaying a bridge module
(NZ2AW1GFAL) automatically in the "CC IE Field Configuration"
3. Click
window, refer to the following:
Page 107 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically

2. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) in 'List of stations' or

'Device map area' in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window,
then right-click it and select [Open System Configuration] 
1. Select
[Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from the shortcut
menu.

2. Select

3. Click the [Detect Now] button in the "AnyWireASLINK

Configuration" window.
Click

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

110 5.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
 4. When an automatic address detection is required, select the
checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
1. Check
refer to the following:
2. Click
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module
User's Manual

The device supporting iQSS of AnyWireASLINK, which is

Select
connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), is displayed in the
"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

5. Select [Close with Enabling the Setting] in the

"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.
The setting of the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window is 5
enabled and the window is closed.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 111
 Considerations when detecting devices connected to a bridge module
■Settings in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration Setting" screen
The number of transmission points set in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration Setting" screen is not written to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1GFAL).
Set the number of transmission points of a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) using the number of transmission points setting
switch. For details on the setting switch, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Automatic address detection

When the actual system configuration was changed, perform the automatic address detection before using an iQ Sensor
Solution function.
For details on the automatic address detection, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Settings required for communication

To detect the devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), configure the settings
required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Settings in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window

After performing an automatic detection of connected devices, the settings of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to
a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) are not saved until [Close with Reflecting the Setting] is selected in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window.
Make sure to select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window after selecting [Close with
Enabling the Setting] in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

■Operation on error
A system configuration may not be detected if an error occurs on a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
If an error code is displayed, take corrective actions by referring to the manual for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), then
perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

112 5.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
5.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against
System Configuration
The system configuration displayed in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window can be verified against the slave stations
connected to a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module.
The result is displayed in the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.
Verify a system configuration when it is manually created or edited.

This function can be performed to a device supporting iQSS, which is connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1GFAL).

Operating procedure
■Verification of a device supporting iQSS connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL). 5
1. Click the [Verify] button in the "AnyWireASLINK
1. Click Configuration" window.

2. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Verification of the Configuration with
the Connected Module after Address Auto-recognition," then
click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
2. Check refer to the following:
3. Click MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual

The verification results are displayed in the "Verification Result of

the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.

• The display is switched by right-clicking on the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected
Module" window and selecting "Display All"/"Display Mismatch Only"/"Display other than Match."
• The cursor jumps to the corresponding location in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window by double-clicking
the row with "Mismatch" in the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration 113
 Considerations
■Settings required for communication
To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

114 5.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration
5.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS
Parameters can be read from and written to a slave station.
For the operation methods of the "CC IE Field Configuration" window, refer to the following:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

Window
1. Select a target module in the 'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window, and select
[CC IE Field Configuration]  [Online]  [Parameter Processing of Slave Station].

2. Read/write the parameters in the "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen.

• The data backup/restoration function is useful to read/write the parameters of multiple devices supporting
iQSS in a batch. (Page 120 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS)
5
• The useful function (linkage with dedicated tools) can also be used in the "CC IE Field Configuration"
window. (Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties))

■Display methods of the "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen can also be displayed by any of the following operations:
• Select a target module in 'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window, then right-click it
and select [Online]  [Parameter Processing of Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.
• Select a target module in the 'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC IE Field" screen,
and select [Online]  [Parameter Processing of Slave Station].
• Select a target module in the 'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC IE Field" screen,
then right-click it and select [Parameter Processing of Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.
For details on the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC IE Field" screen, refer to the following:
Page 117 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS

Considerations
■Operation after writing parameters
When parameters of a slave station are written, the slave station operates according to the parameters; therefore, note that
the slave station may change its operation.
For details on parameters, refer to the manual for a slave station used.

■A blank in "Write Value"

"Parameter write" cannot be executed if there is even one blank in "Write Value."

■Operation on error
If a module being used has an error, parameters of slave stations may not be read/written properly. Take corrective actions
and read/write parameters again.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 115
 Reading/writing parameters of devices supporting iQSS which
are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL)
Parameters of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) can be read and written.

Operating procedure
1. Detect devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) in the "AnyWireASLINK
Configuration" window. (Page 110 Detecting devices
connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL))

2. Read or write parameters of the detected devices. (Page

30 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS)

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

116 5.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
5.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
The connection statuses of devices supporting iQSS can be monitored.

Operating procedure
1. Select [Diagnostics]  [Sensor/Device Monitor] with an
engineering tool.
1. Select
2. Select a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module in the
"Module Selection (Sensor/Device Monitor)" screen, and click
the [OK] button.
2. Select 3. Read the message and click the [Yes] button.

3. Click
5

The "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC IE Field" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in

List of stations 'List of stations' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device
Monitor for CC IE Field" screen.
Device map area The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
Select
the "Monitoring Information" window.

Monitoring Information For an error status of a device supporting iQSS,

window
check with the CC IE Field Diagnostics function.
• [Diagnostics]  [CC IE Field Diagnostics]
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual
(Common)

Considerations when monitoring devices supporting iQSS

■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function
The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave station correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a master station.
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local
module, then perform the sensor/device monitor function again.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 117
 Monitoring devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL)
Devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) can be displayed in the "Sensor/Device
Monitor for CC IE Field" screen by the following operation.

Operating procedure
1. Open the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC IE Field" screen.
(Page 117 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS)

2. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) in 'List of stations' or

'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC IE
Field" screen, then right-click it and select [Open System
Configuration]  [Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from
the shortcut menu.

3. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module
User's Manual

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

118 5.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
 The "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in

'List of modules' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device
Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
the "Monitoring Information" window.

Considerations when monitoring devices connected to a bridge module

■Settings required for communication 5
To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function

The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

■Time taken to display the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen

When displaying the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen, a bridge module reads information from a slave
module.
Therefore, it may take time to display the screen depending on the number of slave modules.

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), then perform
the sensor/device monitor function again.

■Replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor

If replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor, perform an automatic detection of connected devices
in the monitor.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 119
 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting
iQSS
Backing up the information of a device supporting iQSS to an SD memory card and restoring it to a module simplifies the
setting change for changeover.

M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 X20 X2F X21 SW0B0.0 D2001.1 D2001.4

70

M1100
SET M1100
Data backup/restoration
115 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1030 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

command
SET M1200

M1200
183 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

Station No. 1

SD memory card 24V

0V
DP
DN
LG

iQSS

CC IE Field
Address 1 to 4 Address 5
20141211_01 ID513 (201H) to ID517 (205H)
Data backup Station sub-ID
ID516 (204H) (Station sub-ID 517)
513 to 516
0001_0001 (Station sub-ID
513 to 516)

Setting data
Data restoration
Station sub-ID
Setting data of 517
Station sub-ID
513 to 517
Data backup

Setting data

Data restoration

In such a case as limited production of diversified products, the data backup/restoration function is useful for
switching multiple sensor settings from for product A to for product B in a batch.

Function Reference
Data backup Page 126 Program execution for data backup
Data restoration Page 137 Program execution for data restoration

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

120 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Backup folder/file
Backup data is created in the 'iQSS' folder in the root directory when backing up the data.
If no 'iQSS' folder exists when backing up the data, an 'iQSS' folder will be newly created.
Up to 100 backup folders (date_number) can be created in the 'CC IE Field' folder.
Do not change a backup folder name, configuration or saved file. Otherwise, data may not be restored properly.
For the backup file capacity, refer to the following:
Page 407 Backup File Capacity

■Backup folder configuration

The following figure shows the backup folder configuration in an SD memory card.

1) Backup folder 2) Backup folder

Root directory (Date_Number) (I/O number_Station
Backup data
Maximum of 100 number)
(Station sub-ID number)

/ iQSS CC_IE_Field 20141211_01 0003_ 0001

4) SUBID0513.QBR
5
(Backup file)

4) SUBID0517.QBR
(Backup file)

SSBRINF.QSI
(System file)

Backup data
(Station number)

20141211_02 0003_ 0001

3) STATION0001.QBR
(Backup file)

SSBRINF.QSI
(System file)

Backup data
(Station sub-ID number)

0003_ 0064

4) SUBID0513.QBR
(Backup file)

4) SUBID0517.QBR
(Backup file)

SSBRINF.QSI
(System file)

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 121
 ■Backup folder name
1) Date_Number
2014 12 11 01
Arbitrary number (2-digit (00 to 99) decimal)
Backup date (2-digit decimal)
Backup month (2-digit decimal)
Backup year (4-digit decimal)
2) Start I/O number_Station number
0003 0001
Station number (4-digit decimal)
CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module start I/O number (4-digit hexadecimal) (A value of start I/O number divided by 16)

■Backup file name

3) Station number

STATON0001.QBR

Station number (4-digit decimal)

4) Station sub-ID number

SUBID0513.QBR

Station sub-ID number (4-digit decimal)

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

122 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Points to be checked before data backup/restoration
■Check the availability of data backup/restoration
The data can be backed up and restored when a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module and a bridge module
(NZ2AW1GFAL) satisfy the following conditions.
Perform the automatic address detection function and the parameter batch read function before data backup/restoration.
The 'n' indicates the address assigned to the master station by the station number setting.
Module Condition to be checked Remote device RX signal Signal status
CC-Link IE Field Network master/local Module error Xn0 OFF
module
Module READY XnF ON
Host station data link status Xn1 ON
Other station data link status*1 SW00B0 to SW00B7 OFF
Bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) Remote READY RXn0 ON
DP/DN short error RXn1 OFF
Transmission cable voltage drop error
DP/DN disconnection error
RXn3
RXn4
OFF
OFF
5
Slave module alarm signal RX(n+1)0 OFF*2
Parameter access completion flag RX(n+1)1 ON
Parameter access error RX(n+1)2 OFF
Automatic address detection flag RX(n+1)4 OFF

*1 Set the target station.

*2 Excluding when the error code is 0131H.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 123
 Considerations for data backup/restoration
■Stations to which data cannot be backed up and restored
The data backup and restoration function cannot be performed on the following stations:
• Local station
• Sub-master station that is monitoring the master station (performing the sub-master operation)
• Station whose data link has stopped due to a station number duplication error
• Station whose data link has stopped due to a station number out of range error
• Station whose network number is mismatched

■Use of an SD memory card

• During a data backup or restoration, do not perform the following actions: turning OFF the power, resetting a module, and
inserting or removing an SD memory card.
Otherwise, the data backup or restoration will be interrupted and the data will not be backed up or restored properly.
• Normal backup data cannot be created if the memory size or the number of files exceeds the maximum storage capacity of
an SD memory card during a data backup.

■Operations with a display unit during data backup

If any of the following operations are performed with a display unit during data backup, the operation will be completed
abnormally and the error is displayed on the display unit.
Operation name
Project data batch save/load function
File deletion in the "Memory card operation menu" screen of a display unit

■Communication timeout time

To back up or restore the data of a slave station connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), set the communication
timeout time as follows:
• 128 or less slave stations: 60 seconds (recommended)
• 129 or more slave stations: more than 80 seconds
The communication timeout time can be set by using SD1445. An setting example is shown below.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

124 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Unavailable operations and functions at the same time as data backup
If any of the following operations and functions are performed during data backup, the backup will be completed abnormally
and the error cause is stored in SD1452 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module).
The error is returned to the request source which performs the operation or function.
Operation/function name*1
Operation with an engineering tool Change TC setting
Online change (ladder mode)
Online change (inactive block) for SFC program
Write to PLC (including writing data to the CPU module during RUN)
Write title
Password/keyword
• New (registration/change)
• Delete
• Disable
Format PLC memory
Clear PLC memory (clear all file registers) 5
Arrange PLC memory
Delete PLC data
Write/delete PLC user data
Program memory batch download
CPU module change function with SD memory card
Sampling trace function
• Start trace
• Register trace
• Write to PLC
Writing protocol setting data to the CPU module (predefined protocol support function)
Project data batch save/load function
Operations with CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Data logging function
• Deleting/writing the data logging setting
• Stopping data logging operation
• Deleting data logging file(s)
Others Writing or deleting files using FTP or MC protocol
File transfer function (FTP server) of the built-in Ethernet function
File transfer function (FTP client) of the built-in Ethernet function
Register/cancel display unit menu
CPU module data backup/restoration function

*1 Available operations and functions differ between LCPUs and QCPUs. For details, refer to the user's manual of a CPU module used.
When data is backed up or restored during a data logging, the performance of the data logging will be reduced.
Therefore, sampled data may be partially missed and the data missing frequency may be increased.

■Communication load
When data is backed up or restored, the load of the service processing is temporarily increased. Consequently, a timeout
error may occur in other communications.
To avoid a timeout error, review the value set for "Service Processing Setting" on the [PLC System] tab in "PLC parameter."

■Backup folder name

Do not change an underscore and a subsequent number of a backup folder name (date_number).
If they are changed, the data may not be restored properly.
20141210_12

Do not change.

■When backing up the data of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1GFAL):
Backup data is stored in the 'CC IE Field' backup folder.
The 'station sub-ID number' is equivalent to the 'ID' of a slave module connected to AnyWireASLINK.
The backup file (STATION0000.QBR) of the bridge module is not created.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 125
 Data backup

Program execution for data backup

Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up in an SD memory card with a program.

Operating procedure

Start

Acquire the right to use special relays/registers.

Page 127 Acquiring a right to use

Completion of right-to-use acquisition

Set the settings for data backup.

Page 127 Setting the backup setting

Request a data backup.

Page 128 Performing a data backup

Execution of data backup Request a cancellation of backup process.

Page 128 Requiring a data backup cancellation

Normal completion of backup process Cancellation of backup process

Backup error

Enable the next backup process.

Page 128 Releasing the right to use

Complete

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

126 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Execution method of data backup
The target device for data backup can be set with a program.

■Acquiring a right to use

Set a value within the range from 1000H to 1FFFH to SD1435.

Precautions
Right to use for data backup
• Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data backup.
• To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time, acquiring a right to use
of them for data backup is required.
• To acquire a right to use, specify a value which is not duplicate with values for other request sources to SD1435, and check
that the value set to SD1435 is stored to SD1436.
• Normal operation cannot be assured if the data backup function is performed without confirmation of the right-to-use
acquisition. 5
■Setting the backup setting
1. Setting a target module type
Set the target module type for data backup to the lower 8 bits of SD1437.
Target module type Description
4H: CC-Link IE Field Network Set the target module type.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set the unit of execution for data backup to the upper 8 bits of SD1437.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local
module with the specified start I/O number.
2H: Station unit Set this to specify either of the devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link IE Field Network master/
local module with the specified start I/O number: device supporting iQSS with the specified station number or all
devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the module with the specified station number.
3H: Station sub-ID unit Set this to specify the device supporting iQSS with the specified station sub-ID number which is connected to the
module with the specified station number among the devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link IE
Field Network master/local module with the specified start I/O number.

3. Setting a number for a data backup folder name

Set the number for a backup folder name to SD1438.
Target folder Description
FFFFH: Automatic specification Use the smallest number for a new backup folder name among the unused numbers as the backup folder name.
(default) An error occurs when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the
upper limit.
FFFEH: Automatic specification Use the smallest number for a new backup folder name among the unused numbers as the backup folder name.
(folder deletion supported) The oldest folder is deleted and the number of the deleted folder is used for a new backup folder name when unused
number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the upper limit.
00 to 99: Target folder specification Set the number for a backup folder name.
When another folder with the same number exists, the operation will be as follows:
■For module unit
• The backup folder with the same number is deleted, and a new backup folder is created.
■For station unit or station sub-ID unit
• Data in the backup folder with the same number is overwritten.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 127
 4. Setting a target device
• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the start I/O number of a
target device for data backup to SD1439.
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number of a CC-
Link IE Field Network master/local module, which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS, by 16.

• Setting a station number

When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set
the station number of a target device for data backup to SD1440.
Target device (Station Description
number)
1 to 120: Station number When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set the station number of a target
device supporting iQSS or a device supporting iQSS which is connected to the module with the specified station
number.

• Setting a station sub-ID number

When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the station sub-ID
number of a target device for data backup to SD1441.
Target device (Station sub-ID Description
number)
0 to 9999: Station sub-ID number When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set the station sub-ID number of a target device supporting
iQSS.

Precautions
To backup the data of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL, set the ID number of
AnyWireASLINK to SD1441.
For details on the ID number (SD1440) of AnyWireASLINK, refer to the following:
Page 41 Setting the backup setting

5. Setting the operation setting when a data backup error occurs

Set the operation on error to the lower 8 bits of SD1444 in order to backup data for multiple devices supporting iQSS.
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data backup even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting
iQSS.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data backup even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting
iQSS.

■Performing a data backup

Data is backed up if SM1436 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready).
Once data is backed up, SD1446 will be '2H' (being executed).
Check that the other station data link status (SW00B0 to SW00B7) indicates that a data link is in process before performing a
data backup.

■Requiring a data backup cancellation

The data backup stops if SM1442 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready) or '2H' (being executed).

■Releasing the right to use

When SM1435 is turned ON after a data backup is completed (including a cancellation or an error), the right to use is released
and the next data backup is ready to be performed.
SM1435 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1435 remains ON since no processing is performed.
In that case, set SM1435 to OFF.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

128 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data backup (bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL))
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module start I/O number 30

Station No. 1

CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK bridge module

24V
0V
DP
DN
LG

5
Address 1 to 4 Address 5
ID513 (201H) to ID517(205H)
Backup target ID516 (204H) (Station sub-ID 517)
(Station sub-ID
513 to 516)

• Target module type: CC-Link IE Field Network

• Execution unit: Module
• Folder number setting: Automatic specification
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.30
• Operation setting on error: Stop

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 129
 ■Devices used in the program
Set the devices used in the program by refresh parameters in advance.
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Backup execution trigger 
M1100 Backup right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Backup right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Backup setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Backup execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Backup execution normal completion display 
M3500 Backup execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Backup right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D2000.0*1 Remote READY 
D2000.1*1 DP/DN short error 
D2000.3*1 Transmission cable voltage drop error 
D2000.4*1 DP/DN disconnection error 
D2001.0*1 Slave module alarm signal 
*1
D2001.1 Parameter access completion flag 
D2001.2*1 Parameter access error 
D2001.4*1 Automatic address detection flag 
D5000 Backup number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Backup error cause in a module 
D5003 Backup error cause in a device 
SM1435 Backup execution enabled 
SM1436 Backup request 
SM1442 Backup cancellation request 
SD1435 Backup use request 1070H
SD1436 Backup right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Backup target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 4H
Upper 8 bits: 1H
SD1438 Backup folder number setting FFFFH
SD1439 Backup target setting (target module) 3H
SD1444 Operation setting when a data backup error occurs 1H
SD1446 Backup execution status 
SD1448 Backup number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Backup error cause in a module 
SD1453 Backup error cause in a device 
SW0B0.0 Station No.1 data link status 
X30 Module error 
X31 Host station data link status 
X3F Module READY 

*1 Devices when the remote input (RX) is set from 'D2000' to 'D2001' by the refresh parameter setting.

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

130 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 X30 X31 X3F SW0B0.0 D2000.0 D2000.1 D2000.3 D2000.4 D2001.0 D2001.1
8 K0

D2001.2 D2001.4
K0 SET M1100

M1100
22 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1070 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200

M1200
5
31 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
45 MOV H104 SD1437

MOV H0FFFF SD1438

MOV H3 SD1439

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1436

55 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

61 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
71 SET SM1435

M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300

M2000
79 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

88 END

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 131
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Executing data backup and checking data link status]
Check that the other station data link status (SW00B0 to SW00B7) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data backup request.
(8) Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(22) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(31) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(45) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the operation setting when a data backup error occurs.
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(55) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(61) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(71) Enable the data backup execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(79) Set the backup cancellation request.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

132 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data backup (remote I/O module)
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module start I/O number 30

Backup target
Station No. 1 Station No. 120

• Target module type: CC-Link IE Field Network

• Execution unit: Module 5
• Folder number specification: 21
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.30
• Operation setting on error: Stop

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 133
 ■Devices used in the program
Set the devices used in the program by refresh parameters in advance.
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Backup execution trigger 
M1100 Backup right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Backup right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Backup setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Backup execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Backup execution normal completion display 
M3500 Backup execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Backup right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D5000 Backup number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Backup error cause in a module 
D5003 Backup error cause in a device 
SM1435 Backup execution enabled 
SM1436 Backup request 
SM1442 Backup cancellation request 
SD1435 Backup use request 10B0H
SD1436 Backup right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Backup target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 4H
Upper 8 bits: 1H
SD1438 Backup folder number setting 21
SD1439 Backup target setting (target module) 3H
SD1444 Operation setting when a data backup error occurs 1H
SD1446 Backup execution status 
SD1448 Backup number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Backup error cause in a module 
SD1453 Backup error cause in a device 
SW0B0.0 Station No.1 data link status 
SW0B7.7 Station No.120 data link status 
X30 Module error 
X31 Host station data link status 
X33 Other station data link status 
X3F Module READY 

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

134 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 X30 X31 X33 X3F SW0B0.0 SW0B7.7

8 SET M1100

M1100
16 = H0 SD1436 MOV H10B0 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200

25
M1200
= D1000 SD1436 SET M1300 5
<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
39 MOV H104 SD1437

MOV K21 SD1438

MOV H3 SD1439

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1436

49 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

55 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
65 SET SM1435

M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300

M2000
73 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

82 END

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 135
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Executing data backup and checking data link status]
Check that the other station data link status (SW00B0 to SW00B7) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data backup request.
(8) Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(16) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(25) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(39) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the operation setting when a data backup error occurs.
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(49) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(55) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(65) Enable the data backup execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(73) Set the backup cancellation request.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

136 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data restoration

Program execution for data restoration

The information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS with a program.

Operating procedure

Start

Acquire the right to use special relays/registers.

Page 138 Acquiring a right to use

Completion of right-to-use acquisition 5

Set the settings for data restoration.

Page 138 Setting the restoration setting

Request a data restoration

Page 139 Performing a data restoration

Execution of data restoration Request a cancellation of restoration process.

Page 139 Requiring a data restoration cancellation

Normal completion of restoration process Cancellation of restoration process

Restoration error

Enable the next restoration process.

Page 139 Releasing the right to use

Complete

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 137
 Execution method of data restoration
The target device for data restoration can be set with a program.

■Acquiring a right to use

Set a value within the range from 1000H to 1FFFH to SD1435.

Precautions
Right to use for data backup
• Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data restoration.
• To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time, acquiring a right to use
of them for data backup is required.
• To acquire a right to use, specify a value which is not duplicate with values for other request sources to SD1435, and check
that the value set to SD1435 is stored to SD1436.
• Normal operation cannot be assured if the data backup function is performed without confirming the acquisition of a right to
use.

■Setting the restoration setting

1. Setting a target module type
Set the target module type for data restoration to the lower 8 bits of SD1437.
Target module type Description
4H: CC-Link IE Field Network Set the target module type.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set the unit of execution for data restoration to the upper 8 bits of SD1437.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local
module with the specified start I/O number.
2H: Station unit Set this to specify either of the devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link IE Field Network master/
local module with the specified start I/O number: device supporting iQSS with the specified station number or all
devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the module with the specified station number.
3H: Station sub-ID unit Set this to specify the device supporting iQSS with the specified station sub-ID number which is connected to the
module with the specified station number among the devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link IE
Field Network master/local module with the specified start I/O number.

3. Selecting a folder for data restoration

Set the number for backup folder name, from which data is to be restored, to SD1438.
Target folder Description
00 to 99: Target folder specification Specify the number among the numbers for backup folder name, 00 to 99.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

138 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
4. Setting a target device
• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the start I/O number of a
target device for data restoration to SD1439.
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number of a CC-
Link IE Field Network master/local module, which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS, by 16.

• Setting a station number

When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set
the station number of a target device for data restoration to SD1440.
Target device (Station Description
number)
1 to 120: Station number When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set the station number of a target
device supporting iQSS or a device supporting iQSS which is connected to the module with the specified station
number.
5
• Setting a station sub-ID number
When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Setting the execution unit', set the station sub-ID
number of a target device for data restoration to SD1441.
Target device (Station sub-ID Description
number)
0 to 9999: Station sub-ID number When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set the station sub-ID number of a target device supporting
iQSS.

Precautions
To restore the data of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), set the ID number of
AnyWireASLINK to SD1441.
For details on the ID number (SD1440) of AnyWireASLINK, refer to the following:
Page 49 Setting the restoration setting

5. Setting the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs

Set the operation on error to the lower 8 bits of SD1444 in order to in order to restore data for multiple devices supporting
iQSS.
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data restoration even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data restoration even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting
iQSS.

■Performing a data restoration

Data is restored if SM1439 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready).
Once data is restored, SD1446 will be '2H' (being executed).
Check that the other station data link status (SW00B0 to SW00B73) indicates that a data link is in process before performing
a data restoration.

■Requiring a data restoration cancellation

The data restoration stops if SM1442 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready) or '2H' (being executed).

■Releasing the right to use

When SM1435 is turned ON after a data restoration is completed (including a cancellation or an error), the right to use is
released and the next data restoration is ready to be performed.
SM1435 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1435 remains ON since no processing is performed.
In that case, set SM1435 to OFF.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 139
 Example of a data restoration (bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL))
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module start I/O number 30

Station No. 1
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK bridge module
24V
0V
DP
DN
LG

Address 1 to 4 Address 5
ID513 (201H) to ID517(205H)
ID516 (204H) (Station sub-ID 517)
Restoration target (Station sub-ID 513
to 516)

• Target module type: CC-Link IE Field Network

• Execution unit: Station sub-ID
• Folder number setting: 24
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.30
• Target device (station number): Station No. 1
• Target device (station sub-ID number): Station sub-ID 517
• Operation setting on error: Stop

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

140 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Devices used in the program
Set the devices used in the program by refresh parameters in advance.
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Restoration execution trigger 
M1100 Restoration right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Restoration setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Restoration execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Restoration execution normal completion display 
M3500 Restoration execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Restoration right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D2000.0*1 Remote READY 
D2000.1*1
D2000.3*1
DP/DN short error
Transmission cable voltage drop error


5
D2000.4*1 DP/DN disconnection error 
D2001.0*1 Slave module alarm signal 
*1
D2001.1 Parameter access completion flag 
D2001.2*1 Parameter access error 
D2001.4*1 Automatic address detection flag 
D5000 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Restoration error cause in a module 
D5003 Restoration error cause in a device 
SM1435 Restoration execution enabled 
SM1439 Restoration request 
SM1442 Restoration cancellation request 
SD1435 Restoration use request 1080H
SD1436 Restoration right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Restoration target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 4H
Upper 8 bits: 3H
SD1438 Restoration folder number setting 24
SD1439 Restoration target setting (target module) 3H
SD1440 Restoration target setting (target device 1) 1
SD1441 Restoration target setting (target device 2) 517
SD1444 Operation setting when a data restoration error occurs 1H
SD1446 Restoration execution status 
SD1448 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Restoration error cause in a module 
SD1453 Restoration error cause in a device 
SW0B0.0 Station No.1 data link status 
X30 Module error 
X31 Host station data link status 
X3F Module READY 

*1 Devices when the remote input (RX) is set from 'D2000' to 'D2001' by the refresh parameter setting.

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 141
 ■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000
M1000 X30 X31 X3F SW0B0.0D2000.0 D2000.1 D2000.3 D2000.4 D2001.0 D2001.1
8 K0
D2001.2 D2001.4
K0 SET M1100
M1100
22 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1080 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200
M1200
31 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
45 MOV H304 SD1437

MOV K24 SD1438

MOV H3 SD1439

MOV K1 SD1440

MOV K517 SD1441

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1439

59 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

65 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
75 SET SM1435
M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300
M2000
83 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

92 END

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

142 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
[Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Executing data restoration and checking data link status]
Check that the other station data link status (SW00B0 to SW00B7) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data restoration request.
(8) Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(22) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(31) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(45) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
5
Set the target device.
Set the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs.
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(59) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(65) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(75) Enable the data restoration execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(83) Set the restoration cancellation request.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 143
 Example of a data restoration (remote I/O module)
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module start I/O number 30

Restoration target
Station No. 1 Station No. 120

• Target module type: CC-Link IE Field Network

• Execution unit: Station
• Folder number specification: 21
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.30
• Target device (station number): Station No. 120
• Operation setting on error: Stop

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

144 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Devices used in the program
Set the devices used in the program by refresh parameters in advance.
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Restoration execution trigger 
M1100 Restoration right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Restoration setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Restoration execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Restoration execution normal completion display 
M3500 Restoration execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Restoration right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D5000 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
D5001
D5002
Restoration number of devices completed with an error
Restoration error cause in a module


5
D5003 Restoration error cause in a device 
SM1435 Restoration execution enabled 
SM1439 Restoration request 
SM1442 Restoration cancellation request 
SD1435 Restoration use request 10C0H
SD1436 Restoration right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Restoration target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 4H
Upper 8 bits: 2H
SD1438 Restoration folder number setting 21
SD1439 Restoration target setting (target module) 3H
SD1440 Restoration target setting (target device 1) 120
SD1444 Operation setting when a data restoration error occurs 1H
SD1446 Restoration execution status 
SD1448 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Restoration error cause in a module 
SD1453 Restoration error cause in a device 
SW0B7.7 Station No.120 data link status 
X30 Module error 
X31 Host station data link status 
X33 Other station data link status 
X3F Module READY 

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 145
 ■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 X30 X31 X33 X3F SW0B7.7

8 SET M1100

M1100
15 = H0 SD1436 MOV H10C0 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200

M1200
24 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
38 MOV H204 SD1437

MOV K21 SD1438

MOV H3 SD1439

MOV K120 SD1440

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1439

61 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

67 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
77 SET SM1435

M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300

M2000
85 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

94 END

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

146 5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
[Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Executing data restoration and checking data link status]
Check that the other station data link status (SW00B0 to SW00B7) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data restoration request.
(8) Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(15) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(24) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(38) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
5
Set the target device.
Set the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs.
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(61) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(67) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(77) Enable the data restoration execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(85) Set the restoration cancellation request.

5 CC-Link IE Field Network

5.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 147
 6 Ethernet
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for MELSEC-L series or Q series
connected to Ethernet.

System configuration
This section explains the iQ Sensor Solution functions for Ethernet using the following system configuration.

Engineering tool CPU module

Laser displacement sensor COGNEX Vision System

Type Model name Manufacturer

Engineering tool GX Works2 SWnDND-GXW2 and SWnDNC-GXW2 ('n' indicates Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
its version.)
CPU module LCPU L26CPU-BT
Laser displacement sensor HL-C2 Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co.,
Ltd.
COGNEX Vision System In-Sight EZ-700 Cognex Corporation

For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for Ethernet, refer to the following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

Considerations for a system configuration

■Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function
Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system configuration, and set
PLC parameters and other settings required for communication with a device supporting iQSS.
A device supporting iQSS, which is connected to the tip of a router, does not support.

■Simultaneous execution of iQ Sensor Solution functions

An error is returned to the request source when multiple iQ Sensor Solution functions are performed at the same time on an
Ethernet network.
The following iQ Sensor Solution functions via a built-in Ethernet port cannot be performed at the same time.
• Automatic detection of connected devices
• Reflection of the communication setting
• Sensor/device monitor
• Sensor parameter read/write
• Data backup/restoration

6 Ethernet
148
6.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A device supporting iQSS connected to a built-in Ethernet port CPU can be detected and the information can be displayed in
the "Ethernet Configuration" window.
For the creation method of a new project and the operation methods of the "Ethernet Configuration" window, refer to the
following:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

Operating procedure
1. Create a new project in an engineering tool.

2. Select "Parameter"  "PLC Parameter" on the Project view.

2. Select
1. Select
3. Select the [Built-in Ethernet Port Setting] tab in the "L
Parameter Setting" screen.
3. Check 4. Select the checkbox of "Set Open Setting in Ethernet
Configuration window."

5. Read the message and click the [Yes] button. 6

The [Open Settings] button is changed to [Ethernet Conf.] button.

6. Click the [Ethernet Conf.] button.

Click

7. Click the [Detect Now] button in the "Ethernet Configuration"

Click
window.
8. Read the message and click the [Yes] button.

Module List

6 Ethernet
6.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 149
 The actual system configuration is displayed in the "Ethernet
Select
Configuration" window.

9. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "Ethernet

List of devices Configuration" window.
The setting in the "Ethernet Configuration" window is applied to the
Device map area
PLC parameter and completed.
Output window

■All connected devices supporting iQSS are not detected

If all devices supporting iQSS are not detected, remove the following error factors and perform an automatic detection of
connected devices again.
• The Ethernet line is overloaded due to another function of a CPU module being performed.
• The communication cannot be established due to a reason such as a disconnection of an Ethernet cable.
• An error occurred in the following functions:
• Simple PLC communication function
• Socket communication function
• Time setting function (SNTP client)
• Data logging file transfer function
• File transfer function (FTP client)
• Predefined protocol support function
• SP.READ instruction, SP.WRITE instruction
Usable functions differ between LCPUs and QCPUs. For details, refer to the user's manual of a CPU module used.

Considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS

■Number of devices supporting iQSS displayed in the "Ethernet Configuration" window
Up to 16 devices supporting iQSS can be displayed in the "Ethernet Configuration" window (in ascending order of MAC
address) by performing an automatic detection of connected devices.

■Operation on error
The system configuration cannot be detected if an error occurs on a CPU module or device supporting iQSS.
Take corrective actions and perform the automatic detection function of connected devices again.

■An error in settings

Error information is displayed in the "Output" window when an error occurred.
Double-click the information and correct the error at the jumped destination.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"

6 Ethernet
150 6.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
6.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device
Supporting iQSS
The communication setting set in the "Ethernet Configuration" window can be applied to a device supporting iQSS.
Perform this function after adding, deleting or changing the setting of a device supporting iQSS.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of devices' or
'Device map area' in the "Ethernet Configuration" window.

2. Enter the communication setting.

1. Select 2. Enter 3. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of devices' or
'Device map area' in the "Ethernet Configuration" window,
3. Select then right-click it and select [Online]  [Communication
Setting Reflection of Ethernet Device] from the shortcut
menu.
The communication setting is applied to the target device
6
supporting iQSS.

6 Ethernet
6.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting iQSS 151
 Considerations when applying the communication setting to a device supporting iQSS
■Specifying a port number
• Do not specify '45237' for a port number in other devices on the same Ethernet network.
It may cause an error in other devices on the same Ethernet network.
• Do not specify the number from '61440' to '65534' for the own station port number.
The connection establishment instruction (SP.SOCOPEN) of the socket communication function may be completed
abnormally.
• Do not specify the IP address of a device supporting iQSS for the IP address of an external device, nor the number from
'61440' to '65534' for the destination port number.
The connection establishment instruction (SP.SOCOPEN) of the socket communication function may be completed
abnormally when performing a sensor/device monitor or a sensor parameter read/write.

■Changing the communication setting in the "Ethernet Configuration" window

When the communication setting written to a CPU module in the "Ethernet Configuration" window does not match with that of
a device supporting iQSS, the communication cannot be established normally.
When the communication setting is changed in the "Ethernet Configuration" window, perform a reflection of communication
setting to Ethernet devices in order to match the communication setting between a CPU module and a device supporting
iQSS.

■Selecting devices supporting iQSS in the "Module List" window

The reflection function of communication setting cannot be performed to devices supporting iQSS, which are selected in the
"Module List" window, and dragged and dropped onto the 'List of devices' or 'Device map area'.
Perform an automatic detection of connected devices in order to detect the communication setting, then perform a reflection
of communication setting to Ethernet devices.

■Changing the IP address of a built-in Ethernet port CPU

After changing the IP address of a built-in Ethernet port CPU, open the "Ethernet Configuration" window and edit the changed
IP address to match with the IP address of the programmable controller in the "Ethernet Configuration" window.
Perform a reflection of communication setting to Ethernet devices in order to match the communication setting of a device
supporting iQSS.

■Host name not supported by a device supporting iQSS

When a device supporting iQSS does not support the host name, even if a reflection of communication setting to Ethernet
devices is performed with a host name entered, it will not be applied to a device supporting iQSS.
After performing an automatic detection of connected devices, the "Host Name" field will be blank.
For the applicability of the host name of a device supporting iQSS, refer to the manuals of each device supporting iQSS.

■Applying the communication setting of Ethernet devices

The target device supporting iQSS must be restarted after performing a reflection of communication setting to Ethernet
devices.
For the operating status of a device supporting iQSS, refer to the manuals of each device supporting iQSS.

6 Ethernet
152 6.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting iQSS
6.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS
Sensor parameters can be read from and written to a device supporting iQSS.
For the operation methods of the "Ethernet Configuration" window, refer to the following:
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

• The data backup/restoration function is useful to read/write the parameters of multiple devices supporting
iQSS in a batch. (Page 157 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS)
• The useful function (linkage with dedicated tools) can also be used in the "Ethernet Configuration" window.
(Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties))

Operating procedure
■Reading parameters
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of devices' or
'Device map area' in the "Ethernet Configuration" window, 6
then right-click it and select [Online]  [Parameter
Processing of Ethernet Device] from the shortcut menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device" screen appears.

2. Select "Parameter read."

3. Select a parameter to be read.

4. Click the [Execute] button.

The selected parameter is read and the value is displayed in the
column of "Read Value."

6 Ethernet
6.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 153
 ■Writing parameters
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of devices' or
'Device map area' in the "Ethernet Configuration" window,
then right-click it and select [Online]  [Parameter
Processing of Ethernet Device] from the shortcut menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device" screen appears.

2. Select "Parameter write."

3. Select a parameter to be written.

4. Enter a value in the column of "Write Value."

5. Click the [Execute] button.

The value entered in the column of "Write Value" is written to the
device supporting iQSS.

Considerations
■Operation after writing parameters
When parameters of a slave station are written, the slave station operates according to the parameters; therefore, note that
the slave station may change its operation.
For details on parameters, refer to the manual for a slave station used.

■A blank in "Write Value"

"Parameter write" cannot be executed if there is even one blank in "Write Value."

■Operation on error
If a module being used has an error, parameters of slave stations may not be read/written properly. Take corrective actions
and read/write parameters again.

6 Ethernet
154 6.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
6.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
The connection statuses of devices supporting iQSS can be monitored.

Operating procedure
1. Select [Diagnostics]  [Sensor/Device Monitor] with an
engineering tool.
1. Select 2. Select a built-in Ethernet port LCPU in the "Module Selection
(Sensor/Device Monitor)" screen, and click the [OK] button.
2. Select

3. Click

6
The "Sensor/Device Monitor for Ethernet Configuration" screen
appears.

3. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in

Select
'List of devices' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device
List of devices Monitor for Ethernet Configuration" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
Device map area
the "Monitoring Information" window.

Monitoring Information
window

■Display on "Status" in the 'List of devices'

The status in "Status" is displayed when using GX Works2 Version 1.499V or later.
Icons displayed in the "Monitoring Information" window may differ from the status displayed in "Status."

■Icons displayed on the "Status" in the 'List of devices'

Icon Description
This icon is displayed when an error occurred on the connected device supporting iQSS.

This symbol is displayed when the first five digits of the serial number for a CPU module used are '15072' or lower by which the status display is
not supported.
This icon is displayed when a CPU module cannot communicate with a device supporting iQSS, or the status display is not supported by the
device supporting iQSS being used.

6 Ethernet
6.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 155
 Considerations when monitoring devices supporting iQSS
■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function
The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave station correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a built-in Ethernet port CPU.
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the built-in Ethernet port CPU, then perform the
sensor/device monitor function again.

■"Current Value" in the "Monitoring Information" window

For the "Current Value" in the "Monitoring Information" window, values written to devices in a CPU module from the device
supporting iQSS are displayed.
To display the current values accurately, configure the following setting:
• Select the checkbox of "Enable online change (FTP, MC Protocol)" in the [Built-in Ethernet Port Setting] tab of the "L
Parameter Setting" screen, and write parameters to a CPU module.

6 Ethernet
156 6.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting
iQSS
Backing up the information of a device supporting iQSS to an SD memory card and restoring it to a module simplifies the
setting change for changeover.

M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 SD1288.A
72

M1100
SET M1100
Data backup/restoration
104 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1050 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

command
SET M1200

M1200
173 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

6
IP address IP address
SD memory card 10.97.95.40 10.97.95.50

iQSS

Ethernet

20141212_01
Data backup IP address
03FF_0A615F28 10.97.95.40

IP address
Setting data of Data restoration Setting data
10.97.95.40

03FF_0A615F32 IP address
Data backup 10.97.95.50

IP address
Setting data of
10.97.95.50 Setting data
Data restoration

In such a case as limited production of diversified products, the data backup/restoration function is useful for
switching multiple sensor settings from for product A to for product B in a batch.

Function Reference
Data backup Page 161 Data backup
Page 162 Program execution for data backup
Data restoration Page 169 Data restoration
Page 170 Program execution for data restoration

6 Ethernet
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 157
 Backup folder/file
Backup data is created in the 'iQSS' folder in the root directory when backing up the data.
If no 'iQSS' folder exists when backing up the data, an 'iQSS' folder will be newly created.
Up to 100 backup folders (date_number) can be created in the 'Ethernet' folder.
Do not change a backup folder name, configuration or saved file. Otherwise, data may not be restored properly.
For the backup file capacity, refer to the following:
Page 407 Backup File Capacity

■Backup folder configuration

The following figure shows the backup folder configuration in an SD memory card.
1) Backup folder 2) Backup folder
Root directory (Date_Number) (Target module_IP address)
Maximum of 100
Backup data

/ iQSS Ethernet 20141212_01 03FF_ 0A615F28 XXXXXXXX

(Backup folder) XXXXXXXX

(Maximum of 1 hierarchy) (Backup file)

XXXXXXXX
(Backup file)

SSBRINF.QSI
(System file)

Backup data

03FF_ 0A615F32 XXXXXXXX

(Backup folder) XXXXXXXX

(Maximum of 1 hierarchy) (Backup file)

XXXXXXXX
(Backup file)

SSBRINF.QSI
(System file)

■Backup folder name

1) Date_Number
2014 12 12 01
Arbitrary number (2-digit (00 to 99) decimal)
Backup date (2-digit decimal)
Backup month (2-digit decimal)
Backup year (4-digit decimal)
2) Target module_IP address
03FF 0A615F28
IP address (8-digits hexadecimal)
Target module (4-digits hexadecimal)
03FF: Built-in Ethernet

6 Ethernet
158 6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Considerations for data backup/restoration
■Use of an SD memory card
• During a data backup or restoration, do not perform the following actions: turning OFF the power, resetting a module, and
inserting or removing an SD memory card.
Otherwise, the data backup or restoration will be interrupted and the data will not be backed up or restored properly.
• Normal backup data cannot be created if the memory size or the number of files exceeds the maximum storage capacity of
an SD memory card during a data backup.

■Operations with a display unit during data backup

If any of the following operations are performed with a display unit during data backup, the operation will be completed
abnormally and the error is displayed on the display unit.
Operation name
Project data batch save/load function
File deletion in the "Memory card operation menu" screen of a display unit

6 Ethernet
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 159
 ■Unavailable operations and functions at the same time as data backup
If any of the following operations and functions are performed during data backup, the backup will be completed abnormally
and the error cause is stored in SD1452 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module).
The error is returned to the request source which performs the operation or function.
Operation/function name*1
Operation with an engineering tool Change TC setting
Online change (ladder mode)
Online change (inactive block) for SFC program
Write to PLC (including writing data to the CPU module during RUN)
Write title
Password/keyword
• New (registration/change)
• Delete
• Disable
Format PLC memory
Clear PLC memory (clear all file registers)
Arrange PLC memory
Delete PLC data
Write/delete PLC user data
Program memory batch download
CPU module change function with SD memory card
Sampling trace function
• Start trace
• Register trace
• Write to PLC
iQ Sensor Solution functions via a built-in Ethernet port
• Automatic detection of connected devices
• Reflection of the communication setting
• Sensor parameter read/write
• Sensor/device monitor
Writing protocol setting data to the CPU module (predefined protocol support function)
Project data batch save/load function
Operations with CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Data logging function
• Deleting/writing the data logging setting
• Stopping data logging operation
• Deleting data logging file(s)
Others Writing or deleting files using FTP or MC protocol
File transfer function (FTP server) of the built-in Ethernet function
File transfer function (FTP client) of the built-in Ethernet function
Register/cancel display unit menu
CPU module data backup/restoration function

*1 Available operations and functions differ between LCPUs and QCPUs. For details, refer to the user's manual of a CPU module used.
When data is backed up or restored during a data logging, the performance of the data logging will be reduced.
Therefore, sampled data may be partially missed and the data missing frequency may be increased.

■Communication load
When data is backed up or restored, the load of the service processing is temporarily increased. Consequently, a timeout
error may occur in other communications.
To avoid a timeout error, review the value set for "Service Processing Setting" on the [PLC System] tab in "PLC parameter."

■Backup folder name

Do not change an underscore and a subsequent number of a backup folder name (date_number).
If they are changed, the data may not be restored properly.
20141210_12

Do not change.

6 Ethernet
160 6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be saved in an SD memory card for each IP address by using an engineering
tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of modules' or
'Device map area' in the "Ethernet Configuration" window,
then right-click it and select [Online]  [Backup Ethernet
1. Select Device] from the shortcut menu.

2. Read the message and click the [Yes] or [OK] button.

Data is backed up.
2. Select

Considerations for a data backup 6

■Setting the backup setting
The initial values of the backup setting (SD1438 and SD1444) are as follows:
• SD1438 (folder number setting): FFFFH (automatic specification)
• Lower 8 bits of SD1444 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when backing up data with the settings other than the one above. (Page 162 Program execution for data
backup)

6 Ethernet
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 161
 Program execution for data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up in an SD memory card with a program.

Operating procedure

Start

Acquire the right to use special relays/registers.

Page 163 Acquiring a right to use

Completion of right-to-use acquisition

Set the settings for data backup.

Page 163 Setting the backup setting

Request a data backup.

Page 164 Performing a data backup

Execution of data backup Request a cancellation of backup process.

Page 164 Requiring a data backup cancellation

Normal completion of backup process Cancellation of backup process

Backup error

Enable the next backup process.

Page 164 Releasing the right to use

Complete

6 Ethernet
162 6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Execution method of data backup
The target device for data backup can be set with a program.

■Acquiring a right to use

Set a value within the range from 1000H to 1FFFH to SD1435.

Precautions
Right to use for data backup
• Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data backup.
• To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time, acquiring a right to use
of them for data backup is required.
• To acquire a right to use, specify a value which is not duplicate with values for other request sources to SD1435, and check
that the value set to SD1435 is stored to SD1436.
• Normal operation cannot be assured if the data backup function is performed without confirming the acquisition of a right to
use.

■Setting the backup setting

1. Setting a target module type
6
Set the target module type for data backup to the lower 8 bits of SD1437.
Target module type Description
3H: Ethernet Set the target module type.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set the unit of execution for data backup to the upper 8 bits of SD1437.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which communicate with a backup target module among the devices
supporting iQSS which are connected to a built-in Ethernet port CPU.
2H: IP address unit Set this to specify only the device supporting iQSS with the specified IP address among the devices supporting iQSS
which are connected to a built-in Ethernet port CPU.

3. Setting a number for a data backup folder name

Set the number for a backup folder name to SD1438.
Target folder Description
FFFFH: Automatic specification Use the smallest number for a new backup folder name among the unused numbers as the backup folder name.
(default) An error occurs when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the
upper limit.
FFFEH: Automatic specification Use the smallest number for a new backup folder name among the unused numbers as the backup folder name.
(folder deletion supported) The oldest folder is deleted and the number of the deleted folder is used for a new backup folder name when unused
number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the upper limit.
00 to 99: Target folder specification Set the number for a backup folder name.
When another folder with the same number exists, the operation will be as follows:
■For module unit
• The backup folder with the same number is deleted, and a new backup folder is created.
■For IP address unit
• Data in the backup folder with the same number is overwritten.

6 Ethernet
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 163
 4. Setting a target device
• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Set the execution unit', set the built-in Ethernet port CPU as
the target device of data backup for SD1439.
Target device (Module) Description
03FFH: Built-in Ethernet When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set a built-in Ethernet port CPU connected to a target device
supporting iQSS.

• Setting IP addresses
When '2H' (IP address unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Set the execution unit', set the IP addresses of target
devices for data backup to SD1440 and SD1441.
Number Target device (IP address) Description
*1
SD1440 0 to 65536 (FFFFH): IP address (lower 16 bits) When '2H' (IP address unit) is set for the execution unit, set the IP address of a target device
supporting iQSS.
SD1441*1 0 to 57343 (DFFFH): IP address (upper 16 bits)

*1 IP addresses within the range from 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

5. Setting the operation setting when a data backup error occurs
Set the operation on error to the lower 8 bits of SD1444 in order to backup data for multiple devices supporting iQSS.
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data backup even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting iQSS.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data backup even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting iQSS.

■Performing a data backup

Data is backed up if SM1436 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready).
Once data is backed up, SD1446 will be '2H' (being executed).

■Requiring a data backup cancellation

The data backup stops if SM1442 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready) or '2H' (being executed).

■Releasing the right to use

When SM1435 is turned ON after a data backup is completed (including a cancellation or an error), the right to use is released
and the next data backup is ready to be performed.
SM1435 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1435 remains ON since no processing is performed.
In that case, set SM1435 to OFF.

6 Ethernet
164 6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data backup
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

Built-in Ethernet port LCPU Built-in Ethernet port LCPU

IP address: 10.97.95.1 IP address:10.97.95.6

Backup target

"IP address IP address IP address

10.97.95.40 10.97.95.50 10.97.95.60

Devices supporting iQSS of which Devices supporting iQSS of which communication

communication target module is built-in Ethernet target module is built-in Ethernet port LCPU (IP
port LCPU (IP address:10.97.95.1) address:10.97.95.6)

• Target module type: Ethernet

• Execution unit: Module
• Folder number setting: Automatic specification
• Target device (target module): Built-in Ethernet
• Operation setting on error: Stop

6 Ethernet
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 165
 ■Devices used in the program
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Backup execution trigger 
M1100 Backup right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Backup right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Backup setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Backup execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Backup execution normal completion display 
M3500 Backup execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Backup right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D5000 Backup number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Backup error cause in a module 
D5003 Backup error cause in a device 
SM1435 Backup execution enabled 
SM1436 Backup request 
SM1442 Backup cancellation request 
SD1288.A Connection with hub or target device 
SD1435 Backup use request 1050H
SD1436 Backup right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Backup target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 3H
Upper 8 bits: 1H
SD1438 Backup folder number setting FFFFH
SD1439 Backup target setting (target module) 03FFH
SD1444 Operation setting when a data backup error occurs 1H
SD1446 Backup execution status 
SD1448 Backup number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Backup number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Backup error cause in a module 
SD1453 Backup error cause in a device 

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

6 Ethernet
166 6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000

M1000 SD1288.A
8 SET M1100

M1100
11 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1050 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200

M1200
20 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
34 MOV H103 SD1437
6
MOV H0FFFF SD1438

MOV H3FF SD1439

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1436

44 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

50 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
60 SET SM1435

M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300

M2000
68 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

77 END

6 Ethernet
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 167
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Executing data backup]
(8) Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(11) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(20) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(34) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the operation setting when a data backup error occurs.
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(44) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(50) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(60) Enable the data backup execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(68) Set the backup cancellation request.

6 Ethernet
168 6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data restoration
Information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS for each IP address by using an
engineering tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'List of devices' or
'Device map area' in the "Ethernet Configuration" window,
then right-click it and select [Online]  [Restore Ethernet
Device] from the shortcut menu.
1. Select
2. Select backup data to be restored, and click the [Execute]
button.
2. Select

A list of the backup folder names (date_number) is

displayed in the column of "Folder Name."
Backup data is stored in backup folders for each
folder name (Target module_IP address) in an SD 6
memory card.
1. Select
For details on the backup folder configuration,
refer to the following:
Page 158 Backup folder configuration
2. Click

3. Read the message and click the [OK] button.

Data is restored.

Considerations for data restoration

■Setting the restoration setting
The initial value of the restoration setting (SD1444) is as follows:
• Lower 8 bits of SD1444 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when restoring data with the settings other than above. (Page 170 Program execution for data restoration)

6 Ethernet
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 169
 Program execution for data restoration
The information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS with a program.

Operating procedure

Start

Acquire the right to use special relays/registers.

Page 171 Acquiring a right to use

Completion of right-to-use acquisition

Set the settings for data restoration.

Page 171 Setting the restoration setting

Request a data restoration

Page 172 Performing a data restoration

Execution of data restoration Request a cancellation of restoration process.

Page 172 Requiring a data restoration cancellation

Normal completion of restoration process Cancellation of restoration process

Restoration error

Enable the next restoration process.

Page 172 Releasing the right to use

Complete

6 Ethernet
170 6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Execution method of data restoration
The target device for data restoration can be set with a program.

■Acquiring a right to use

Set a value within the range from 1000H to 1FFFH to SD1435.

Precautions
Right to use for data backup
• Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data restoration.
• To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time, acquiring a right to use
of them for data backup is required.
• To acquire a right to use, specify a value which is not duplicate with values for other request sources to SD1435, and check
that the value set to SD1435 is stored to SD1436.
• Normal operation cannot be assured if the data backup function is performed without confirming the acquisition of a right to
use.

■Setting the restoration setting

1. Setting a target module type
6
Set the target module type for data restoration to the lower 8 bits of SD1437.
Target module type Description
3H: Ethernet Set the target module type.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set the unit of execution for data restoration to the upper 8 bits of SD1437.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which communicate with a restoration target module among the devices
supporting iQSS which are connected to a built-in Ethernet port CPU.
2H: IP address unit Set this to specify only the device supporting iQSS with the specified IP address among the devices supporting iQSS
which are connected to a built-in Ethernet port CPU.

3. Selecting a folder for data restoration

Set the number for backup folder name, from which data is to be restored, to SD1438.
Target folder Description
00 to 99: Target folder specification Specify the number among the numbers for backup folder name, 00 to 99.

4. Setting a target device

• Setting the module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Set the execution unit', set the built-in Ethernet port CPU as
the target device of data restoration to SD1439.
Target device (Module) Description
03FFH: Built-in Ethernet When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set a built-in Ethernet port CPU connected to a target device
supporting iQSS.

• Setting IP addresses
When '2H' (IP address unit) is set for the execution unit in the step of 'Set the execution unit', set the IP addresses of target
devices for data restoration to SD1440 and SD1441.
Number Target device (IP address) Description
SD1440*1 0 to 65536 (FFFFH): IP address (lower 16 bits) When '2H' (IP address unit) is set for the execution unit, set the IP address of a target
device supporting iQSS.
SD1441*1 0 to 57343 (DFFFH): IP address (upper 16 bits)

*1 IP addresses within the range from 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

6 Ethernet
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 171
 5. Setting the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs
Set the operation on error to the lower 8 bits of SD1444 in order to in order to restore data for multiple devices supporting
iQSS.
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data restoration even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting
iQSS.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data restoration even if it fails on some devices while being performed to multiple devices supporting iQSS.

■Performing a data restoration

Data is restored if SM1439 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready).
Once data is restored, SD1446 will be '2H' (being executed).

■Requiring a data restoration cancellation

The data restoration stops if SM1442 is turned ON while SD1446 is '1H' (ready) or '2H' (being executed).

■Releasing the right to use

When SM1435 is turned ON after a data restoration is completed (including a cancellation or an error), the right to use is
released and the next data restoration is ready to be performed.
SM1435 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1435 remains ON since no processing is performed.
In that case, set SM1435 to OFF.

6 Ethernet
172 6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data restoration
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

Built-in Ethernet port LCPU

IP address: 10.97.95.1

Restoration target
IP address IP address
10.97.95.40 10.97.95.50

• Target module type: Ethernet

• Execution unit: IP address
• Folder number setting: 7
• Target device: Built-in Ethernet
• Target device (IP address): 10.97.95.40
• Operation setting on error: Stop

6 Ethernet
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 173
 ■Devices used in the program
Device Description Value
M0 Initialization trigger 
M1000 Restoration execution trigger 
M1100 Restoration right-to-use request trigger 
M1200 Restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger 
M1300 Restoration setting and starting trigger 
M2000 Restoration execution cancellation trigger 
M3000 Restoration execution normal completion display 
M3500 Restoration execution abnormal completion display 
M3550 Restoration right-to-use acquisition failure 
D1000 Right-to-use number storage area 
D2000 Fourth octet storage area for target device IP address 40
D2001 Third octet storage area for target device IP address 95
D2002 Second octet storage area for target device IP address 97
D2003 First octet storage area for target device IP address 10
D5000 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
D5001 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
D5002 Restoration error cause in a module 
D5003 Restoration error cause in a device 
SM1435 Restoration execution enabled 
SM1439 Restoration request 
SM1442 Restoration cancellation request 
SD1288.A Connection with hub or target device 
SD1435 Restoration use request 1060H
SD1436 Restoration right-to-use acquisition status 
SD1437 Restoration target module/execution unit setting Lower 8 bits: 3H
Upper 8 bits: 2H
SD1438 Restoration folder number setting 7
SD1439 Restoration target setting (target module) 03FFH
SD1440 Restoration target setting (target device 1) Lower 16 bits of IP address (10.97.95.40)
SD1441 Restoration target setting (target device 2) Upper 16 bits of IP address (10.97.95.40)
SD1444 Operation setting when a data restoration error occurs 1H
SD1446 Restoration execution status 
SD1448 Restoration number of normally completed devices 
SD1449 Restoration number of devices completed with an error 
SD1452 Restoration error cause in a module 
SD1453 Restoration error cause in a device 

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

6 Ethernet
174 6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program
M0
0 FMOV K0 D5000 K4

RST M3000

RST M3500

SET M1000
M1000 SD1288.A
8 SET M1100
M1100
11 = H0 SD1436 MOV H1060 D1000

MOV D1000 SD1435

SET M1200
M1200
20 = D1000 SD1436 SET M1300

<> D1000 SD1436 <> H0 SD1436 SET M3550

M1300
34 MOV H203 SD1437

6
MOV K7 SD1438

MOV H3FF SD1439

MOV K40 D2000

MOV K95 D2001

MOV K97 D2002

MOV K10 D2003

BTOW D2000 SD1440 K4

MOV H1 SD1444

SET SM1439

56 = H3 SD1446 SET M3000

MOV SD1448 D5000

62 = H0FF SD1446 SET M3500

MOV SD1449 D5001

MOV SD1452 D5002

MOV SD1453 D5003

M3000
72 SET SM1435
M3500
RST M0

RST M1000

RST M1100

RST M1200

RST M1300
M2000
80 = H1 SD1446 SET SM1442

= H2 SD1446

89 END

6 Ethernet
6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 175
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Executing data restoration]
(8) Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(11) Store the right-to-use number.
Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(20) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(34) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Fourth octet for target device IP address
Third octet for target device IP address
Second octet for target device IP address
First octet for target device IP address
Set the target device 1 or 2.
Set the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs.
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(56) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(62) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error code (module error).
Save the error code (device error).
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(72) Enable the data restoration execution.
Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(80) Set the restoration cancellation request.

6 Ethernet
176 6.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
 PART 3
PART 3 GX Works3

This part explains the operation methods when using the iQ Sensor Solution functions in GX Works3/
MELSOFT Navigator.

7 AnyWireASLINK

8 CC-Link

9 CC-Link IE TSN

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

11 Ethernet

177
 7 AnyWireASLINK
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for MELSEC iQ-R series, MELSEC iQ-
L series*1, or MELSEC iQ-F series connected to AnyWireASLINK.
*1 The MELSEC iQ-L series system is configured with an LHCPU and MELSEC-L series modules.

System configuration
This section explains the iQ Sensor Solution functions for AnyWireASLINK using the following system configuration.

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5)

Type Model name Manufacturer

(1) Engineering tool GX Works3 SWnDND-GXW3 ('n' indicates its version.) Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation
(2) CPU module RCPU R08CPU
(3) AnyWireASLINK master module RJ51AW12AL
(4) ASLINKAMP (Input) Photoelectric sensor B289SB-01AP-CAM20 (ASLINKAMP master) AnyWire Corporation
B289SB-01AP-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
Fiber sensor B289SB-01AF-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
B289SB-01AF-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
(5) ASLINKER (Input) B281SB-02U-CC20

For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for AnyWireASLINK, refer to the
following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

Considerations for a system configuration

■Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function
Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system configuration, and set
PLC parameters and other settings required for communication with a device supporting iQSS such as the address setting
and the device parameter setting.

■Address settings
Make sure to set the address occupied by a slave module so as not to exceed the number of operating points set in a master
module.
For details on the settings, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual
MELSEC iQ-R AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual (Startup)

7 AnyWireASLINK
178
7.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A slave module connected to an AnyWireASLINK master module can be detected and the information can be displayed in the
"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.
For the creation method of a new project and the operation methods of the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window, refer to
the following:
GX Works3 Operating Manual

Operating procedure
Create a new project for AnyWireASLINK in an engineering tool.

1. Select "Parameter"  "Module Information" in the

"Navigation" window, then right-click and select [Add New
Module] from the shortcut menu.

2. Select the following items from "Module Selection" in the "Add

New Module" screen.
• "Module Type": Network Module
• "Module Name": RJ51AW12AL

3. Double-click "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" in the

"Navigation" window.
7

The "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window appears.

4. Click the [Detect Now] button.

5. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual
(Application)

The actual system configuration is displayed in the

"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

6. Select [Close with Saving the Setting] in the "AnyWireASLINK

Configuration" window.
The information, such as parameters, displayed in the
"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window is applied to the network
parameter.

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 179
 Considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS
■Automatic address detection
When the actual system configuration was changed, perform the automatic address detection before using an iQ Sensor
Solution function.
For details on the automatic address detection, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual (Application)

■Operation on error
A system configuration may not be detected if an error occurs on the AnyWireASLINK master module.
If an error code is displayed, take corrective actions by referring to the manual for the AnyWireASLINK master module, then
perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

7 AnyWireASLINK
180 7.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
7.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against
System Configuration
The system configuration displayed in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window can be verified against the slave modules
connected to an AnyWireASLINK master module.
The result is displayed in the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.
Verify a system configuration when it is manually created or edited.

Operating procedure
1. Click the [Verify] button in the "AnyWireASLINK
Configuration" window.

2. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Verification of the Configuration with
the Connected Module after Address Auto-recognition," then
click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual
(Application)
7

The verification results are displayed in the "Verification Result of

the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration 181
 The display is switched by right-clicking on the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected
Module" window and selecting "Display All"/"Display Mismatch Only"/"Display other than Match."
The cursor jumps to the corresponding location in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window by double-
clicking the row with "Mismatch" in the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected Module"
window.

7 AnyWireASLINK
182 7.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration
7.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS
Parameters can be read from and written to a slave module.

• The data backup/restoration function is useful to read/write the parameters of multiple devices supporting
iQSS in a batch. (Page 188 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS)
• The useful function (linkage with dedicated tools) for devices supporting iQSS can also be used in the
"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window. (Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with
properties))

Operating procedure
■Reading parameters
1. Select a device supporting iQSS in the "AnyWireASLINK
Configuration" window, then right-click it and select [Online]
 [Parameter Processing of Slave Module] from the shortcut
menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Module" screen appears.

2. Select "Parameter read."

3. Click the [Execute] button.

The selected parameter is read and the value is displayed in the
column of "Read Value."

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 183
 ■Writing parameters
1. Select a device supporting iQSS in the "AnyWireASLINK
Configuration" window, then right-click it and select [Online]
 [Parameter Processing of Slave Module] from the shortcut
menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Module" screen appears.

2. Select "Parameter write."

3. Enter a value in the column of "Write Value."

4. Click the [Execute] button.

The value entered in the column of "Write Value" is written to the
device supporting iQSS.

"Parameter Processing of Slave Module" screen

Item Description
Target Module Information Information for the selected slave module is displayed.
Method selection Select processing to be executed for the selected slave module.
• Parameter read: Parameters are read from the selected slave module.
• Parameter write: Parameters are written to the selected slave module.
Parameter Information [Clear All "Read Value"] button Click this to clear all setting details that are read by "Parameter read."
[Clear All "Write Value"] button Click this to clear all setting details that are written by "Parameter write."
[Import] button Click this to read contents of parameter processing created in a CSV file.
[Export] button Click this to output contents of parameter processing set in this screen to a CSV
file.

7 AnyWireASLINK
184 7.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
Considerations
■Operation after writing parameters
When parameters of a slave module are written, the slave module operates according to the parameters; therefore, note that
the slave module may change its operation. Turning the power OFF and ON is not required after the parameter writing. For
details on the parameters, refer to the manual for a slave module used.

■A blank in "Write Value"

The device parameter of which "Write Value" is blank retains the value written in a slave module. However, if no parameters
have values in "Write Value," "Parameter write" cannot be executed.

■Operation on error
If a module being used has an error, parameters of a slave module may not be read/written properly. If an error code is
displayed, take corrective actions by referring to the manual for the module used, then read/write parameters again.

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 185
 7.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
The connection statuses of devices supporting iQSS can be monitored.

Operating procedure
1. Select [Diagnostics]  [Sensor/Device Monitor] with an
engineering tool.

2. Select an AnyWireASLINK master module in the "Module

Selection (Sensor/Device Monitor)" screen, and click the [OK]
button.

3. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual
(Application)

The "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in the

"Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
the "Monitoring Information" window.

7 AnyWireASLINK
186 7.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Considerations when monitoring devices supporting iQSS
■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function
The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

■Time taken to display the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen

When displaying the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen, a master module reads information from a slave
module.
Therefore, it may take time to display the screen depending on the number of slave modules.

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in an AnyWireASLINK master module. 7
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the AnyWireASLINK master module, then
perform the sensor/device monitor function again.
MELSEC iQ-R AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual (Application)

■Replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor

If replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor, perform an automatic detection of connected devices
in the monitor.

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 187
 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting
iQSS
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up to/restored from an SD memory card by using special relays and
special registers.
This will make a data restoration or utilization simplified and the time taken to change the information of multiple devices
supporting iQSS, restore data when a failure occurred in a device supporting iQSS, and to perform a changeover will also be
shortened.
This section explains data the backup and data restoration methods for a MELSEC iQ-R series AnyWireASLINK.

SD memory card

$MELPRJ$

Backup

ASLINK
(3)
20160101_00 ID513(201H)
(1)

0001_IN__0513 Data
(2) (4)
ID517(205H)
(1)
0001_IN__0517 Data
(2)

(1) Data backup

(2) Data restoration
(3) Address 1
(4) Address 5

Function Reference
Data backup Page 192 Data backup
Page 193 Program execution for data backup
Data restoration Page 201 Data restoration
Page 202 Program execution for data restoration

7 AnyWireASLINK
188 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Backup folder/file
New backup folders are created in the 'ASLINK' folder which exists in the 'Backup' folder under the main folder of '$MELPRJ$'
in an SD memory card when data is backed up.
If no '$MELPRJ$' folder, 'Backup' folder, or 'ASLINK' folder exists, each of the folders are created as well when data is backed
up.
Up to 100 backup folders (date_number) can be created in the 'ASLINK' folder.

■Backup folder configuration

The following figure shows the backup folder configuration in an SD memory card.

/ (1) (2) (3)

(4)

$MELPRJ$ Backup ASLINK 20160101_00 0001_OUT_0001

ID_OUT_0001.QBR

$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI

20160102_01 0001_OUT_0001 ID_OUT_0001.QBR

$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI

0001_IN__0064 ID_IN__0064.QBR

$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI
7

20160102_02

(1) A folder to save the settings of devices supporting iQSS connected to AnyWireASLINK
(2) Backup folder (date_number)
(3) Backup folder (start I/O No._ID)
(4) Backup data (information of each ID)

■Backup folder name

• Date_Number
YYYYMMDD_**
YYYY: Year when the data was backed up (four digits in decimal)
MM: Month when the data was backed up (two digits in decimal)
DD: Day when the data was backed up (two digits in decimal)
**: Number (two digits in decimal (00 to 99))*1

*1 If multiple folders with the same number exist while a target folder (0 to 99) is set to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration
folder number setting), the date of the backup folder name may not be updated. (Setting a number for a data backup folder name)
• Start I/O No._ID
****_OUT_****
First ****: Start I/O number (four digits in hexadecimal) (A value obtained by dividing the start I/O number by 16)
OUT: Output slave module, or IN_: Input slave module/I/O combined slave module
Last ****: Start ID number (four digits in decimal)

■Backup file name

ID_OUT_****.QBR
OUT: Output slave module, or IN_: Input slave module/I/O combined slave module
****: ID number (four digits in decimal)

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 189
 Considerations for data backup/restoration
■Use of an SD memory card
• During a data backup or restoration, do not perform the following actions: turning OFF the power, resetting a module, and
inserting or removing an SD memory card. Otherwise, for the data backup, data that was backed up until the data backup
processing was interrupted retains in the SD memory card. As for the data restoration, data that was restored until the data
restoration was interrupted retains in the device supporting iQSS.
• If the memory size or the number of files exceeds the maximum storage capacity of an SD memory card during the data
backup, only the data that has been properly backed up will be stored in the SD memory card.

■Concurrent use of other functions

While any of the following operations or functions are being performed, backup/restoration cannot be performed.
Additionally, the following operations and functions cannot be performed during data backup/restoration.
Operation/function name
Operation with an engineering tool Initializing the CPU built-in memory/SD memory card
Clearing values (file register)
Writing data to a programmable controller (including online change of files)
Deleting data in the programmable controller
User data operation Writing user data
Deleting user data
Creating a folder
Deleting a folder
Changing a folder name
Online change (ladder block)
Event history function (clearing event history)
File password function
Predefined protocol support function (writing protocol setting data)
Memory dump function (registering/clearing memory dump)
Operations with CPU Module Logging Data logging function (writing/deleting a logging setting file, registering/clearing a logging setting)
Configuration Tool
Deleting logging file(s)
Others • SLMP Creating a new file (New File)
• MC protocol Writing data to a file (Write File)
Deleting a file (Delete File)
Copying a file (Copy File)
Changing a file attribute (Change File State)
Changing file creation date (Change File Date)
File transfer from an Ethernet-equipped Writing a file (put, mput, pm-write)
module (FTP server)
Deleting a file (delete, mdelete)
Changing a file name (rename)
Changing a file attribute (change)
File transfer function (FTP server) of the built-in Ethernet function
File transfer function (FTP client) of the built-in Ethernet function
CPU module data backup/restoration function

When data is backed up or restored during a data logging or the realtime monitor function, the performance of the data
logging or the data sampling for the realtime monitor will be reduced.
Therefore, sampled data may be partially missed and the data missing frequency may be increased.

7 AnyWireASLINK
190 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Communication load
When data is backed up or restored, the load of the service processing in the CPU module is temporarily increased.
Consequently, a communication response will be slow and a timeout error may occur in other communications.
To avoid a timeout error, review the value set for "Device/Label Access Service Processing Setting."
[CPU Parameter]  [Service Processing Setting]  [Device/Label Access Service Processing Setting]

■Change of backup folders/data

Do not change a backup folder name, configuration, or saved file.
Otherwise, the data may not be restored properly.
For the backup file capacity, refer to the following:
Page 407 Backup File Capacity

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 191
 Data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be saved in an SD memory card for each ID by using an engineering tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the
"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window, then right-click it
and select [Online]  [Backup Slave Module] from the
shortcut menu.

2. Read the message and click the [Yes] button.

Data is backed up.

Considerations for a data backup

■Setting the backup setting
The initial values of the backup setting (SD1363 and SD1367) are as follows:
• SD1363 (folder number setting): FFFFH (automatic specification)
• Lower 8 bits of SD1367 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when backing up data with the settings other than the one above. (Page 193 Program execution for data
backup)

7 AnyWireASLINK
192 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Program execution for data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up in an SD memory card.
New folders are created every time when data is backed up, and data of each device supporting iQSS is saved as a file in the
folders. A system file ($BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI) that contains information required for data restoration is created for each ID
when data is backed up.
Data backup and restoration can be performed regardless of the operating status of a CPU module.
The following shows the procedure to back up data with a program.
Procedu Item Reference
re
1 Acquire a right to use. Page 193 Acquiring a right to use
2 Set the backup target setting and the operation setting. Page 194 Setting the backup setting
3 Perform a data backup. Page 195 Performing a data backup
4 Release the right to use. Page 195 Releasing the right to use

Results of the data backup and restoration functions can be checked in the event history of an engineering
tool. (Page 405 Event List)

Execution method of data backup

Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data backup. 7
■Acquiring a right to use
To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time by other request sources,
acquiring a right to use of them is required.
A right to use can be acquired when other request sources do not have the right to use them (when SD1361 is '0000H').

1. Setting a right-to-use request number

Set a request number (a value that has not been used by multiple request sources within the range of '1000H' to '1FFFH') to
SD1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request number).

2. Requesting a right to use

Turn ON SM1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request) to acquire a right to use for data backup.
SM1360 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is acquired.

3. Checking the acquisition of the right to use

Check that the value of SD1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number) is the same as the
value set to SD1360. If backup/restoration is performed without checking the acquisition of the right to use, the normal
operation is not guaranteed.

Precautions
The values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration are cleared when a
right to use is acquired. (However, SD1375 is set to 'FFFFH'.)
Save the values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) as required.

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 193
 ■Setting the backup setting
1. Setting a target module type
Set a target module with the lower 8 bits of SD1362 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration target module, execution unit
setting).
Target module type Description
1H: AnyWireASLINK Set this to specify a device supporting iQSS which is connected to the AnyWireASLINK master module.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set a unit to specify the range of data to be backed up at once.
Specify the execution unit to the upper 8 bits of SD1362.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the AnyWireASLINK master module with
the specified start I/O number.
2H: ID unit Set this to specify the device supporting iQSS with the specified ID number among the devices which are
connected to the AnyWireASLINK master module with the specified start I/O number.

3. Setting a number for a data backup folder name

Set a folder number to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration folder number setting).
Target folder Description
FFFFH: Automatic specification (default) Among the numbers (0 to 99) that are not used for backup folder names, the smallest number is used for a new
backup folder name.
An error occurs when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached
the upper limit.
FFFEH: Automatic specification (folder Among the numbers (0 to 99) that are not used for backup folder names, the smallest number is used for a new
deletion supported) backup folder name.
The oldest backup folder (date_number) is deleted and the number of the deleted folder is used for a new backup
folder name when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the
upper limit.
0 to 99: Target folder specification Specify a number (0 to 99) of the backup folder name.
When another folder with the same number exists, the target data is overwritten in execution unit without
changing the folder name.*1

*1 When the specified folder number exists, the operation to be performed depends on the specification of the execution unit as follows:

Execution unit Operation

1H: Module unit When the backup data with the same target module exists, the backup folder (start I/O number_ID) is deleted
before performing data backup.
2H: ID unit When the backup data with the same target module and the same target ID exists, the backup folder (start I/O
number_ID) is deleted before performing data backup.

4. Setting a target device

• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set a start I/O number to SD1364 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/
restoration target setting (target module)).
In a multiple CPU system, only the AnyWireASLINK master module controlled by a host CPU can be backed up. Data backup
cannot be performed for non-controlled modules.
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number Set the start I/O number (the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number by 16) of the AnyWireASLINK
master module which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS.

• Setting an ID number
When '2H' (ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set an ID number to SD1365 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration
target setting (target device 1)).
For details on the setting method of an ID number, refer to the manual of the AnyWireASLINK device used.
Target device (ID number) Description
0 to 9999: ID number Set the ID number of a target device supporting iQSS based on its address.
• ID number of a bit slave module: Set the number based on its address (0 to 254).
• ID number of a word slave module: Set the number based on its address (0 to 510).

7 AnyWireASLINK
194 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
5. Setting the operation setting when a data backup error occurs
Set the operation to be performed when the data backup fails on some devices while being processed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS to the lower 8 bits of SD1367 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration operation setting).
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data backup even if it fails on some devices.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data backup if it fails on some devices.

■Performing a data backup

Turn ON SM1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup request) to request a data backup.
Data is backed up after a data backup request.
SM1361 is turned OFF when a data backup is completed.

1. Checking the execution status of a data backup

The execution status of a data backup can be checked with the following special registers.
Special register Description
SD1371 This register stores the number of target devices for each execution unit when starting a data backup or
restoration.
SD1372 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has normally be completed for each execution
unit. (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed normally.)
SD1373 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has abnormally be completed for each
execution unit.*1 (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed abnormally.)
SD1374 This register stores the progress of processing being executed for a device in percent, from 0 to 100.

*1 For an iQ Sensor Solution related error (error code: 4805H), the number of devices in which the processing has been abnormally 7
completed is not counted.
2. Canceling a data backup
Turn ON SM1367 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration cancellation request) to cancel a data backup.
A cancellation is performed for each device supporting iQSS, so it will be canceled when a data backup which is being
performed to a device supporting iQSS at the time a cancellation request is made is completed.

3. Checking the completion of a data backup

When the data backup is completed, the backup completion status can be checked with the following special relays.
• Normally completed: SM1362 (iQ Sensor Solution backup normal completion) is turned ON.
• Abnormally completed: SM1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup abnormal completion) is turned ON.
The number of the folder where backup data was saved at the completion of data backup is stored to SD1375 (iQ Sensor
Solution backup folder number).
Backup folder number Description
0 to 99: Folder number The number (0 to 99) of the folder in which backup data was saved is stored.
FFFFH: Backup data not saved Backup data has not been saved.

4. Checking a data backup error

Even if a data backup of a target device supporting iQSS is completed with an error, a diagnostic error will not be detected.
Check the errors with the following special registers.
• SD1376 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module): The error code of an error occurred in a module
such as a CPU module or AnyWireASLINK master module can be checked.
• SD1377 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a device): The error code of an error occurred in a device
supporting iQSS can be checked.
• SD1378 to SD1381: An error occurrence source can be checked.
For details on special registers, refer to the user's manual of each CPU module and device supporting iQSS used.

■Releasing the right to use

Set SD1360 to '0000H' in order to turn SM1360 ON . The right to use is released and the next data backup is ready to be
performed.
SM1360 is turned OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1360 remains ON because no processing is
performed. In that case, turn OFF SM1360.

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 195
 Example of a data backup
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

(1)

(1) Backup target

• Target module type: AnyWireASLINK

• Execution unit: Module
• Folder number setting: Automatic specification
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.0
• Target device (ID number): 1
• Operation setting on error: Continue

7 AnyWireASLINK
196 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Categor Device Label name Description
y
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1361 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Request Backup request
SM1362 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Normal_Completion Backup normal completion
SM1363 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Error_Completion Backup abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_ Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
No
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_ Backup/restoration target module, execution unit setting
Unit_Setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Sett Backup/restoration folder number setting
ing
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Mod Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
ule
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Devi Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
ce_1 7
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Devi Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
ce_2
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_N Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
umber_of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
_of_Normal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully)
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
_of_Error_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed with
an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessi Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
ng_Per_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Caus Backup/restoration error cause in a device
e
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Exec Backup/restoration error target module, execution unit
ution_Unit_Information information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Numb Backup/restoration target folder number information
er_Information
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_M Backup/restoration error information (target module)
odule
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_D Backup/restoration error device information (target
evice_1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_D Backup/restoration error device information (target
evice_2 device 2)

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 197
 Categor Device Label name Description
y
Label to be Define global labels as follows:
defined

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

7 AnyWireASLINK
198 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 199
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(9) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(22) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(36) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data backup operation setting (on error).
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(51) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(56) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the backup error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(65) Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(75) Set the backup cancellation request.
[Releasing backup right to use]
(80) Set the backup right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating backup right to use]
(89) Set the backup right-to-use request.

7 AnyWireASLINK
200 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data restoration
Information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS for each ID by using an engineering
tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the
"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window, then right-click it
and select [Online]  [Restore Slave Module] from the
shortcut menu.

2. Select backup data to be restored, and click the [Execute]

button.

A list of the backup folder names (date_number) is

displayed in the column of "Folder Name."
Backup data is stored in backup folders for each
folder name (Start I/O number_ID) in an SD
memory card.
For details on the backup folder configuration,
refer to the following:
7
Page 189 Backup folder configuration

3. Read the message and click the [OK] button.

Data is restored.

Considerations for data restoration

■Setting the restoration setting
The initial value of the restoration setting (SD1367) is as follows:
• Lower 8 bits of SD1367 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when restoring data with the settings other than above. (Page 202 Program execution for data restoration)

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 201
 Program execution for data restoration
Information in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS.
Select a backup folder to be restored. In the data restoration, information such as a model name or device version in the
system file ($BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI) created with backup is compared with that of a device supporting iQSS. If the information
is mismatched, a restoration error will occur.
Data backup and restoration can be performed regardless of the operating status of a CPU module.
The following shows the procedure to restore data with a program.
Procedu Item Reference
re
1 Acquire a right to use. Page 202 Acquiring a right to use
2 Set the restoration target setting and the operation setting. Page 203 Setting the restoration setting
3 Perform a data restoration. Page 204 Performing a data restoration
4 Release the right to use. Page 204 Releasing the right to use

Results of the data backup and restoration functions can be checked in the event history of an engineering
tool. (Page 405 Event List)

Execution method of data restoration

Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data restoration.

■Acquiring a right to use

To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time by other request sources,
acquiring a right to use of them is required.
A right to use can be acquired when other request sources do not have the right to use them (when SD1361 is '0000H').

1. Setting a right-to-use request number

Set a request number (a value that has not been used by multiple request sources within the range of '1000H' to '1FFFH') to
SD1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request number).

2. Requesting a right to use

Turn ON SM1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request) to acquire a right to use for data
restoration. SM1360 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is acquired.

3. Checking the acquisition of the right to use

Check that the value of SD1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number) is the same as the
value set to SD1360. If backup/restoration is performed without checking the acquisition of the right to use, the normal
operation is not guaranteed.

Precautions
The values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration are cleared when a
right to use is acquired. (However, SD1375 is set to 'FFFFH'.)
Save the values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) as required.

7 AnyWireASLINK
202 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Setting the restoration setting
1. Setting a target module type
Set a target module with the lower 8 bits of SD1362 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration target module, execution unit
setting).
Target module type Description
1H: AnyWireASLINK Set this to specify a device supporting iQSS which is connected to the AnyWireASLINK master module.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set a unit to specify the range of data to be restored at once.
Specify the execution unit to the upper 8 bits of SD1362.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the AnyWireASLINK master module with
the specified start I/O number.
2H: ID unit Set this to specify the device supporting iQSS with the specified ID number among the devices which are
connected to the AnyWireASLINK master module with the specified start I/O number.

3. Selecting a folder for data restoration

Set a folder number to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration folder number setting).
Target folder Description
0 to 99: Target folder specification Specify a number (0 to 99) of the backup folder name to be restored.

4. Setting a target device

• Setting a module 7
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set a start I/O number to SD1364 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/
restoration target setting (target module)).
In a multiple CPU system, only the AnyWireASLINK master module controlled by a host CPU can be backed up. Data backup
cannot be performed for non-controlled modules.
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number Set the start I/O number (the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number by 16) of the AnyWireASLINK
master module which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS.

• Setting an ID number
When '2H' (ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set an ID number to SD1365 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration
target setting (target device 1)).
For details on the setting method of an ID number, refer to the manual of the AnyWireASLINK device used.
Target device (ID number) Description
0 to 9999: ID number Set the ID number of a target device supporting iQSS based on its address.
• ID number of a bit slave module: Set the number based on its address (0 to 254).
• ID number of a word slave module: Set the number based on its address (0 to 510).

5. Setting the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs

Set the operation to be performed when the data restoration fails on some devices while being processed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS to the lower 8 bits of SD1367 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration operation setting).
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data restoration even if it fails on some devices.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data restoration if it fails on some devices.

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 203
 ■Performing a data restoration
Turn ON SM1364 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration request) to request a data restoration.
Data is restored after a data restoration request.
SM1364 is turned OFF when a data restoration is completed.

1. Checking the execution status of a data restoration

The execution status of a data restoration can be checked with the following special register areas.
Special register Description
SD1371 This register stores the number of target devices for each execution unit when starting a data backup or
restoration.
SD1372 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has normally be completed for each execution
unit. (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed normally.)
SD1373 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has abnormally be completed for each
execution unit.*1 (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed abnormally.)
SD1374 This register stores the progress of processing being executed for a device in percent, from 0 to 100.

*1 For an iQ Sensor Solution related error (error code: 4805H), the number of devices in which the processing has been abnormally
completed is not counted.
2. Canceling a data restoration
Turn ON SM1367 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration cancellation request) to cancel a data restoration.
A cancellation is performed for each device supporting iQSS, so it will be canceled when a data restoration which is being
performed to a device supporting iQSS at the time a cancellation request is made is completed.

3. Checking the completion of a data restoration

When a data restoration is completed, the restoration completion status can be checked with the following special relays.
• Normally completed: SM1365 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration normal completion) is turned ON.
• Abnormally completed: SM1366 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration abnormal completion) is turned ON.

4. Checking a data restoration error

Even if a data restoration to a target device supporting iQSS is completed with an error, a diagnostic error will not be detected.
Check the errors with the following special registers.
• SD1376 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module): The error code of an error occurred in a module
such as a CPU module or AnyWireASLINK master module can be checked.
• SD1377 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a device): The error code of an error occurred in a device
supporting iQSS can be checked.
• SD1378 to SD1381: An error occurrence source can be checked.
For details on special registers, refer to the user's manual of each CPU module and device supporting iQSS used.

■Releasing the right to use

Set SD1360 to '0000H' in order to turn SM1360 ON. The right to use is released and the next data restoration is ready to be
performed.
SM1360 is turned OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1360 remains ON because no processing is
performed. In that case, turn OFF SM1360.

7 AnyWireASLINK
204 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data restoration
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

(1)

(1) Restoration target

• Target module type: AnyWireASLINK

• Execution unit: Module
• Folder number setting: 0 7
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.0
• Target device (ID number): 1
• Operation setting on error: Continue

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 205
 ■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Categor Device Label name Description
y
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1364 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Request Restoration request
SM1365 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Normal_Completion Restoration normal completion
SM1366 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Error_Completion Restoration abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_ Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
No
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_ Backup/restoration target module, execution unit setting
Unit_Setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Sett Backup/restoration folder number setting
ing
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Mod Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
ule
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Devi Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
ce_1
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Devi Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
ce_2
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Nu Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
mber_of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
_of_Normal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully)
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
_of_Error_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed with
an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessi Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
ng_Per_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Caus Backup/restoration error cause in a device
e
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execu Backup/restoration error target module, execution unit
tion_Unit_Information information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Numbe Backup/restoration target folder number information
r_Information
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_M Backup/restoration error information (target module)
odule
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_D Backup/restoration error device information (target
evice_1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_D Backup/restoration error device information (target
evice_2 device 2)

7 AnyWireASLINK
206 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Categor Device Label name Description
y
Label to be Define global labels as follows:
defined

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 207
 ■Sample program

7 AnyWireASLINK
208 7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
[Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(9) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(22) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(36) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data restoration operation setting (on error).
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(51) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(56) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the restoration error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
7
(65) Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(75) Set the restoration cancellation request.
[Releasing restoration right to use]
(80) Set the restoration right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating restoration right to use]
(89) Set the restoration right-to-use request.

7 AnyWireASLINK
7.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 209
 8 CC-Link
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for MELSEC iQ-R series or MELSEC
iQ-L series*1 connected to CC-Link.
*1 The MELSEC iQ-L series system is configured with an LHCPU and MELSEC-L series modules.

System configuration
This section explains the iQ Sensor Solution functions for CC-Link using the following system configuration.

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5)

Type Model name Manufacturer

(1) Engineering tool GX Works3 SWnDND-GXW3 ('n' indicates its version.) Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
(2) CPU module RCPU R08CPU
(3) CC-Link system master/local module RJ61BT11
(4) Analog input module (voltage/current input) AJ65SBT2B-64AD
(5) CC-Link sensor supporting Communication unit for SC-GU3-01 Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co.,
iQSS CC-Link Ltd.
Head-separated dual DPS-401
display digital pressure
sensor
Digital fiber sensor FX-501
Digital laser sensor LS-403

For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link, refer to the following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

Considerations for a system configuration

■Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function
Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system configuration, and set
module parameters and other settings required for communication with a device supporting iQSS.

8 CC-Link
210
Before using iQ Sensor Solution functions
■Link refresh setting (module parameter)
Some iQ Sensor Solution functions cannot be performed if devices to refresh the data of remote input (RX), remote output
(RY), remote register (RWr), and remote register (RWw) are not set.
Set devices used to data refresh in advance.
For setting devices used to data refresh, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

■Checking the selection status of "Detect Now Setting" (LHCPUs only)

The model name of a slave station can be read only when "Read the Model Name of the Slave Stations" is selected for the
following parameter item of a CC-Link system master/local module.
• "Application Settings"  "Detect Now Setting"
Check that "Read the Model Name of Slave Stations" is selected, and write the parameters to a CPU module in advance.
If it is not selected, change the setting and write the parameters to a CPU module.

Including a device connected to a communication module as a target

Some or all remote registers of a target device are used in a system while performing an iQ Sensor Solution function.
Therefore, add "Remote register use prohibited status (SW0160 to SW0163)" to the interlock when creating a program.

8 CC-Link
211
 8.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A slave station connected to a CC-Link system master/local module can be detected and the information can be displayed in
the "CC-Link Configuration" window.
For the creation method of a new project and the operation methods of the "CC-Link Configuration" window, refer to the
following:
GX Works3 Operating Manual

Operating procedure
Create a new project for CC-Link in an engineering tool.

1. Select "Parameter"  "Module Information" in the

"Navigation" window, then right-click and select [Add New
Module] from the shortcut menu.

2. Select the following items from "Module Selection" in the "Add

New Module" screen.
• "Module Type": Network Module
• "Module Name": RJ61BT11
• "Station Type": Master Station

3. Double-click "Parameter"  "Module Information"  "(new

module)" in the "Navigation" window, then double-click "Basic
Settings"  "Network Configuration Settings"  "Detailed
Setting."

8 CC-Link
212 8.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
The "CC-Link Configuration" window appears.

4. Click the [Detect Now] button.

5. Read the message and select the checkbox of "Set the

Module Connected to the Communication Module also as the
Read Object," then click the [Yes] button.

The actual system configuration is displayed in the "CC-Link

Configuration" window.

6. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "CC-Link

8
Configuration" window.
The information, such as parameters, displayed in the "CC-Link
Configuration" window is applied to the network parameter.

8 CC-Link
8.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 213
 Considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS
■Mode setting and transmission rate
Once an automatic detection of connected devices is performed, the mode setting and the transmission rate which have been
set in a CC-Link system master/local module are also detected.

■Operation on error
The system configuration cannot be detected if an error occurs on the master station.
Take corrective actions and perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.
Error information is displayed in the "Output" window when an error occurred.
Double-click the information and correct the error at the jumped destination.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave station correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"

■Display of "Module With No Profile Found"

When "Module with No Profile Found" is displayed, it can be changed to "General CC-Link Module" by the following operation:
Select a target module, and select [CC-Link Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Change to General CC-Link Module].

■Non-sequential station number of slave stations

When an automatic detection of connected devices is performed in a system configuration in which the station numbers of
slave stations are not sequential, a general-purpose remote I/O station is automatically set for a station without a station
number as a reserved station.
Arrange the stations and change the modules in accordance with the actual module configuration.

■Display of "General Module"

After performing an automatic detection of connected devices, a reserved station and a station which is not included in the
module parameter are displayed as "General Module."
In that case, turn the power OFF, and ON again in the order from the slave station to the master station. Then, perform an
automatic detection of connected devices again.

■System configuration change

When a system configuration is changed (stations are added or changed), a slave station may not be detected.
In that case, turn the power OFF, and ON again in the order from the slave station to the master station. Then, perform an
automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Standby master station in a system configuration

When a standby master station is included in a system configuration, the last station number is set for the station.
Change the station number in accordance with the actual system configuration.

■Operation switching from the standby master operation to the master operation
When the standby master operation is switched to the master operation, a station whose operation is switched to the master
operation will not be detected.
In that case, turn the power OFF, and ON again in the order from the standby master station to the master station. Then,
perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Use of the function via Ethernet

To perform an automatic detection of connected devices, connect a built-in Ethernet port CPU with an Ethernet cable.
An automatic detection of connected device cannot be performed when connecting to an RJ71EN71 or RnENCPU (network
part).

8 CC-Link
214 8.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Detecting devices connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
To display devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), on a system configuration
diagram, first a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) needs to be detected in the "CC-Link Configuration" window. Then, perform an
automatic detection of connected devices in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window in order to detect and display
devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
For the considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), refer to the
following:
Page 218 Considerations when detecting devices connected to a bridge module

System configuration

(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(5) (6)

Type Model name Manufacturer

(1) Engineering tool GX Works3 SWnDND-GXW3 ('n' indicates its version.) Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
(2) CPU module RCPU R08CPU
(3) CC-Link system master/local module RJ61BT11
(4) CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module NZ2AW1C2AL
(5) ASLINKAMP (Input) Photoelectric sensor B289SB-01AP-CAM20 (ASLINKAMP master) AnyWire Corporation
B289SB-01AP-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
Fiber sensor B289SB-01AF-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
B289SB-01AF-CAS (ASLINKAMP slave)
(6) ASLINKER (Input) B281SB-02U-CC20

8 CC-Link
8.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 215
 ■Setting the operation mode for CC-Link Ver.2-compatible slave station
A bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) is a CC-Link Ver.2-compatible slave station.
To detect and display a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) on a system configuration diagram, set the operation mode in which
CC-Link Ver.2-compatible slave station works.
The following table shows the combinations of the parameter setting for a CC-Link system master/local module and the CC-
Link operation mode for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
CC-Link system master/local module (RJ61BT11) Bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
Parameter setting item CC-Link operation mode
Mode Station information (station type)
Remote net Ver.2 mode Ver.2 remote device station Ver.2.00
Remote device net Ver.2 mode

For the information of the version and mode of CC-Link, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

Operating procedure
1. Detect and display a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) in the
"CC-Link Configuration" window.

2. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), then right-click it

and select [Open System Configuration]  [Open
AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from the shortcut menu.

8 CC-Link
216 8.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
The "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window appears.

3. Click the [Detect Now] button.

4. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

The actual system configuration is displayed in the

"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

5. Select [Close with Saving the Setting] in the "AnyWireASLINK

Configuration" window.
The setting of the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window is
saved and the window is closed.

8 CC-Link
8.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 217
 Considerations when detecting devices connected to a bridge module
■Automatic address detection
When the actual system configuration was changed, perform the automatic address detection before using an iQ Sensor
Solution function.
For details on the automatic address detection, refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Settings required for communication

To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Settings in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window

After performing an automatic detection of connected devices, the settings of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to
a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) are not saved until [Close with Reflecting the Setting] is selected in the "CC-Link
Configuration" window.
Make sure to select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "CC-Link Configuration" window after selecting [Close with
Enabling the Setting] in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

■Operation on error
A system configuration may not be detected if an error occurs on a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
If an error code is displayed, take corrective actions by referring to the manual for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), then
perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

8 CC-Link
218 8.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
8.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against
System Configuration
Devices supporting iQSS can be verified against a system configuration displayed in a configuration window.

Verifying devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a

bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) against a system configuration
Devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) can be verified against a system
configuration displayed in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.
The result is displayed in the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.
Verify a system configuration when it is manually created or edited.

Operating procedure
1. Verify devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), against a system
configuration in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.
(Page 181 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against
System Configuration)

Considerations
■Settings required for communication
To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

8 CC-Link
8.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration 219
 8.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS
Parameters can be read from and written to a slave station.

• The data backup/restoration function is useful to read/write the parameters of multiple devices supporting
iQSS in a batch. (Page 227 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS)
• The useful function (command execution to slave stations) can also be used in the "CC-Link Configuration"
window. (Page 366 Useful Functions)

Operating procedure
■Reading parameters
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the "CC-Link
Configuration" window, then right-click it and select [Online]
 [Parameter Processing of Slave Station] from the shortcut
menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen appears.

2. Select a target to be read.

3. Select a parameter to be read.

4. Click the [Execute] button.

The selected parameter is read and the value is displayed in the
column of "Read Value."

8 CC-Link
220 8.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
■Writing parameters
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the "CC-Link
Configuration" window, then right-click it and select [Online]
 [Parameter Processing of Slave Station] from the shortcut
menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen appears.

2. Select a target to be written.

3. Select a parameter to be written.

4. Enter a value in the column of "Write Value."

5. Click the [Execute] button.

The value entered in the column of "Write Value" is written to the
device supporting iQSS.

Considerations
■Refresh setting
When the refresh setting differs from that of an actual module, the parameter processing of a slave station cannot be
performed.

■Operation after writing parameters

When parameters of a slave station are written, the slave station operates according to the parameters; therefore, note that
the slave station may change its operation.
For details on parameters, refer to the manual for a slave station used.

■A blank in "Write Value"

"Parameter write" cannot be executed if there is even one blank in "Write Value."

■Operation on error
If a module being used has an error, parameters of slave stations may not be read/written properly. Take corrective actions
and read/write parameters again.

8 CC-Link
8.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 221
 Reading/writing parameters of devices supporting iQSS which
are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
Parameters of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) can be read and written.

Operating procedure
1. Detect devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) in the "AnyWireASLINK
Configuration" window. (Page 215 Detecting devices
connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL))

2. Read or write parameters of the detected devices. (Page

183 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS)

8 CC-Link
222 8.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
8.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
The connection statuses of devices supporting iQSS can be monitored.

Operating procedure
1. Select [Diagnostics]  [Sensor/Device Monitor] with an
engineering tool.

2. Select a CC-Link system master/local module in the "Module

Selection (Sensor/Device Monitor)" screen, and click the [OK]
button.

3. Read the message and select the checkbox of "Set the

Module Connected to the Communication Module also as the
Read Object," then click the [Yes] button.
8

The "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC-Link" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in the

"Sensor/Device Monitor for CC-Link" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
the "Monitoring Information" window.

8 CC-Link
8.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 223
 Considerations when monitoring devices supporting iQSS
■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function
The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave station correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a master station.
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the CC-Link system master/local module, then
perform the sensor/device monitor function again.

8 CC-Link
224 8.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Monitoring devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
Operating procedure
1. Open the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC-Link" screen.
(Page 223 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS)

2. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) in 'List of stations' or

'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC-Link"
screen, then right-click it and select [Open System 8
Configuration]  [Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from
the shortcut menu.

3. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

8 CC-Link
8.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 225
 The "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in

'List of modules' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device
Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
the "Monitoring Information" window.

Considerations when monitoring devices connected to a bridge module

■Settings required for communication
To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function

The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

■Time taken to display the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen

When displaying the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen, a bridge module reads information from a slave
module.
Therefore, it may take time to display the screen depending on the number of slave modules.

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL), then
perform the sensor/device monitor function again.

■Replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor

If replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor, perform an automatic detection of connected devices
in the monitor.

8 CC-Link
226 8.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting
iQSS
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up to/restored from an SD memory card by using special relays and
special registers.
This will make a data restoration or utilization simplified and the time taken to change the information of multiple devices
supporting iQSS, restore data when a failure occurred in a device supporting iQSS, and to perform a changeover will also be
shortened.
This section explains the data backup and data restoration methods of iQ Sensor Solution for a MELSEC iQ-R series CC-
Link.

SD memory card

$MELPRJ$

Backup

CC-Link

20160101_00 (1) STATION0001 8

0001_0001 Data

(2)
STATION0002
(1)

0001_0002 Data

(2)

(1) Data backup

(2) Data restoration

Function Reference
Data backup Page 232 Data backup
Page 233 Program execution for data backup
Data restoration Page 247 Data restoration
Page 248 Program execution for data restoration

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 227
 Backup folder/file
Backup data is created in the 'CC-Link' folder which exists in the 'Backup' folder under the main folder of '$MELPRJ$' in the
root directory when data is backed up.
If no '$MELPRJ$' folder, 'Backup' folder, or 'CC-Link' folder exists, each of the folders are created as well when data is backed
up.
Up to 100 backup folders (date_number) can be created in the 'CC-Link' folder.

■Backup folder configuration

The following figure shows the backup folder configuration in an SD memory card.

/ (1) (2) (3)

(4)

$MELPRJ$ Backup CC-Link 20160101_00 0001_0001 STATION0001.QBR

$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI

20160101_01 0001_0001 STATION0001.QBR

$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI (5)

0001_0064 SUBID0001.QBR

SUBID0002.QBR

20160102_02
SUBID0033.QBR

$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI

AnyWireASLINK

(1) A folder to save the settings of devices supporting iQSS connected to CC-Link
(2) Backup folder (date_number)
(3) Backup folder (start I/O number_station number)
(4) Backup data (information of each station)
(5) Backup data (information of each station sub-ID number)

8 CC-Link
228 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Backup folder name
• Date_Number
YYYYMMDD_**
YYYY: Year when the data was backed up (four digits in decimal)
MM: Month when the data was backed up (two digits in decimal)
DD: Day when the data was backed up (two digits in decimal)
**: Number (two digits in decimal (00 to 99))*1

*1 If multiple folders with the same number exist while a target folder (0 to 99) is set to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration
folder number setting), the date of the backup folder name may not be updated. (Setting a number for a data backup folder name)
• Start I/O number_Station number
****_****
First ****: Start I/O number (four digits in hexadecimal) (A value obtained by dividing the start I/O number by 16)
Last ****: Station number (four digits in decimal)

■Backup file name

• Station number
STATION****.QBR
****: Station number (four digits in decimal)

• Station sub-ID number

SUBID****.QBR
****: Station sub-ID number (four digits in decimal)

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 229
 Points to be checked before data backup/restoration
■Check the availability of data backup/restoration
The data can be backed up and restored when a CC-Link system master/local module and a bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
satisfy the following conditions.
Perform the automatic address detection function and the parameter batch read function before data backup/restoration.
The 'n' indicates the address assigned to the master station by the station number setting.
Module Condition to be checked Remote device RX signal Signal status
CC-Link system master/local module Module failure Xn0 OFF
Module READY XnF ON
Own station data link status Xn1 ON
Data link status of other stations*1 SW0080 to SW0083 OFF
Remote register use prohibited status*1 SW0160 to SW0163 OFF
Bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL) Remote READY RX(n+D)B ON
(CC-Link operation mode Ver.2.00)
DP/DN short error RXn1 OFF
Transmission cable voltage drop error RXn3 OFF
DP/DN disconnection error RXn4 OFF
Slave module alarm signal RX(n+1)0 OFF*2
Parameter access completion flag RX(n+1)1 ON
Parameter access error RX(n+1)2 OFF
Automatic address detection flag RX(n+1)4 OFF

*1 Set the target station.

*2 Excluding when the error code is 0131H.

■Interlock setting
Some or all remote registers of a target device are used in the system during a data backup/restoration.
Therefore, add "Remote register use prohibited status (SW0160 to SW0163)" to the interlock when creating a program.

■The station whose operating status is switched from the standby master station to master
station
The data backup/restoration function cannot be performed to a station in which the operation was switched from the standby
master operation to the master operation.
In that case, turn the power OFF, and ON again in the order from the standby master station to the master station. Then,
perform a data backup/restoration.

Considerations for data backup/restoration

■Use of an SD memory card
• During a data backup or restoration, do not perform the following actions: turning OFF the power, resetting a module, and
inserting or removing an SD memory card.
Otherwise, the data backup or restoration will be interrupted and the data will not be backed up or restored properly.
• Normal backup data cannot be created if the memory size or the number of files exceeds the maximum storage capacity of
an SD memory card during a data backup.

8 CC-Link
230 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Concurrent use of other functions
While any of the following operations or functions are being performed, backup/restoration cannot be performed.
Additionally, the following operations and functions cannot be performed during data backup/restoration.
Operation/function name
Operation with an engineering tool Initializing the CPU built-in memory/SD memory card
Clearing values (file register)
Writing data to a programmable controller (including online change of files)
Deleting data in the programmable controller
User data operation Writing user data
Deleting user data
Creating a folder
Deleting a folder
Changing a folder name
Online change (ladder block)
Event history function (clearing event history)
File password function
Predefined protocol support function (writing protocol setting data)
Memory dump function (registering/clearing memory dump)
Operations with CPU Module Logging Data logging function (writing/deleting a logging setting file, registering/clearing a logging setting)
Configuration Tool
Deleting logging file(s)
Others • SLMP Creating a new file (New File)
• MC protocol Writing data to a file (Write File)
Deleting a file (Delete File)
Copying a file (Copy File)
Changing a file attribute (Change File State) 8
Changing file creation date (Change File Date)
File transfer from an Ethernet-equipped module (FTP Writing a file (put, mput, pm-write)
server)
Deleting a file (delete, mdelete)
Changing a file name (rename)
Changing a file attribute (change)
File transfer function (FTP server) of the built-in Ethernet function
File transfer function (FTP client) of the built-in Ethernet function
CPU module data backup/restoration function

When data is backed up or restored during a data logging or the realtime monitor function, the performance of the data
logging or the data sampling for the realtime monitor will be reduced.
Therefore, sampled data may be partially missed and the data missing frequency may be increased.

■Communication load
When data is backed up or restored, the load of the service processing in the CPU module is temporarily increased.
Consequently, a communication response will be slow and a timeout error may occur in other communications.
To avoid a timeout error, review the value set for "Device/Label Access Service Processing Setting."
[CPU Parameter]  [Service Processing Setting]  [Device/Label Access Service Processing Setting]

■Change of backup folders/data

Do not change a backup folder name, configuration, or saved file.
Otherwise, the data may not be restored properly.
For the backup file capacity, refer to the following:
Page 407 Backup File Capacity

■When backing up the data of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1C2AL):
• Backup data is stored in the 'CC-Link' backup folder.
• The 'station sub-ID number' is equivalent to the 'ID' of a slave module connected to AnyWireASLINK.
• The backup file (STATION0000.QBR) of the bridge module is not created.

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 231
 Data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be saved in an SD memory card for each station by using an engineering tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the "CC-Link
Configuration" window, then right-click it and select [Online]
 [Backup Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.

2. Read the message and click the [Yes] button.

Data is backed up.

Considerations for a data backup

■Setting the backup setting
The initial values of the backup setting (SD1363 and SD1367) are as follows:
• SD1363 (folder number setting): FFFFH (automatic specification)
• Lower 8 bits of SD1367 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when backing up data with the settings other than the one above. (Page 233 Program execution for data
backup)

8 CC-Link
232 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Program execution for data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up in an SD memory card.
New folders are created every time when data is backed up, and data of each device supporting iQSS is saved in a file format
in the folders. A system file ($BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI) that contains information required for data restoration is created for each
station when data is backed up.
Data backup and restoration can be performed regardless of the operating status of a CPU module.
The following shows the procedure to back up data with a program.
Procedu Item Reference
re
1 Acquire a right to use. Page 233 Acquiring a right to use
2 Set the backup target setting and the operation setting. Page 234 Setting the backup setting
3 Perform a data backup. Page 236 Performing a data backup
4 Release the right to use. Page 236 Releasing the right to use

Results of the data backup and restoration functions can be checked in the event history of an engineering
tool. (Page 405 Event List)

Execution method of data backup

Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data backup.

■Acquiring a right to use

To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time by other request sources,
acquiring a right to use of them is required. 8
A right to use can be acquired when other request sources do not have the right to use them (when SD1361 is '0000H').

1. Setting a right-to-use request number

Set a request number (a value that has not been used by multiple request sources within the range of '1000H' to '1FFFH') to
SD1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request number).

2. Requesting a right to use

Turn ON SM1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request) to acquire a right to use for data backup.
SM1360 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is acquired.

3. Checking the acquisition of the right to use

Check that the value of SD1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number) is the same as the
value set to SD1360. If backup/restoration is performed without checking the acquisition of the right to use, the normal
operation is not guaranteed.

Precautions
The values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration are cleared when a
right to use is acquired. (However, SD1375 is set to 'FFFFH'.)
Save the values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) as required.

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 233
 ■Setting the backup setting
1. Setting a target module type
Set a target module with the lower 8 bits of SD1362 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration target module, execution unit
setting).
Target module type Description
2H: CC-Link Set this to specify a device supporting iQSS which is connected to the CC-Link master station.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set a unit to specify the range of data to be backed up at once.
Specify the execution unit to the upper 8 bits of SD1362.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link master station with the
specified start I/O number.
2H: Station unit Set this to specify either of the following devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link master
station with the specified start I/O number: device supporting iQSS with the specified station number or all
devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the module with the specified station number.
3H: Station sub-ID unit Set this to specify the following devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a CC-Link master station with
the specified start I/O number: the devices which are connected to the specified station number with the specified
station sub-ID number.

3. Setting a number for a data backup folder name

Set a folder number to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration folder number setting).
Target folder Description
FFFFH: Automatic specification (default) Among the numbers (0 to 99) that are not used for backup folder names, the smallest number is used for a new
backup folder name.
An error occurs when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached
the upper limit.
FFFEH: Automatic specification (folder Among the numbers (0 to 99) that are not used for backup folder names, the smallest number is used for a new
deletion supported) backup folder name.
The oldest backup folder (date_number) is deleted and the number of the deleted folder is used for a new backup
folder name when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the
upper limit.
0 to 99: Target folder specification Specify a number (0 to 99) of the backup folder name.
When another folder with the same number exists, the target data is overwritten in execution unit without
changing the folder name.*1

*1 When the specified folder number exists, the operation to be performed depends on the specification of the execution unit as follows:

Execution unit Operation

1H: Module unit When the backup data with the same target module exists, the backup folder (start I/O number_station number)
is deleted before performing data backup.
2H: Station unit When the backup data with the same target module and the same target station number exists, data backup is
performed after the backup folder (start I/O number_station number) is deleted.
3H: Station sub-ID unit When the backup data with the same target module and the same target station number exists, the information of
the backed up station sub-ID is added to the system file for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration.
When the backup data with the same target module, the same target station number, and the same target station
sub-ID number exists, the backup data (information of each station sub-ID) is deleted before performing data
backup.

8 CC-Link
234 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
4. Setting a target device
• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set a start I/O number to SD1364 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/
restoration target setting (target module)).
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number Set the start I/O number (the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number by 16) of the CC-Link master station
which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS.

• Setting a station number

When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set a station number to SD1365 (iQ Sensor
Solution data backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)).
Target device (Station number) Description
1 to 64: Station number Set the station number of a target device supporting iQSS or the station number of the module which is
connected to a device supporting iQSS.

• Setting a station sub-ID number

When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set a station sub-ID number to SD1366 (iQ Sensor Solution
backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)).
Target device (Station sub-ID Description
number)
0 to 9999: Station sub-ID number Set the station sub-ID number of a target device supporting iQSS.

Precautions
When backup/restore the data in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), set the ID
number of AnyWireASLINK to SD1366.
For details on the ID number (SD1366) of AnyWireASLINK, refer to the following:
8
Page 194 Setting the backup setting

5. Setting the operation setting when a data backup error occurs

Set the operation to be performed when the data backup fails on some devices while being processed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS to the lower 8 bits of SD1367 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration operation setting).
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data backup even if it fails on some devices.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data backup if it fails on some devices.

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 235
 ■Performing a data backup
Turn ON SM1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup request) to request a data backup.
Data is backed up after a data backup request.
SM1361 is turned OFF when a data backup is completed.

1. Checking the execution status of a data backup

The execution status of a data backup can be checked with the following special registers.
Special register Description
SD1371 This register stores the number of target devices for each execution unit when starting a data backup or
restoration.
SD1372 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has normally be completed for each execution
unit. (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed normally.)
SD1373 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has abnormally be completed for each
execution unit.*1 (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed abnormally.)
SD1374 This register stores the progress of processing being executed for a device in percent, from 0 to 100.

*1 For an iQ Sensor Solution related error (error code: 4805H), the number of devices in which the processing has been abnormally
completed is not counted.
2. Canceling a data backup
Turn ON SM1367 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration cancellation request) to cancel a data backup.
A cancellation is performed for each device supporting iQSS, so it will be canceled when a data backup which is being
performed to a device supporting iQSS at the time a cancellation request is made is completed.

3. Checking the completion of a data backup

When the data backup is completed, the backup completion status can be checked with the following special relays.
• Normally completed: SM1362 (iQ Sensor Solution backup normal completion) is turned ON.
• Abnormally completed: SM1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup abnormal completion) is turned ON.
The number of the folder where backup data was saved at the completion of data backup is stored to SD1375 (iQ Sensor
Solution backup folder number).
Backup folder number Description
0 to 99: Folder number The number (0 to 99) of the folder in which backup data was saved is stored.
FFFFH: Backup data not saved Backup data has not been saved.

4. Checking a data backup error

Even if a data backup of a target device supporting iQSS is completed with an error, a diagnostic error will not be detected.
Check the errors with the following special registers.
• SD1376 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module): The error code of an error occurred in a module
such as a CPU module or CC-Link master station can be checked.
• SD1377 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a device): The error code of an error occurred in a device
supporting iQSS can be checked.
• SD1378 to SD1382: An error occurrence source can be checked.
For details on special registers, refer to the user's manual of each CPU module and device supporting iQSS used.

■Releasing the right to use

Set SD1360 to '0000H' in order to turn SM1360 ON . The right to use is released and the next data backup is ready to be
performed.
SM1360 is turned OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1360 remains ON because no processing is
performed. In that case, turn OFF SM1360.

8 CC-Link
236 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data backup
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

(1)

(1) Backup target

• Target module type: CC-Link

• Execution unit: Station
• Folder number setting: 18
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.0
• Operation setting on error: Continue

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 237
 ■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Categor Device Label name Description
y
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1361 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Request Backup request
SM1362 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Normal_Completion Backup normal completion
SM1363 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Error_Completion Backup abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_No Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_Unit Backup/restoration target module, execution unit
_Setting setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Setting Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Module Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
1
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
2
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Numb Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
er_of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
Normal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully)
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
Error_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed
with an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessing_ Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
Per_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a device
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execution Backup/restoration error target module, execution
_Unit_Information unit information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Number_I Backup/restoration target folder number information
nformation
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Modu Backup/restoration error information (target module)
le
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Devic Backup/restoration error device information (target
e_1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Devic Backup/restoration error device information (target
e_2 device 2)

8 CC-Link
238 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Categor Device Label name Description
y
Label to be Define global labels as follows:
defined

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.
8

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 239
 ■Sample program

8 CC-Link
240 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
[Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Executing data backup and checking data link status]
Check that the data link status of other stations (SW0080 to SW0083) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data backup request.
(9) Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(25) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(35) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(49) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data backup operation setting (on error).
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(64) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(69) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the backup error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(78) Clear the initialization trigger.
8
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(88) Set the backup cancellation request.
[Releasing backup right to use]
(93) Set the backup right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating backup right to use]
(102) Set the backup right-to-use request.

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 241
 Example of a data backup (bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL))
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

(1)

(1) Backup target

• Target module type: CC-Link

• Execution unit: Station
• Folder number setting: 18
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.0
• Operation setting on error: Continue

8 CC-Link
242 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Catego Device Label name Description
ry
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1361 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Request Backup request
SM1362 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Normal_Completion Backup normal completion
SM1363 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Error_Completion Backup abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_No Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_Unit_S Backup/restoration target module, execution unit
etting setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Setting Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Module Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_1 Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_2 Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Number_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_No Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
rmal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully) 8
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_Er Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
ror_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed
with an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessing_Pe Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
r_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a device
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execution_ Backup/restoration error target module, execution
Unit_Information unit information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Number_Info Backup/restoration target folder number information
rmation
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Module Backup/restoration error information (target module)
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration error device information (target
1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration error device information (target
2 device 2)

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 243
 Catego Device Label name Description
ry
Label to Define global labels as follows:
be
defined

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

8 CC-Link
244 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 245
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Executing data backup and checking data link status]
Check that the data link status of other stations (SW0080 to SW0083) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data backup request.
(9) Set the backup right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(25) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(35) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(49) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data backup operation setting (on error).
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(64) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(69) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the backup error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(78) Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(88) Set the backup cancellation request.
[Releasing backup right to use]
(93) Set the backup right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating backup right to use]
(102) Set the backup right-to-use request.

8 CC-Link
246 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data restoration
Information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS for each station by using an
engineering tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the "CC-Link
Configuration" window, then right-click it and select [Online]
 [Restore Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.

2. Select backup data to be restored, and click the [Execute]

button.

A list of the backup folder names (date_number) is

displayed in the column of "Folder Name."
Backup data is stored in backup folders for each
folder name (Start I/O number_Station number) in
an SD memory card.
For details on the backup folder configuration,
refer to the following:
Page 228 Backup folder configuration

3. Read the message and click the [OK] button.

Data is restored.
8

Considerations for data restoration

■Setting the restoration setting
The initial value of the restoration setting (SD1367) is as follows:
• Lower 8 bits of SD1367 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when restoring data with the settings other than above. (Page 248 Program execution for data restoration)

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 247
 Program execution for data restoration
Information in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS.
Select a backup folder to be restored. In the data restoration, information such as a model name or device version in the
system file ($BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI) created with backup is compared with that of the CC-Link master station or a device
supporting iQSS. If the information is mismatched, a restoration error will occur.
Data backup and restoration can be performed regardless of the operating status of a CPU module.
The following shows the procedure to restore data with a program.
Procedu Item Reference
re
1 Acquire a right to use. Page 248 Acquiring a right to use
2 Set the restoration target setting and the operation setting. Page 249 Setting the restoration setting
3 Perform a data restoration. Page 250 Performing a data restoration
4 Release the right to use. Page 250 Releasing the right to use

Results of the data backup and restoration functions can be checked in the event history of an engineering
tool. (Page 405 Event List)

Execution method of data restoration

Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data restoration.

■Acquiring a right to use

To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time by other request sources,
acquiring a right to use of them is required.
A right to use can be acquired when other request sources do not have the right to use them (when SD1361 is '0000H').

1. Setting a right-to-use request number

Set a request number (a value that has not been used by multiple request sources within the range of '1000H' to '1FFFH') to
SD1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request number).

2. Requesting a right to use

Turn ON SM1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request) to acquire a right to use for data
restoration. SM1360 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is acquired.

3. Checking the acquisition of the right to use

Check that the value of SD1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number) is the same as the
value set to SD1360. If backup/restoration is performed without checking the acquisition of the right to use, the normal
operation is not guaranteed.

Precautions
The values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration are cleared when a
right to use is acquired. (However, SD1375 is set to 'FFFFH'.)
Save the values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) as required.

8 CC-Link
248 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Setting the restoration setting
1. Setting a target module type
Set a target module with the lower 8 bits of SD1362 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration target module, execution unit
setting).
Target module type Description
2H: CC-Link Set this to specify a device supporting iQSS which is connected to the CC-Link master station.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set a unit to specify the range of data to be restored at once.
Specify the execution unit to the upper 8 bits of SD1362.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link master station with the
specified start I/O number.
2H: Station unit Set this to specify either of the following devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the CC-Link master
station with the specified start I/O number: device supporting iQSS with the specified station number or all
devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the module with the specified station number.
3H: Station sub-ID unit Set this to specify the following devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a CC-Link master station with
the specified start I/O number: the devices which are connected to the specified station number with the specified
station sub-ID number.

3. Selecting a folder for data restoration

Set a folder number to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration folder number setting).
Target folder Description
0 to 99: Target folder specification Specify a number (0 to 99) of the backup folder name to be restored.

4. Setting a target device

• Setting a module 8
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set a start I/O number to SD1364 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/
restoration target setting (target module)).
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number Set the start I/O number (the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number by 16) of the CC-Link master station
which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS.

• Setting a station number

When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set a station number to SD1365 (iQ Sensor
Solution data backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)).
Target device (Station number) Description
1 to 64: Station number Set the station number of a target device supporting iQSS or the station number of the module which is
connected to a device supporting iQSS.

• Setting a station sub-ID number

When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set a station sub-ID number to SD1366 (iQ Sensor Solution
backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)).
Target device (Station sub-ID Description
number)
0 to 9999: Station sub-ID number Set the station sub-ID number of a target device supporting iQSS.

Precautions
When backup/restore the data in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), set the ID
number of AnyWireASLINK to SD1366.
For details on the ID number (SD1440) of AnyWireASLINK, refer to the following:
Page 203 Setting the restoration setting

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 249
 5. Setting the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs
Set the operation to be performed when the data restoration fails on some devices while being processed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS to the lower 8 bits of SD1367 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration operation setting).
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data restoration even if it fails on some devices.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data restoration if it fails on some devices.

■Performing a data restoration

Turn ON SM1364 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration request) to request a data restoration.
Data is restored after a data restoration request.
SM1364 is turned OFF when a data restoration is completed.

1. Checking the execution status of a data restoration

The execution status of a data restoration can be checked with the following special register areas.
Special register Description
SD1371 This register stores the number of target devices for each execution unit when starting a data backup or
restoration.
SD1372 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has normally be completed for each execution
unit. (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed normally.)
SD1373 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has abnormally be completed for each
execution unit.*1 (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed abnormally.)
SD1374 This register stores the progress of processing being executed for a device in percent, from 0 to 100.

*1 For an iQ Sensor Solution related error (error code: 4805H), the number of devices in which the processing has been abnormally
completed is not counted.
2. Canceling a data restoration
Turn ON SM1367 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration cancellation request) to cancel a data restoration.
A cancellation is performed for each device supporting iQSS, so it will be canceled when a data restoration which is being
performed to a device supporting iQSS at the time a cancellation request is made is completed.

3. Checking the completion of a data restoration

When a data restoration is completed, the restoration completion status can be checked with the following special relays.
• Normally completed: SM1365 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration normal completion) is turned ON.
• Abnormally completed: SM1366 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration abnormal completion) is turned ON.

4. Checking a data restoration error

Even if a data restoration to a target device supporting iQSS is completed with an error, a diagnostic error will not be detected.
Check the errors with the following special registers.
• SD1376 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module): The error code of an error occurred in a module
such as a CPU module or CC-Link master station can be checked.
• SD1377 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a device): The error code of an error occurred in a device
supporting iQSS can be checked.
• SD1378 to SD1382: An error occurrence source can be checked.
For details on special registers, refer to the user's manual of each CPU module and device supporting iQSS used.

■Releasing the right to use

Set SD1360 to '0000H' in order to turn SM1360 ON. The right to use is released and the next data restoration is ready to be
performed.
SM1360 is turned OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1360 remains ON because no processing is
performed. In that case, turn OFF SM1360.

8 CC-Link
250 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data restoration
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

(1)
(1) Restoration target

• Target module type: CC-Link

• Execution unit: Station
• Folder number setting: 18
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.0
• Operation setting on error: Continue

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 251
 ■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Catego Device Label name Description
ry
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1364 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Request Restoration request
SM1365 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Normal_Completion Restoration normal completion
SM1366 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Error_Completion Restoration abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_No Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_Unit_S Backup/restoration target module, execution unit
etting setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Setting Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Module Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_1 Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_2 Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Number_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_No Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
rmal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully)
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_Er Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
ror_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed
with an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessing_Pe Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
r_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a device
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execution_ Backup/restoration error target module, execution
Unit_Information unit information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Number_Info Backup/restoration target folder number information
rmation
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Module Backup/restoration error information (target module)
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration error device information (target
1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration error device information (target
2 device 2)

8 CC-Link
252 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Catego Device Label name Description
ry
Label to Define global labels as follows:
be
defined

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.
8

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 253
 ■Sample program

8 CC-Link
254 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
[Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Executing data restoration and checking data link status]
Check that the data link status of other stations (SW0080 to SW0083) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data restoration request.
(9) Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(25) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(35) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(49) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data restoration operation setting (on error).
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(64) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(69) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the restoration error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(78) Clear the initialization trigger.
8
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(88) Set the restoration cancellation request.
[Releasing restoration right to use]
(93) Set the restoration right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating restoration right to use]
(102) Set the restoration right-to-use request.

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 255
 Example of a data restoration (bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL))
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

(1)

• Target module type: CC-Link

• Execution unit: Station
• Folder number setting: 18
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.0
• Operation setting on error: Continue

8 CC-Link
256 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Catego Device Label name Description
ry
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1364 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Request Restoration request
SM1365 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Normal_Completion Restoration normal completion
SM1366 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Error_Completion Restoration abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_No Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_Unit_S Backup/restoration target module, execution unit
etting setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Setting Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Module Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_1 Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_2 Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Number_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_No Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
rmal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully) 8
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_Er Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
ror_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed
with an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessing_Pe Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
r_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a device
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execution_ Backup/restoration error target module, execution
Unit_Information unit information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Number_Info Backup/restoration target folder number information
rmation
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Module Backup/restoration error information (target module)
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration error device information (target
1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration error device information (target
2 device 2)

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 257
 Catego Device Label name Description
ry
Label to Define global labels as follows:
be
defined

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

8 CC-Link
258 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program

8 CC-Link
8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 259
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Executing data restoration and checking data link status]
Check that the data link status of other stations (SW0080 to SW0083) indicates that a data link is in process before making a data restoration request.
(9) Set the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(25) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(35) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(49) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data restoration operation setting (on error).
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(64) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(69) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the restoration error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(78) Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(88) Set the restoration cancellation request.
[Releasing restoration right to use]
(93) Set the restoration right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating restoration right to use]
(102) Set the restoration right-to-use request.

8 CC-Link
260 8.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
9 CC-Link IE TSN
9
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for MELSEC iQ-R series or MELSEC
iQ-F series connected to CC-Link IE TSN.

System configuration

(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(5)

(6) (7)

Type Model name Manufacturer

(1) Engineering tool GX Works3 SWnDND-GXW3 ('n' indicates its version.) Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation
(2) CPU module RCPU R08CPU
(3) CC-Link IE TSN master/local module RJ71GN11-T2
(4) CC-Link IE TSN-AnyWireASLINK bridge module NZ2AW1GNAL
(5) ASLINKSENSOR Photoelectric sensor BS-H0117-1KP (Emitting) AnyWire Corporation
BS-H0117-1KC (Receiving)
(6) ASLINKAMP (Input) Fiber sensor LA-F1011 (Base)
LB-F1011 (Extension)
(7) ASLINKER (Input) B281SB-02U-CC20

For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link TSN, refer to the
following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

Considerations for a system configuration

■Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function
Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system configuration, and set
network parameters and other settings required for communication.

9 CC-Link IE TSN
261
 9.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A slave station connected to a CC-Link IE TSN master/local module can be detected and the information can be displayed in
the "CC-Link IE TSN Configuration" window.
CC-Link IE TSN refers to this function as 'connected/disconnected module detection.'
For the operation method and considerations for the connected/disconnected module detection, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN)

Detecting devices connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL)

To display devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL), on a system configuration
diagram, first a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL) needs to be detected in the "CC-Link IE TSN Configuration" window. Then,
perform an automatic detection of connected devices in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window in order to detect and
display devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL).
For the considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL),
refer to the following:
Page 264 Considerations when detecting devices connected to a bridge module
The following shows the operating procedure to open the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window and perform an automatic
detection of connected devices.

Operating procedure
1. Detect and display a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL) in the
"CC-Link IE TSN Configuration" window.

2. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL) on the network

configuration in the "CC-Link IE TSN Configuration" window,
then right-click it and select [Open System Configuration] 
[Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from the shortcut
menu.

9 CC-Link IE TSN
262 9.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
The "AnyWireASLINK Configuration Setting" screen appears.

3. Set the number of points of the bridge module

(NZ2AW1GNAL), and click the [Open] button. 9
For details on the point settings, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE TSN―AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's
Manual

The "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window appears.

4. Click the [Detect Now] button.

5. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
CC-Link IE TSN―AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's
Manual

The actual system configuration is displayed in the

"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

6. Select [Close with Enabling the Setting] in the

"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.
The setting of the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window is
enabled and the window is closed.

9 CC-Link IE TSN
9.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 263
 Considerations when detecting devices connected to a bridge module
■Settings in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration Setting" screen
Parameters set in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration Setting" screen are not written to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL).
To write the parameters to the bridge module, perform the parameter processing of a slave station.
For details on the parameters of a slave station, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE TSN―AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Automatic address detection

When the actual system configuration was changed, perform the automatic address detection before using an iQ Sensor
Solution function.
For details on the automatic address detection, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE TSN―AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Settings required for communication

To detect the devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL), configure the settings
required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE TSN―AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Settings in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window

After performing an automatic detection of connected devices, the settings of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to
a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL) are not saved until [Close with Reflecting the Setting] is selected in the "CC-Link IE TSN
Configuration" window.
Make sure to select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "CC-Link IE TSN Configuration" window after selecting [Close
with Enabling the Setting] in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

■Operation on error
A system configuration may not be detected if an error occurs on a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL).
If an error code is displayed, take corrective actions by referring to the manual for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL), then
perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

9 CC-Link IE TSN
264 9.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
9.2 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS 9
Parameters can be read from and written to a slave station.
For the operation method and considerations for the parameters of a slave station, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE TSN User's Manual (Application)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (CC-Link IE TSN)

Reading/writing parameters of devices supporting iQSS which

are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL)
Parameters of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL) can be read and written.

Operating procedure
1. Detect devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL) in the "AnyWireASLINK
Configuration" window. (Page 262 Detecting devices
connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL))

2. Read or write parameters of the detected devices. (Page

183 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS)

9 CC-Link IE TSN
9.2 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 265
 9.3 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
The connection statuses of devices supporting iQSS can be monitored.
Note that monitoring is not supported for devices supporting iQSS which are connected to CC-Link IE TSN.
It is supported only for devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL).

Monitoring devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a

bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL)
Operating procedure
1. Select [Diagnostics]  [CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field
Diagnostics] to start the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field
diagnostic.

2. Select a slave station in the "CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE

Field Diagnostics" screen, then right-click and select
[AnyWireASLINK Sensor/Device Monitor] from the shortcut
menu.

3. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
CC-Link IE TSN―AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's
Manual

The "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in

'List of modules' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device
Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
the "Monitoring Information" window.

9 CC-Link IE TSN
266 9.3 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
Considerations when monitoring devices connected to a bridge module
■Settings required for communication 9
To detect the devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL), configure the settings
required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE TSN―AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function

The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

■Time taken to display the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen

When displaying the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen, a bridge module reads information from a slave
module.
Therefore, it may take time to display the screen depending on the number of slave modules.

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL).
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL), then
perform the sensor/device monitor function again.

■Replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor

If replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor, perform an automatic detection of connected devices
in the monitor.

9 CC-Link IE TSN
9.3 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 267
 10 CC-Link IE Field Network
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for MELSEC iQ-R series connected to
CC-Link IE Field Network.

System configuration
This section explains the iQ Sensor Solution functions for CC-Link IE Field Network using the following system configuration.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Type Model name Manufacturer

(1) Engineering tool GX Works3 SWnDND-GXW3 ('n' indicates its version.) Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation
(2) CPU module RCPU R08CPU
(3) CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local module RJ71GF11-T2
(4) Basic digital output module Screw terminal block type NZ2GF2B1-16T
NZ2GF2B1-16TE

For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link IE Field Network, refer
to the following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

268
10.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A slave station connected to a CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local module can be detected and the information
can be displayed in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window.
For the creation method of a new project and the operation methods of the "CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration" window,
refer to the following:
10
GX Works3 Operating Manual

Operating procedure
Create a new project for CC-Link IE Field Network in an
engineering tool.

1. Select "Parameter"  "Module Information" in the

"Navigation" window, then right-click and select [Add New
Module] from the shortcut menu.

2. Select the following items from "Module Selection" in the "Add

New Module" screen.
• "Module Type": Network Module
• "Module Name": RJ71GF11-T2
• "Station Type": Master Station

3. Double-click "Parameter"  "Module Information"  "(new

module)" in the "Navigation" window, then double-click "Basic
Settings"  "Network Configuration Settings"  "Detailed
Setting."

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 269
 The "CC IE Field Configuration" window appears.

4. Click the [Detect Now] button.

The actual system configuration is displayed in the "CC IE Field

Configuration" window.

5. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "CC IE Field

Configuration" window.
Information such as parameters displayed in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window is applied to the network parameter.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

270 10.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS
The following shows the considerations when performing an automatic detection of connected devices for MELSEC iQ-R
series CC-Link IE Field Network.

■The actual system configuration is not connected/configured properly

An automatic detection of connected devices cannot be performed when the actual system configuration is not connected/ 10
configured properly (duplication of stations, etc.).
In that case, correct the actual system configuration and perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Information of slave stations is not detected correctly

Information may not be read correctly when performing an automatic detection of connected devices right after a slave station
is connected.
In that case, perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■An extension module is connected

An automatic detection of connected device is available for a basic module. If the function is performed for an extension
module, the total number of points of the basic module and the extension module is read and the setting of the extension
module will be empty.

■Settings required for communication

Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system configuration, and set
network parameters and other settings required for communication.
For details on the settings, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual
MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup)

■Operation on error
The system configuration cannot be detected if an error occurs on the master station.
Resolve the error cause, then perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■An error in settings

Error information is displayed in the "Output" window when an error occurred.
Double-click the information and correct the error at the jumped destination.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■Display of "General Module"

When "General Module" is displayed, it can be changed to "General CC IE Field Module" by the following operation:
Select a target module, and select [CC IE Field Configuration]  [Change Module]  [Change to General CC IE Field
Module].

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 271
 Detected devices to be displayed in the CC IE Field Configuration window
Modules detected after performing an automatic detection of connected devices are displayed differently depending on
whether a profile has been registered.

■A profile has been registered

• The module model names are displayed in "Model Name."
• "Local Station," "Intelligent Device Station," "Remote Device Station," or "Remote I/O Station" is displayed in the column of
"Station Type."
Note that a sub-master station of a CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local module or GOT1000/2000 series is
displayed as follows:
• For a sub-master station of a CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local module, the module model name is
displayed in the column of "Model Name" and "Local Station" is displayed in the column of "Station Type."
• For GOT1000/2000 series, "Gen. Intelligent Device Station" is displayed in the column of "Model Name" and "Intelligent
Device Station" is displayed in the column of "Station Type."

■A profile has not been registered

• The module model names, "General Local Station," "Gen. Intelligent Device Station," "General Remote Device Station," or
"General Remote I/O Station" is displayed in the column of "Model Name."
• "Local Station," "Sub-Master Station," "Intelligent Device Station," "Remote Device Station," or "Remote I/O Station" is
displayed in the column of "Station Type."

When using the master station whose firmware version is 02 or earlier, or using the versions of modules that
do not support an automatic detection of connected devices, the information will not be displayed properly in
the column of "Model Name" and "Station Type," even though a profile has been registered.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

272 10.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Detecting devices connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL)
To display devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), on a system configuration
diagram, first a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) needs to be detected in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window. Then,
perform an automatic detection of connected devices in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window in order to detect and
display devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL). 10
For the considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL),
refer to the following:
Page 275 Considerations when detecting devices connected to a bridge module

Operating procedure
1. Detect and display a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) in the
"CC IE Field Configuration" window.

2. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), then right-click it

and select [Open System Configuration]  [Open
AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from the shortcut menu.

The "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window appears.

3. Click the [Detect Now] button.

4. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module
User's Manual

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 273
 The actual system configuration is displayed in the
"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

5. Select [Close with Enabling the Setting] in the

"AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.
The setting of the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window is
enabled and the window is closed.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

274 10.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
Considerations when detecting devices connected to a bridge module
■Settings in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration Setting" screen
Parameters set in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration Setting" screen are not written to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
Set the number of transmission points of a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) using the number of transmission points setting
switch. 10
For details on the setting switch, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Automatic address detection

When the actual system configuration was changed, perform the automatic address detection before using an iQ Sensor
Solution function.
For details on the automatic address detection, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Settings required for communication

To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Settings in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window

After performing an automatic detection of connected devices, the settings of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to
a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) are not saved until [Close with Reflecting the Setting] is selected in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window.
Make sure to select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window after selecting [Close with
Enabling the Setting] in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.

■Operation on error
A system configuration may not be detected if an error occurs on a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
If an error code is displayed, take corrective actions by referring to the manual for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), then
perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 275
 10.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against
System Configuration
Devices supporting iQSS can be verified against a system configuration displayed in a configuration window.

Verifying devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a

bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) against a system configuration
Devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) can be verified against a system
configuration displayed in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.
The result is displayed in the "Verification Result of the Configuration with the Connected Module" window.
Verify a system configuration when it is manually created or edited.

Operating procedure
1. Verify devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), against a system
configuration in the "AnyWireASLINK Configuration" window.
(Page 181 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against
System Configuration)

Considerations
■Settings required for communication
To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

276 10.2 Verifying Devices Supporting iQSS Against System Configuration
10.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS
Parameters can be read from and written to a slave station.
10
• The data backup/restoration function is useful to read/write the parameters of multiple devices supporting
iQSS in a batch. (Page 288 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS)
• The useful function (linkage with dedicated tools) for devices supporting iQSS can also be used in the "CC
IE Field Configuration" window. (Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties))

Operating procedure
■Reading parameters
1. Select a device supporting iQSS in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window, then right-click and select [Online] 
[Parameter Processing of Slave Station] from the shortcut
menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen appears.

2. Select "Parameter read."

3. Click the [Execute Parameter Processing] button.

The selected parameter is read and the value is displayed in the
column of "Read Value."

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 277
 ■Writing parameters
1. Select a device supporting iQSS in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window, then right-click and select [Online] 
[Parameter Processing of Slave Station] from the shortcut
menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen appears.

2. Select "Parameter write."

3. Enter a value in the column of "Write Value."

4. Click the [Execute Parameter Processing] button.

The value entered in the column of "Write Value" is written to the
device supporting iQSS.

■Reading/writing parameters of the same slave station

The following shows the procedure for the system configuration that includes two of NZ2GF2B1-16TE as slave stations.
1. Select a device supporting iQSS in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window, then right-click and select [Online] 
[The Parameter Processing of Same Slave Station] from the
shortcut menu.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

278 10.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
The "The Parameter Processing of Same Slave Station" screen
appears.

2. Click the [Editing Parameter] button.

10

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen appears.

3. Set the parameter information, and click the [Close with
setting] button.

4. Select a target device.

Note that the devices with the same model name and the same
device version can be the target.

5. Click the [Execute] button.

The execution result is output by clicking the [Export Execution
Result] button.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 279
 ■Reading/writing parameters of multiple slave stations
1. Select a device supporting iQSS in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window, then right-click and select [Online] 
[The Parameter Processing of Multiple Slave Stations] from
the shortcut menu.

The "The Parameter Processing of Multiple Slave Stations" screen

appears.

2. Select the checkboxes of target modules the parameters of

which are read from or written to.

3. Select processing to be executed in the column of "Method

selection" for each target module.

4. Click the column of "Parameter Information" for a target

module the parameters of which are written to.

The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen appears.

5. Enter a value in the column of "Write Value."

6. Click the [OK] button.

7. Click the [Execute] button.

The execution result is output by clicking the [Export Execution
Result] button.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

280 10.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
"The Parameter Processing of Multiple Slave Stations" screen

10

Item Description
[Select All] button Click this to select all slave modules as target modules the parameters of which are
read from/written to.
[Cancel All Selections] button Click this to cancel all selections of slave modules as target modules the
parameters of which are read from/written to.
Batch Selection of Method [Parameter read] button Click this to set "Method selection" for the selected multiple slave modules to
Selection "Parameter read" in a batch.
[Parameter write] button Click this to set "Method selection" for the selected multiple slave modules to
"Parameter write" in a batch.
Method selection Select processing to be executed for the selected multiple slave modules.
• Parameter read: Parameters are read from the selected multiple slave modules in
a batch.
• Parameter write: Parameters are written to the selected multiple slave modules in
a batch.
Parameter Information The settings of a slave module can be checked in the "Parameter Processing of
Slave Station" screen opened by clicking the cell of the module.
[Import Parameter Information] button Click this to read contents of parameter processing created in a CSV file.
(A CSV file output in the "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen and this
screen is read.)
[Export Parameter Information] button Click this to output contents of parameter processing set for multiple slave modules
in this screen to a CSV file.
"Copy "Read Value" to "Write Value" when succeed to read parameter" Select this to set the read value from an actual module to the written value when
checkbox "Method selection" for the selected multiple slave modules is "Parameter read."
"Enable safety module when succeed to write parameter" checkbox Select this to enable a safety module when "Method selection" for the selected
multiple slave modules is "Parameter write."

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 281
 Option setting
The "Option Setting" screen will appear by selecting [Tool]  [Options] in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window.
In the option setting, parameter information can be saved in a project.
Parameter information is saved in a project by selecting the checkbox.

Conditions under which saved parameter information is cleared

Saved parameter information will be deleted under the following condition.
Read the parameters of a slave station by selecting [Parameter Processing of Slave Station]/[The Parameter Processing of
Same Slave Station]/[The Parameter Processing of Multiple Slave Stations] from the shortcut menu.
Item Operation Content
"CC IE Field Configuration" window Open the "CC IE Field Configuration" window. Parameter information will be skipped and not read when the
module with the station number that match with the saved
parameter information is not placed in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window.
In addition, parameter information which was skipped and
not read will be deleted from the storage file.
Close with the setting applied. Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file
when the target module is not included in the system
configuration.
Perform an automatic detection of connected devices. All parameter information will be deleted once.
Change the function version, and close the property Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file
screen. by closing the property screen after changing the function
version.
Unselect the checkbox in the option setting. Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file
by saving the setting after unselecting the checkbox.
"Parameter Processing of Slave Open the "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" Parameter information that does not match with the target
Station" screen screen. module will be skipped and not read.
In addition, after the [OK] button is clicked and the
"Parameter Processing of Slave Station" is closed, the
parameter information which was skipped and not read will
be deleted from the storage file.
Parameter application Apply parameters in MELSOFT Navigator. Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file
by applying the parameter in MELSOFT Navigator.
In addition, the checkbox in the option setting will be OFF
(unselected).
Deletion of a master station from the Delete the module parameter. Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file
system configuration by performing any of the following operations.
Performing an operation that clears the network
Page 283 Operations that delete the parameters of a
configuration setting.
slave station in GX Works3
Read data from a programmable controller. In addition, the checkbox in the option setting will be OFF
(unselected).

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

282 10.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
■Operations that delete the parameters of a slave station in GX Works3
Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file when performing any of the following operations in GX Works3.
Read the parameters of a slave station by selecting [Parameter Processing of Slave Station]/[The Parameter Processing of
Same Slave Station]/[The Parameter Processing of Multiple Slave Stations] from the shortcut menu.
Group Station type Location Operation
Operation that returns the Master station/sub- Module parameter Delete and apply a network configuration diagram 10
parameters of the network master station manually.
configuration diagram to the default
Change the parameter setting method from "Parameter
Editor" to "Program."
Change the station type, and set the parameter for which
the network configuration diagram is default or not existed.
Sub-master station Change the sub-master setting from "Operate with
Parameter of Host Station" to "Read Parameters of the
Master Station."
Operation that deletes a module Master station/sub- System parameter Import the system parameters. The parameters of a slave
master station station are not included from the source project.
Change the control CPU from the host CPU to another
CPU.
Module configuration Remove a module and determine the setting.
diagram
"Navigation" window Delete a module.
Operation that overwrites parameters Master station/sub- Data reading from a Read data of a module for which the network configuration
master station programmable controller is different and the start I/O is the same.
"Navigation" window Import the data of a simple motion module and the network
setting.

Considerations
■Operation after writing parameters
When parameters of a slave station are written, the slave station operates according to the parameters; therefore, note that
the slave station may change its operation.
For details on parameters, refer to the manual for a slave station used.

■A blank in "Write Value"

"Parameter write" cannot be executed if there is even one blank in "Write Value."

■Operation on error
If a module being used has an error, parameters of slave stations may not be read/written properly. Take corrective actions
and read/write parameters again.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 283
 Reading/writing parameters of devices supporting iQSS which
are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL)
Parameters of devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) can be read and written.

Operating procedure
1. Detect devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) in the "AnyWireASLINK
Configuration" window. (Page 273 Detecting devices
connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL))

2. Read or write parameters of the detected devices. (Page

183 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting
iQSS)

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

284 10.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
10.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
The connection statuses of devices supporting iQSS can be monitored.

Window
10
1. Select [Diagnostics]  [Sensor/Device Monitor] with an engineering tool.

2. Select a CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local module in the "Module Selection (Sensor/Device Monitor)"
screen, and click the [OK] button.

3. Read the message and click the [Yes] button.

The "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC IE Field" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC IE Field" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in the "Monitoring Information" window.

Considerations when monitoring devices supporting iQSS

■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function
The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave station correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a master station.
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the CC-Link system master/local module, then
perform the sensor/device monitor function again.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 285
 Monitoring devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL)
Operating procedure
1. Open the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC IE Field" screen.
(Page 285 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS)

2. Select a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL) in 'List of stations' or

'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device Monitor for CC IE
Field" screen, then right-click it and select [Open System
Configuration]  [Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration] from
the shortcut menu.

3. When an automatic address detection is required, select the

checkbox of "Execute Detect Now after Address Auto-
recognition," then click the [Yes] button.
For a case in which an automatic address detection is required,
refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module
User's Manual

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

286 10.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
 The "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen appears.

4. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in

'List of modules' or 'Device map area' in the "Sensor/Device
Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
the "Monitoring Information" window. 10

Considerations when monitoring devices connected to a bridge module

■Settings required for communication
To use an iQ Sensor Solution function in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL),
configure the settings required for communication (such as an address and device parameters) in advance.
Make sure that the address occupied by a device supporting iQSS is set so as not to exceed the number of transmission
points set for a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
For details on the address setting, refer to the following:
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK Bridge Module User's Manual

■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function

The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Slave Module"

■I/O type of general slave modules

"I/O Type" for "General Slave Module" is displayed as follows:
• Input or I/O combined slave module: "Input"
• Output slave module: "Output"

■Time taken to display the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen

When displaying the "Sensor/Device Monitor for AnyWireASLINK" screen, a bridge module reads information from a slave
module.
Therefore, it may take time to display the screen depending on the number of slave modules.

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL).
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), then
perform the sensor/device monitor function again.

■Replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor

If replacing a slave module while displaying the sensor/device monitor, perform an automatic detection of connected devices
in the monitor.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 287
 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting
iQSS
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up to/restored from an SD memory card by using special relays and
special registers.
This will make a data restoration or utilization simplified and the time taken to change the information of multiple devices
supporting iQSS, restore data when a failure occurred in a device supporting iQSS, and to perform a changeover will also be
shortened.
This section explains data the backup and data restoration methods for a MELSEC iQ-R series CC-Link IE Field Network.

SD memory card

$MELPRJ$

Backup

CC_IE_Field

20160101_00 (1) STATION0001

0001_0001 Data

(2)
STATION0002
(1)

0001_0002 Data

(2)

(1) Data backup

(2) Data restoration

Function Reference
Data backup Page 293 Data backup
Page 294 Program execution for data backup
Data restoration Page 308 Data restoration
Page 309 Program execution for data restoration

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

288 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Backup folder/file
New backup folders are created in the 'CC_IE_Field' folder which exists in the 'Backup' folder under the main folder of
'$MELPRJ$' in an SD memory card when data is backed up.
If no '$MELPRJ$' folder, 'Backup' folder, or 'CC_IE_Field' folder exists, each of the folders are created as well when data is
backed up.
10
Up to 100 backup folders (date_number) can be created in the 'CC_IE_Field' folder.

■Backup folder configuration

The following figure shows the backup folder configuration in an SD memory card.

/ (1) (2) (3)

(4)

$MELPRJ$ Backup CC_IE_Field 20160101_00 0001_0001 STATION0001.QBR

$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI

20160101_01 0001_0001 STATION0001.QBR

$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI (5)

0001_0064 SUBID0001.QBR

SUBID0002.QBR

20160102_02
SUBID0033.QBR

$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI

AnyWireASLINK

(1) A folder to save the settings of devices supporting iQSS connected to CC-Link IE Field Network
(2) Backup folder (date_number)
(3) Backup folder (start I/O number_station number)
(4) Backup data (information of each station)
(5) Backup data (information of each station sub-ID number)

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 289
 ■Backup folder name
• Date_Number
YYYYMMDD_**
YYYY: Year when the data was backed up (four digits in decimal)
MM: Month when the data was backed up (two digits in decimal)
DD: Day when the data was backed up (two digits in decimal)
**: Number (two digits in decimal (00 to 99))*1

*1 If multiple folders with the same number exist while a target folder (0 to 99) is set to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration
folder number setting), the date of the backup folder name may not be updated. (Setting a number for a data backup folder name)
• Start I/O number_Station number
****_****
First ****: Start I/O number (four digits in hexadecimal) (A value obtained by dividing the start I/O number by 16)
Last ****: Station number (four digits in decimal)

■Backup file name

• Station number
STATION****.QBR
****: Station number (four digits in decimal)

• Station sub-ID number

SUBID****.QBR
****: Station sub-ID number (four digits in decimal)

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

290 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Considerations for data backup/restoration
■Stations to which data cannot be backed up and restored
• Local station
• Sub-master station that is monitoring the master station (performing the sub-master operation)
• Station whose data link has stopped due to a station number duplication error 10
• Station whose data link has stopped due to a station number out of range error
• Station whose network number is mismatched

■Use of an SD memory card

• During a data backup or restoration, do not perform the following actions: turning OFF the power, resetting a module, and
inserting or removing an SD memory card. Otherwise, for the data backup, data that was backed up until the data backup
processing was interrupted retains in the SD memory card. As for the data restoration, data that was restored until the data
restoration was interrupted retains in the device supporting iQSS.
• If the memory size or the number of files exceeds the maximum storage capacity of an SD memory card during the data
backup, only the data that has been properly backed up will be stored in the SD memory card.

■Concurrent use of other functions

While any of the following operations or functions are being performed, backup/restoration cannot be performed.
Additionally, the following operations and functions cannot be performed during data backup/restoration.
Operation/function name
Operation with an engineering tool Initializing the CPU built-in memory/SD memory card
Clearing values (file register)
Writing data to a programmable controller (including online change of files)
Deleting data in the programmable controller
User data operation Writing user data
Deleting user data
Creating a folder
Deleting a folder
Changing a folder name
Online change (ladder block)
Event history function (clearing event history)
File password function
Predefined protocol support function (writing protocol setting data)
Memory dump function (registering/clearing memory dump)
Switching the safety operation mode
User authentication function (changing a password of a programmable controller, writing user information to a
programmable controller, initializing all information of a programmable controller)
Operations with CPU Module Logging Data logging function (writing/deleting a logging setting file, registering/clearing a logging setting)
Configuration Tool
Deleting logging file(s)
Others • SLMP Creating a new file (New File)
• MC protocol
Writing data to a file (Write File)
Deleting a file (Delete File)
Copying a file (Copy File)
Changing a file attribute (Change File State)
Changing file creation date (Change File Date)
File transfer from an Ethernet-equipped Writing a file (put, mput, pm-write)
module (FTP server)
Deleting a file (delete, mdelete)
Changing a file name (rename)
Changing a file attribute (change)
File transfer function (FTP server) of the built-in Ethernet function
File transfer function (FTP client) of the built-in Ethernet function
CPU module data backup/restoration function

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 291
 When data is backed up or restored during a data logging or the realtime monitor function, the performance of the data
logging or the data sampling for the realtime monitor will be reduced.
Therefore, sampled data may be partially missed and the data missing frequency may be increased.

■Communication timeout time

To back up or restore the data of a slave station connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), set the communication
timeout time as follows:
• 128 or less slave stations: 60 seconds (recommended)
• 129 or more slave stations: more than 80 seconds
The communication timeout time can be set by using SD1368. An setting example is shown below.

■Communication load
When data is backed up or restored, the load of the service processing in the CPU module is temporarily increased.
Consequently, a communication response will be slow and a timeout error may occur in other communications.
To avoid a timeout error, review the value set for "Device/Label Access Service Processing Setting."
[CPU Parameter]  [Service Processing Setting]  [Device/Label Access Service Processing Setting]

■Data backup/restoration for CC-Link IE Field Network master station

• Data backup in station sub-ID unit: When a folder storing backup data of a station (the I/O numbers and station numbers
are the same) is specified and the data is backed up again, use a module of the same model as that of the CC-Link IE Field
Network master station which has been used for data backup.
• Data restoration: Use a module of the same model as that of the CC-Link IE Field Network master station which has been
used for data backup.

■Multiple CC-Link IE Field Network master stations are mounted on a single base unit
Do not perform data backup/restoration when multiple CC-Link IE Field Network master stations having an identical network
number are mounted on a base unit. Data cannot be backed up/restored properly.

■Change of backup folders/data

Do not change a backup folder name, configuration, or saved file.
Otherwise, the data may not be restored properly.
For the backup file capacity, refer to the following:
Page 407 Backup File Capacity

■Request source of data backup/restoration

Data backup/restoration can be performed when the request source is a CC-Link IE Field Network master station.

■When backing up the data of a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module
(NZ2AW1GFAL):
Backup data is stored in the 'CC_IE_Field' backup folder.
The 'station sub-ID number' is equivalent to the 'ID' of a slave module connected to AnyWireASLINK.
The backup file of the bridge module is not created.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

292 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be saved in an SD memory card for each station by using an engineering tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the "CC IE Field 10
Configuration" window, then right-click it and select [Online]
 [Backup Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.

2. Read the message and click the [Yes] button.

Data is backed up.

Considerations for a data backup

■Setting the backup setting
The initial values of the backup setting (SD1363 and SD1367) are as follows:
• SD1363 (folder number setting): FFFFH (automatic specification)
• Lower 8 bits of SD1367 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when backing up data with the settings other than the one above. (Page 294 Program execution for data
backup)

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 293
 Program execution for data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up in an SD memory card.
New folders are created every time when data is backed up, and data of each device supporting iQSS is saved in a file format
in the folders. A system file ($BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI) that contains information required for data restoration is created for each
station when data is backed up.
Data backup and restoration can be performed regardless of the operating status of a CPU module.
The following shows the procedure to back up data with a program.
Procedu Item Reference
re
1 Acquire a right to use. Page 294 Acquiring a right to use
2 Set the backup target setting and the operation setting. Page 295 Setting the backup setting
3 Perform a data backup. Page 297 Performing a data backup
4 Release the right to use. Page 297 Releasing the right to use

Results of the data backup and restoration functions can be checked in the event history of an engineering
tool. (Page 405 Event List)

Execution method of data backup

Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data backup.

■Acquiring a right to use

To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time by other request sources,
acquiring a right to use of them is required.
A right to use can be acquired when other request sources do not have the right to use them (when SD1361 is '0000H').

1. Setting a right-to-use request number

Set a request number (a value that has not been used by multiple request sources within the range of '1000H' to '1FFFH') to
SD1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request number).

2. Requesting a right to use

Turn ON SM1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request) to acquire a right to use for data backup.
SM1360 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is acquired.

3. Checking the acquisition of the right to use

Check that the value of SD1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number) is the same as the
value set to SD1360. If backup/restoration is performed without checking the acquisition of the right to use, the normal
operation is not guaranteed.

Precautions
The values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration are cleared when a
right to use is acquired. (However, SD1375 is set to 'FFFFH'.)
Save the values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) as required.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

294 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Setting the backup setting
1. Setting a target module type
Set a target module with the lower 8 bits of SD1362 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration target module, execution unit
setting).
Target module type Description
4H: CC-Link IE Field Network Set this to specify a device supporting iQSS which is connected to the CC-Link IE Field Network master station.
10
2. Setting an execution unit
Set a unit to specify the range of data to be backed up at once.
Specify the execution unit to the upper 8 bits of SD1362.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify the device supporting iQSS which is connected to the own network among the devices which
are connected to a CC-Link IE Field Network master station with the specified start I/O number.
2H: Station unit Set this to specify either of the following iQSS supported devices which are connected to a CC-Link IE Field
Network master station with the specified start I/O number: the devices supporting iQSS with the specified station
number or all devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the specified station number.
3H: Station sub-ID unit Set this to specify the following devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a CC-Link IE Field Network
master station with the specified start I/O number: the devices which are connected to the specified station
number with the specified station sub-ID number.

3. Setting a number for a data backup folder name

Set a folder number to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration folder number setting).
Target folder Description
FFFFH: Automatic specification (default) Among the numbers (0 to 99) that are not used for backup folder names, the smallest number is used for a new
backup folder name.
An error occurs when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached
the upper limit.
FFFEH: Automatic specification (folder Among the numbers (0 to 99) that are not used for backup folder names, the smallest number is used for a new
deletion supported) backup folder name.
The oldest backup folder (date_number) is deleted and the number of the deleted folder is used for a new backup
folder name when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the
upper limit.
0 to 99: Target folder specification Specify a number (0 to 99) of the backup folder name.
When another folder with the same number exists, the target data is overwritten in execution unit without
changing the folder name.*1

*1 When the specified folder number exists, the operation to be performed depends on the specification of the execution unit as follows:

Execution unit Operation

1H: Module unit When the backup data with the same target module exists, the backup folder (start I/O number_station number)
is deleted before performing data backup.
2H: Station unit When the backup data with the same target module and the same target station number exists, data backup is
performed after the backup folder (start I/O number_station number) is deleted.
3H: Station sub-ID unit When the backup data with the same target module and the same target station number exists, the information of
the backed up station sub-ID is added to the system file for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration.
When the backup data with the same target module, the same target station number, and the same target station
sub-ID number exists, the backup data (information of each station sub-ID) is deleted before performing data
backup.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 295
 4. Setting a target device
• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set a start I/O number to SD1364 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/
restoration target setting (target module)).
In a multiple CPU system, only the CC-Link IE Field Network master station controlled by a host CPU can be backed up. Data
backup cannot be performed for non-controlled modules.
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number Set the start I/O number (the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number by 16) of the CC-Link IE Field
Network master station which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS.

• Setting a station number

When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set a station number to SD1365 (iQ Sensor
Solution data backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)).
Target device (Station number) Description
1 to 120: Station number Set the station number of a target device supporting iQSS or the station number of the module which is
connected to a device supporting iQSS.

• Setting a station sub-ID number

When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set a station sub-ID number to SD1366 (iQ Sensor Solution
backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)).
Target device (Station sub-ID Description
number)
0 to 9999: Station sub-ID number Set the station sub-ID number of a target device supporting iQSS.

Precautions
When backup/restore the data in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), set the ID
number of AnyWireASLINK to SD1366.
For details on the ID number (SD1366) of AnyWireASLINK, refer to the following:
Page 194 Setting the backup setting

5. Setting the operation setting when a data backup error occurs

Set the operation to be performed when the data backup fails on some devices while being processed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS to the lower 8 bits of SD1367 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration operation setting).
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data backup even if it fails on some devices.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data backup if it fails on some devices.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

296 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Performing a data backup
Turn ON SM1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup request) to request a data backup.
Data is backed up after a data backup request.
SM1361 is turned OFF when a data backup is completed.

1. Checking the execution status of a data backup

The execution status of a data backup can be checked with the following special registers. 10
Special register Description
SD1371 This register stores the number of target devices for each execution unit when starting a data backup or
restoration.
SD1372 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has normally be completed for each execution
unit. (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed normally.)
SD1373 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has abnormally be completed for each
execution unit.*1 (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed abnormally.)
SD1374 This register stores the progress of processing being executed for a device in percent, from 0 to 100.

*1 For an iQ Sensor Solution related error (error code: 4805H), the number of devices in which the processing has been abnormally
completed is not counted.
2. Canceling a data backup
Turn ON SM1367 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration cancellation request) to cancel a data backup.
A cancellation is performed for each device supporting iQSS, so it will be canceled when a data backup which is being
performed to a device supporting iQSS at the time a cancellation request is made is completed.

3. Checking the completion of a data backup

When the data backup is completed, the backup completion status can be checked with the following special relays.
• Normally completed: SM1362 (iQ Sensor Solution backup normal completion) is turned ON.
• Abnormally completed: SM1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup abnormal completion) is turned ON.
The number of the folder where backup data was saved at the completion of data backup is stored to SD1375 (iQ Sensor
Solution backup folder number).
Backup folder number Description
0 to 99: Folder number The number (0 to 99) of the folder in which backup data was saved is stored.
FFFFH: Backup data not saved Backup data has not been saved.

4. Checking a data backup error

Even if a data backup of a target device supporting iQSS is completed with an error, a diagnostic error will not be detected.
Check the errors with the following special registers.
• SD1376 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module): The error code of an error occurred in a module
such as a CPU module or CC-Link IE Field Network master station can be checked.
• SD1377 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a device): The error code of an error occurred in a device
supporting iQSS can be checked.
• SD1378 to SD1382: An error occurrence source can be checked.
For details on special registers, refer to the user's manual of each CPU module and device supporting iQSS used.

■Releasing the right to use

Set SD1360 to '0000H' in order to turn SM1360 ON . The right to use is released and the next data backup is ready to be
performed.
SM1360 is turned OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1360 remains ON because no processing is
performed. In that case, turn OFF SM1360.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 297
 Example of a data backup
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

(1)

(1) Backup target

• Target module type: CC-Link IE Field Network

• Execution unit: Module
• Folder number setting: Automatic specification
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.0
• Target device (station number): 1
• Operation setting on error: Continue

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

298 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Catego Device Label name Description 10
ry
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1361 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Request Backup request
SM1362 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Normal_Completion Backup normal completion
SM1363 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Error_Completion Backup abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_No Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_Unit Backup/restoration target module, execution unit
_Setting setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Setting Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Module Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
1
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
2
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Numb Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
er_of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
Normal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully)
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
Error_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed
with an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessing_ Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
Per_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a device
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execution Backup/restoration error target module, execution unit
_Unit_Information information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Number_I Backup/restoration target folder number information
nformation
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Modu Backup/restoration error information (target module)
le
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Devic Backup/restoration error device information (target
e_1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Devic Backup/restoration error device information (target
e_2 device 2)

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 299
 Catego Device Label name Description
ry
Label to Define global labels as follows:
be
defined

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

300 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program

10

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 301
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(9) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(22) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(36) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data backup operation setting (on error).
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(51) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(56) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the backup error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(65) Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(75) Set the backup cancellation request.
[Releasing backup right to use]
(80) Set the backup right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating backup right to use]
(89) Set the backup right-to-use request.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

302 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data backup (bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL))
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

10

24V
0V
DP
DN
LG

(1)

(1) Backup target

• Target module type: CC-Link IE Field Network

• Execution unit: Station
• Folder number setting: Automatic specification
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.0
• Target device (station number): 1
• Operation setting on error: Continue

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 303
 ■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Catego Device Label name Content
ry
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1361 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Request Backup request
SM1362 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Normal_Completion Backup normal completion
SM1363 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Error_Completion Backup abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_No Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_Unit Backup/restoration target module, execution unit
_Setting setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Setting Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Module Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
1
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
2
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Numb Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
er_of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
Normal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully)
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
Error_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed
with an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessing_ Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
Per_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a device
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execution Backup/restoration error target module, execution unit
_Unit_Information information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Number_I Backup/restoration target folder number information
nformation
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Modu Backup/restoration error information (target module)
le
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Devic Backup/restoration error device information (target
e_1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Devic Backup/restoration error device information (target
e_2 device 2)

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

304 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Catego Device Label name Content
ry
Label to Define global labels as follows:
be
defined

10

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 305
 ■Sample program

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

306 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
[Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(9) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
10
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(30) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(44) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data backup operation setting (on error).
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(59) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(64) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the backup error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(73) Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(83) Set the backup cancellation request.
[Releasing backup right to use]
(88) Set the backup right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating backup right to use]
(97) Set the backup right-to-use request.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 307
 Data restoration
Information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS for each station by using an
engineering tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window, then right-click it and select [Online]
 [Restore Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.

2. Select backup data to be restored, and click the [Execute]

button.

A list of the backup folder names (date_number) is

displayed in the column of "Folder Name."
Backup data is stored in backup folders for each
folder name (Start I/O number_Station number) in
an SD memory card.
For details on the backup folder configuration,
refer to the following:
Page 289 Backup folder configuration

3. Read the message and click the [OK] button.

Data is restored.

Considerations for data restoration

■Setting the restoration setting
The initial value of the restoration setting (SD1367) is as follows:
• Lower 8 bits of SD1367 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when restoring data with the settings other than above. (Page 309 Program execution for data restoration)

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

308 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Program execution for data restoration
Information in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS.
Select a backup folder to be restored. In the data restoration, information such as a model name or device version in the
system file ($BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI) created with backup is compared with that of the CC-Link IE Field Network master station
or a device supporting iQSS. If the information is mismatched, a restoration error will occur.
10
Data backup and restoration can be performed regardless of the operating status of a CPU module.
The following shows the procedure to restore data with a program.
Procedu Item Reference
re
1 Acquire a right to use. Page 309 Acquiring a right to use
2 Set the restoration target setting and the operation setting. Page 295 Setting the backup setting
3 Perform a data restoration. Page 311 Performing a data restoration
4 Release the right to use. Page 311 Releasing the right to use

Results of the data backup and restoration functions can be checked in the event history of an engineering
tool. (Page 405 Event List)

Execution method of data restoration

Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data restoration.

■Acquiring a right to use

To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time by other request sources,
acquiring a right to use of them is required.
A right to use can be acquired when other request sources do not have the right to use them (when SD1361 is '0000H').

1. Setting a right-to-use request number

Set a request number (a value that has not been used by multiple request sources within the range of '1000H' to '1FFFH') to
SD1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request number).

2. Requesting a right to use

Turn ON SM1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request) to acquire a right to use for data
restoration. SM1360 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is acquired.

3. Checking the acquisition of the right to use

Check that the value of SD1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number) is the same as the
value set to SD1360. If backup/restoration is performed without checking the acquisition of the right to use, the normal
operation is not guaranteed.

Precautions
The values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration are cleared when a
right to use is acquired. (However, SD1375 is set to 'FFFFH'.)
Save the values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) as required.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 309
 ■Setting the restoration setting
1. Setting a target module type
Set a target module with the lower 8 bits of SD1362 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration target module, execution unit
setting).
Target module type Description
4H: CC-Link IE Field Network Set this to specify a device supporting iQSS which is connected to the CC-Link IE Field Network master station.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set a unit to specify the range of data to be restored at once.
Specify the execution unit to the upper 8 bits of SD1362.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to specify the device supporting iQSS which is connected to the own network among the devices which
are connected to a CC-Link IE Field Network master station with the specified start I/O number.
2H: Station unit Set this to specify either of the following iQSS supported devices which are connected to a CC-Link IE Field
Network master station with the specified start I/O number: the devices supporting iQSS with the specified station
number or all the devices supporting iQSS which are connected to the specified station number.
3H: Station sub-ID unit Set this to specify the following devices supporting iQSS which are connected to a CC-Link IE Field Network
master station with the specified start I/O number: the devices which are connected to the specified station
number with the specified station sub-ID number.

3. Selecting a folder for data restoration

Set a folder number to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration folder number setting).
Target folder Description
0 to 99: Target folder specification Specify a number (0 to 99) of the backup folder name to be restored.

4. Setting a target device

• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set a start I/O number to SD1364 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/
restoration target setting (target module)).
In a multiple CPU system, only the CC-Link IE Field Network master station controlled by a host CPU can be restored. Data
restoration cannot be performed for non-controlled modules.
Target device (Module) Description
0 to FFH: Start I/O number Set the start I/O number (the value obtained by dividing the start I/O number by 16) of the CC-Link IE Field
Network master station which is connected to a target device supporting iQSS.

• Setting a station number

When '2H' (station unit) or '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set a station number to SD1365 (iQ Sensor
Solution data backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)).
Target device (Station number) Description
1 to 120: Station number Set the station number of a target device supporting iQSS or the station number of the module which is
connected to a device supporting iQSS.

• Setting a station sub-ID number

When '3H' (station sub-ID unit) is set for the execution unit, set a station sub-ID number to SD1366 (iQ Sensor Solution
backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)).
Target device (Station sub-ID Description
number)
0 to 9999: Station sub-ID number Set the station sub-ID number of a target device supporting iQSS.

Precautions
When backup/restore the data in a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL), set the ID
number of AnyWireASLINK to SD1366.
For details on the ID number (SD1440) of AnyWireASLINK, refer to the following:
Page 203 Setting the restoration setting

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

310 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
5. Setting the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs
Set the operation to be performed when the data restoration fails on some devices while being processed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS to the lower 8 bits of SD1367 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration operation setting).
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data restoration even if it fails on some devices.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data restoration if it fails on some devices. 10
■Performing a data restoration
Turn ON SM1364 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration request) to request a data restoration.
Data is restored after a data restoration request.
SM1364 is turned OFF when a data restoration is completed.

1. Checking the execution status of a data restoration

The execution status of a data restoration can be checked with the following special register areas.
Special register Description
SD1371 This register stores the number of target devices for each execution unit when starting a data backup or
restoration.
SD1372 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has normally be completed for each execution
unit. (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed normally.)
SD1373 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has abnormally be completed for each
execution unit.*1 (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed abnormally.)
SD1374 This register stores the progress of processing being executed for a device in percent, from 0 to 100.

*1 For an iQ Sensor Solution related error (error code: 4805H), the number of devices in which the processing has been abnormally
completed is not counted.
2. Canceling a data restoration
Turn ON SM1367 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration cancellation request) to cancel a data restoration.
A cancellation is performed for each device supporting iQSS, so it will be canceled when a data restoration which is being
performed to a device supporting iQSS at the time a cancellation request is made is completed.

3. Checking the completion of a data restoration

When a data restoration is completed, the restoration completion status can be checked with the following special relays.
• Normally completed: SM1365 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration normal completion) is turned ON.
• Abnormally completed: SM1366 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration abnormal completion) is turned ON.

4. Checking a data restoration error

Even if a data restoration to a target device supporting iQSS is completed with an error, a diagnostic error will not be detected.
Check the errors with the following special registers.
• SD1376 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module): The error code of an error occurred in a module
such as a CPU module or CC-Link IE Field Network master station can be checked.
• SD1377 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a device): The error code of an error occurred in a device
supporting iQSS can be checked.
• SD1378 to SD1382: An error occurrence source can be checked.
For details on special registers, refer to the user's manual of each CPU module and device supporting iQSS used.

■Releasing the right to use

Set SD1360 to '0000H' in order to turn SM1360 ON. The right to use is released and the next data restoration is ready to be
performed.
SM1360 is turned OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1360 remains ON because no processing is
performed. In that case, turn OFF SM1360.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 311
 Example of a data restoration
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

(1)

(1) Restoration target

• Target module type: CC-Link IE Field Network

• Execution unit: Module
• Folder number setting: 0
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.0
• Target device (station number): Station No. 1
• Operation setting on error: Continue

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

312 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Catego Device Label name Description 10
ry
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1364 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Request Restoration request
SM1365 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Normal_Completion Restoration normal completion
SM1366 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Error_Completion Restoration abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_No Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_Unit Backup/restoration target module, execution unit
_Setting setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Setting Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Module Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
1
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Device_ Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
2
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Numb Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
er_of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
Normal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully)
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber_of_ Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
Error_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed
with an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessing_ Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
Per_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a device
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execution Backup/restoration error target module, execution unit
_Unit_Information information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Number_I Backup/restoration target folder number information
nformation
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Modu Backup/restoration error information (target module)
le
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Devic Backup/restoration error device information (target
e_1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_Devic Backup/restoration error device information (target
e_2 device 2)

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 313
 Catego Device Label name Description
ry
Label to Define global labels as follows:
be
defined

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

314 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program

10

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 315
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(9) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(22) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(36) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data restoration operation setting (on error).
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(51) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(56) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the restoration error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(65) Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(75) Set the restoration cancellation request.
[Releasing restoration right to use]
(80) Set the restoration right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating restoration right to use]
(89) Set the restoration right-to-use request.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

316 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data restoration (bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL))
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

10

24V
0V
DP
DN
LG

(1)

(1) Restoration target

• Target module type: CC-Link IE Field Network

• Execution unit: Module
• Folder number setting: 0
• Target device (target module): Start I/O No.0
• Target device (station number): Station No. 1
• Operation setting on error: Continue

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 317
 ■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Categor Device Label name Content
y
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1364 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Request Restoration request
SM1365 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Normal_Completion Restoration normal completion
SM1366 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Error_Completion Restoration abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_ Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
No
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_ Backup/restoration target module, execution unit setting
Unit_Setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Sett Backup/restoration folder number setting
ing
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Mod Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
ule
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Devi Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
ce_1
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Devi Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
ce_2
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Nu Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
mber_of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
_of_Normal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully)
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
_of_Error_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed with
an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessi Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
ng_Per_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Caus Backup/restoration error cause in a device
e
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execu Backup/restoration error target module, execution unit
tion_Unit_Information information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Numbe Backup/restoration target folder number information
r_Information
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_M Backup/restoration error information (target module)
odule
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_D Backup/restoration error device information (target
evice_1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_D Backup/restoration error device information (target
evice_2 device 2)

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

318 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Categor Device Label name Content
y
Label to be Define global labels as follows:
defined

10

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 319
 ■Sample program

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

320 10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
[Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(20) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
10
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(30) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(44) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data restoration operation setting (on error).
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(59) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(64) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the restoration error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(73) Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(83) Set the restoration cancellation request.
[Releasing restoration right to use]
(88) Set the restoration right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating restoration right to use]
(97) Set the restoration right-to-use request.

10 CC-Link IE Field Network

10.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 321
 11 Ethernet
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for MELSEC iQ-R series, MELSEC iQ-
L series*1, or MELSEC iQ-F series connected to Ethernet.
*1 The MELSEC iQ-L series system is configured with an LHCPU and MELSEC-L series modules.

System configuration
This section explains the iQ Sensor Solution functions for Ethernet using the following system configuration.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Type Model name Manufacturer

(1) Engineering tool GX Works3 SWnDND-GXW3 ('n' indicates its version.) Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation
(2) CPU module RCPU R08CPU
(3) Graphic operation terminal GOT2000 series*1 GT27-VGA
Screen design software for GT Works3 SW1DND-GTWK3
graphic operation terminal
(4) Device supporting iQSS Laser displacement sensor HL-C2 Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
(5) COGNEX Vision System In-Sight EZ-700 Cognex Corporation

*1 Only the automatic detection function of connected devices supports GOT.

For the information to obtain profiles, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for Ethernet, refer to the following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

Considerations for a system configuration

■Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function
Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system configuration, and set
PLC parameters and other settings required for communication with a device supporting iQSS.
A device supporting iQSS, which is connected to the tip of a router, does not support.
For details on the settings, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual
MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup)

■Simultaneous execution of iQ Sensor Solution functions

An error is returned to the request source when multiple iQ Sensor Solution functions are performed at the same time on an
Ethernet network.
The following iQ Sensor Solution functions via a built-in Ethernet port cannot be performed at the same time.
• Automatic detection of connected devices
• Reflection of the communication setting
• Sensor/device monitor
• Sensor parameter read/write
• Data backup/restoration

11 Ethernet
322
11.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A device supporting iQSS connected to an Ethernet-equipped module can be detected and the information can be displayed
in the "Ethernet Configuration" window.
For the creation method of a new project and the operation methods of the "Ethernet Configuration" window, refer to the
following:
GX Works3 Operating Manual

Operating procedure 11
Create a new project for Ethernet in an engineering tool.

1. Select "Parameter"  "(CPU model name of the project),"

and double-click "Module Parameter" in the "Navigation"
window, select "Basic Settings"  "External Device
Configuration," then double-click "Detailed Setting."

The "Ethernet Configuration" window appears.

2. Click the [Detect Now] button.

11 Ethernet
11.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 323
 The actual system configuration is displayed in the "Ethernet
Configuration" window.

3. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "Ethernet

Configuration" window.
The setting in the "Ethernet Configuration" window is applied to the
network parameter and completed.

■All connected devices supporting iQSS are not detected

If all devices supporting iQSS are not detected, remove the following error factors and perform an automatic detection of
connected devices again.
• The Ethernet line is overloaded due to another function of a CPU module being performed.
• The communication cannot be established due to a reason such as a disconnection of an Ethernet cable.
• An error occurred in the following functions:
• Simple PLC communication function
• Socket communication function
• Time setting function (SNTP client)
• Data logging file transfer function
• File transfer function (FTP client)
• Predefined protocol support function
• SP.READ instruction, SP.WRITE instruction
Available functions differ depending on the CPU module used. For details, refer to the user's manual of a CPU module used.

Considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS

■Number of devices supporting iQSS displayed in the "Ethernet Configuration" window
Up to 16 devices supporting iQSS can be displayed in the "Ethernet Configuration" window (in ascending order of MAC
address) by performing an automatic detection of connected devices.

■Operation on error
The system configuration cannot be detected if an error occurs on a CPU module or device supporting iQSS.
Take corrective actions and perform the automatic detection function of connected devices again.
Error information is displayed in the "Output" window when an error occurred.
Double-click the information and correct the error at the jumped destination.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave module correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"

11 Ethernet
324 11.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
11.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device
Supporting iQSS
The communication setting set in the "Ethernet Configuration" window can be applied to a device supporting iQSS.
Perform this function after adding, deleting or changing the setting of a device supporting iQSS.

Operating procedure
1. Enter the communication setting. 11
2. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the "Ethernet
Configuration" window, then right-click and select [Online] 
[Communication Setting Reflection of Ethernet Device] from
the shortcut menu.
The communication setting is applied to the target device
supporting iQSS.

11 Ethernet
11.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting iQSS 325
 Considerations when applying the communication setting to a device supporting iQSS
■Specifying a port number
• Do not specify '45237' for a port number in other devices on the same Ethernet network.
It may cause an error in other devices on the same Ethernet network.
• Do not specify the number from '61440' to '65534' for the own station port number.
The connection establishment instruction (SP.SOCOPEN) of the socket communication function may be completed
abnormally.
• Do not specify the IP address of a device supporting iQSS for the IP address of an external device, nor the number from
'61440' to '65534' for the destination port number.
The connection establishment instruction (SP.SOCOPEN) of the socket communication function may be completed
abnormally when performing a sensor/device monitor or a sensor parameter read/write.

■Changing the communication setting in the "Ethernet Configuration" window

When the communication setting written to a CPU module in the "Ethernet Configuration" window does not match with that of
a device supporting iQSS, the communication cannot be established normally.
When the communication setting is changed in the "Ethernet Configuration" window, perform a reflection of communication
setting to Ethernet devices in order to match the communication setting between a CPU module and a device supporting
iQSS.

■Selecting devices supporting iQSS in the "Module List" window

A reflection of communication setting to Ethernet devices cannot be performed to a device supporting iQSS, which is selected
in the "Module List" window and dragged and dropped onto the 'List of devices' or 'Device map area'.
Perform an automatic detection of connected devices in order to detect the communication setting, then perform a reflection
of communication setting to Ethernet devices.

■Changing the IP address of an Ethernet-equipped module

After changing the IP address of an Ethernet-equipped module, open the "Ethernet Configuration" window and edit the
changed IP address to match with the IP address of the programmable controller in the "Ethernet Configuration" window.
Perform a reflection of communication setting to Ethernet devices in order to match the communication setting of a device
supporting iQSS.

■Host name not supported by a device supporting iQSS

When using a device supporting iQSS that does not support the host name, even if the reflection function of the
communication setting is performed with a host name entered, it will not be applied to the device.
After performing the automatic detection function of connected devices, the "Host Name" field will be blank.
For the applicability of the host name of a device supporting iQSS, refer to the manuals of each device supporting iQSS.

■Applying the communication setting of Ethernet devices

The target device supporting iQSS must be restarted after performing a reflection of communication setting to Ethernet
devices.
For the operating status of a device supporting iQSS, refer to the manuals of each device supporting iQSS.

11 Ethernet
326 11.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting iQSS
11.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS
Sensor parameters can be read from and written to a device supporting iQSS.

• The data backup/restoration function is useful to read/write the parameters of multiple devices supporting
iQSS in a batch. (Page 330 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS)
• The useful function (linkage with dedicated tools) for devices supporting iQSS can also be used in the 11
"Ethernet Configuration" window. (Page 366 Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties))

Operating procedure
■Reading parameters
1. Select a device supporting iQSS in the "Ethernet
Configuration" window, then right-click and select [Online] 
[Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device] from the shortcut
menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device" screen appears.

2. Select "Parameter read."

3. Select the checkbox of the parameter to be read.

4. Click the [Execute] button.
The selected parameter is read and the value is displayed in the
column of "Read Value."

11 Ethernet
11.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 327
 ■Writing parameters
1. Select a device supporting iQSS in the "Ethernet
Configuration" window, then right-click and select [Online] 
[Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device] from the shortcut
menu.

The "Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device" screen appears.

2. Select "Parameter write."

3. Select a parameter to be written.

4. Enter a value in the column of "Write Value."

5. Click the [Execute] button.

The value entered in the column of "Write Value" is written to the
device supporting iQSS.

Considerations
■Operation after writing parameters
When parameters of a slave station are written, the slave station operates according to the parameters; therefore, note that
the slave station may change its operation.
For details on parameters, refer to the manual for a slave station used.

■A blank in "Write Value"

"Parameter write" cannot be executed if there is even one blank in "Write Value."

■Operation on error
If a module being used has an error, parameters of slave stations may not be read/written properly. Take corrective actions
and read/write parameters again.

11 Ethernet
328 11.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
11.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS
The connection statuses of devices supporting iQSS can be monitored.

Operating procedure
1. Select [Diagnostics]  [Sensor/Device Monitor] with an
engineering tool.

2. Select an Ethernet-equipped module in the "Module Selection 11

(Sensor/Device Monitor)" screen, and click the [OK] button.

The "Sensor/Device Monitor for Ethernet Configuration" screen

appears.

3. Select a target device supporting iQSS to be monitored in the

"Sensor/Device Monitor for Ethernet Configuration" screen.
The status of the selected device supporting iQSS is displayed in
the "Monitoring Information" window.

Considerations when monitoring devices supporting iQSS

■Processing speed of the sensor/device monitor function
The sensor/device monitor function reads a large volume of information from a CPU module at once.
Therefore, the processing speed of the function may decrease depending on the set communication route.

■Display when a module not supporting iQSS is detected

When a module not supporting iQSS is detected or when information cannot be acquired from a slave station correctly, the
module is displayed as shown below:
• "Module With No Profile Found"
• "General Module"

■Operation on failure
The sensor/device monitor function may not run properly if failure occurs in a built-in Ethernet port CPU.
If an error code is displayed, resolve the cause by referring to the manual for the built-in Ethernet port CPU, then perform the
sensor/device monitor function again.

11 Ethernet
11.4 Monitoring Devices Supporting iQSS 329
 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting
iQSS
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up to/restored from an SD memory card by using special relays and
special registers.
This will make a data restoration or utilization simplified and the time taken to change the information of multiple devices
supporting iQSS, restore data when a failure occurred in a device supporting iQSS, and to perform a changeover will also be
shortened.
This section explains the data backup and data restoration methods of iQ Sensor Solution for a MELSEC iQ-R series
Ethernet.

SD memory card

$MELPRJ$

Backup

Ethernet
(3)
20160101_01 10.97.95.40
(1)

03FF_0A615F28
Data
(3)
(2)
10.97.95.50
(1)
03FF_0A615F32 Data

(2)

(1) Data backup

(2) Data restoration
(3) IP address

Function Reference
Data backup Page 334 Data backup
Page 335 Program execution for data backup
Data restoration Page 343 Data restoration
Page 344 Program execution for data restoration

11 Ethernet
330 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Backup folder/file
New backup folders are created in the 'Ethernet' folder which exists in the 'Backup' folder under the main folder of
'$MELPRJ$' in an SD memory card when data is backed up.
If no '$MELPRJ$' folder, 'Backup' folder, or 'Ethernet' folder exists, each of the folders are created as well when data is backed
up.
Up to 100 backup folders (date_number) can be created in the 'Ethernet' folder.

■Backup folder configuration

The following figure shows the backup folder configuration in an SD memory card. 11
/ (1) (2) (3) (4)

$MELPRJ$ Backup Ethernet 20160101_00 03FF_0A615F00 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX
$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI

20160101_01 03FF_0A615F28 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX
$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI

03FF_0A615F35 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX
$BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI

20160102_02

(1) A folder to save the settings of devices supporting iQSS connected to Ethernet
(2) Backup folder (date_number)
(3) Backup folder (target module_IP address)
(4) Backup folder (information of devices supporting iQSS for each IP address)

■Backup folder name

• Date_Number
YYYYMMDD_**
YYYY: Year when the data was backed up (four digits in decimal)*1
MM: Month when the data was backed up (two digits in decimal)*1
DD: Day when the data was backed up (two digits in decimal)*1
**: Number (two digits in decimal (00 to 99))*2

*1 The date of a backup folder name can be changed arbitrary. However, the folder name should be set within 64 characters.
*2 If multiple folders with the same number exist while a target folder (0 to 99) is set to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration
folder number setting), the date of the backup folder name may not be updated. (Setting a number for a data backup folder name)
• Target module_IP address
03FF_****
03FF: Target module (four digits in hexadecimal) (03FF: Built-in Ethernet)
****: IP address (eight digits in hexadecimal)

Ex.
When IP address of the device supporting iQSS is 192.168.3.40, '03FF_C0A80328' will be the backup folder name (target
module_IP address).
192.168.3.40
03FF_C0A80328
C0h A8h 03h 28h

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 331
 Considerations for data backup/restoration
■Use of an SD memory card
• During a data backup or restoration, do not perform the following actions: turning OFF the power, resetting a module, and
inserting or removing an SD memory card. Otherwise, for the data backup, data that was backed up until the data backup
processing was interrupted retains in the SD memory card. As for the data restoration, data that was restored until the data
restoration was interrupted retains in the device supporting iQSS.
• If the memory size or the number of files exceeds the maximum storage capacity of an SD memory card during the data
backup, only the data that has been properly backed up will be stored in the SD memory card.

■Concurrent use of other functions

While any of the following operations or functions are being performed, backup/restoration cannot be performed.
Additionally, the following operations and functions cannot be performed during data backup/restoration.
Operation/function name
Operation with an engineering tool Initializing the CPU built-in memory/SD memory card
Clearing values (file register)
Writing data to a programmable controller (including online change of files)
Deleting data in the programmable controller
User data operation Writing user data
Deleting user data
Creating a folder
Deleting a folder
Changing a folder name
Online change (ladder block)
Event history function (clearing event history)
File password function
iQ Sensor Solution functions via a built-in Automatic detection of connected devices
Ethernet port
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor/device monitor
Sensor parameter read/write
Predefined protocol support function (writing protocol setting data)
Memory dump function (registering/clearing memory dump)
Operations with CPU Module Logging Data logging function (writing/deleting a logging setting file, registering/clearing a logging setting)
Configuration Tool Deleting logging file(s)
Others • SLMP Creating a new file (New File)
• MC protocol
Writing data to a file (Write File)
Deleting a file (Delete File)
Copying a file (Copy File)
Changing a file attribute (Change File State)
Changing file creation date (Change File Date)
File transfer from an Ethernet-equipped Writing a file (put, mput, pm-write)
module (FTP server)
Deleting a file (delete, mdelete)
Changing a file name (rename)
Changing a file attribute (change)
File transfer function (FTP server) of the built-in Ethernet function
File transfer function (FTP client) of the built-in Ethernet function
CPU module data backup/restoration function

When data is backed up or restored during a data logging or the realtime monitor function, the performance of the data
logging or the data sampling for the realtime monitor will be reduced.
Therefore, sampled data may be partially missed and the data missing frequency may be increased.

11 Ethernet
332 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Communication load
When data is backed up or restored, the load of the service processing in the CPU module is temporarily increased.
Consequently, a communication response will be slow and a timeout error may occur in other communications.
To avoid a timeout error, review the value set for "Device/Label Access Service Processing Setting."
[CPU Parameter]  [Service Processing Setting]  [Device/Label Access Service Processing Setting]

■Change of backup folders/data

Do not change a backup folder name, configuration, or saved file.
Otherwise, the data may not be restored properly.
For the backup file capacity, refer to the following:
11
Page 407 Backup File Capacity

■When backing up/restoring data in the state where access load to the SD memory card is high
due to the access from another function of the CPU module
Data backup/restoration may fail if it is performed in the state where access load to the SD memory card is high due to the
access from another function of the CPU module. This is because the processing time of the backup/restoration is extended,
and a system error or a timeout error occurs in the device supporting iQSS in the process of data backup/restoration.
In that case, reduce the access load from another function of the CPU module to the SD memory card, then backup/restore
the data again.

■The IP address of devices supporting iQSS is duplicated

When the IP addresses of devices supporting iQSS on the same network with the CPU module are duplicated, the data
backup/restoration cannot be performed properly.
Set the IP addresses of devices supporting iQSS, so as not to duplicate their IP addresses.

■IP address setting when performing data backup in units of module

When performing data backup in units of module, the devices supporting iQSS which have the same IP address as the CPU
module can be backed up.
Set the IP address of the CPU module for the target device supporting iQSS in advance.
The setting procedures are as follows.

1. Enter the same IP address as the communication target CPU module to the column of "IP Address" in "PLC" in the
"Ethernet Configuration" window.

2. Perform a reflection of communication setting to Ethernet devices

For some devices supporting iQSS, the IP address of a communication target module cannot be set.
For the devices supporting iQSS to which the IP address of a communication target module cannot be set, the
IP address of the CPU module is set as the IP address of a target module.

■When backing up/restoring data in module unit to/from the device supporting iQSS which is
not supported by data backup/restoration
The device supporting iQSS which does not support data backup/restoration is counted as the number of devices completed
with an error, and an error (C059H) occurs.
• The backup file of the device supporting iQSS whose data backup processing has been completed normally can be used
for data restoration.
• The device supporting iQSS whose data restoration has been completed successfully operates normally.

Results of the data backup and restoration functions can be checked in the event history of an engineering
tool. (Page 405 Event List)

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 333
 Data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be saved in an SD memory card for each IP address by using an engineering
tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the "Ethernet
Configuration" window, then right-click it and select [Online]
 [Backup Ethernet Device] from the shortcut menu.

2. Read the message and click the [Yes] button.

Data is backed up.

Considerations for a data backup

■Setting the backup setting
The initial values of the backup setting (SD1363 and SD1367) are as follows:
• SD1363 (folder number setting): FFFFH (automatic specification)
• Lower 8 bits of SD1367 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when backing up data with the settings other than the one above. (Page 335 Program execution for data
backup)

11 Ethernet
334 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Program execution for data backup
Information of a device supporting iQSS can be backed up in an SD memory card.
New folders are created every time when data is backed up, and data of each device supporting iQSS is saved in a file format
in the folders. A system file ($BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI) that contains information required for data restoration is created for each
station when data is backed up.
Data backup and restoration can be performed regardless of the operating status of a CPU module.
The following shows the procedure to back up data with a program.
Procedu
re
Item Reference 11
1 Acquire a right to use. Page 335 Acquiring a right to use
2 Set the backup target setting and the operation setting. Page 336 Setting the backup setting
3 Perform a data backup. Page 337 Performing a data backup
4 Release the right to use. Page 337 Releasing the right to use

Results of the data backup and restoration functions can be checked in the event history of an engineering
tool. (Page 405 Event List)

Execution method of data backup

Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data backup.

■Acquiring a right to use

To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time by other request sources,
acquiring a right to use of them is required.
A right to use can be acquired when other request sources do not have the right to use them (when SD1361 is '0000H').

1. Setting a right-to-use request number

Set a request number (a value that has not been used by multiple request sources within the range of '1000H' to '1FFFH') to
SD1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request number).

2. Requesting a right to use

Turn ON SM1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request) to acquire a right to use for data backup.
SM1360 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is acquired.

3. Checking the acquisition of the right to use

Check that the value of SD1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number) is the same as the
value set to SD1360. If backup/restoration is performed without checking the acquisition of the right to use, the normal
operation is not guaranteed.

Precautions
The values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration are cleared when a
right to use is acquired. (However, SD1375 is set to 'FFFFH'.)
Save the values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) as required.

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 335
 ■Setting the backup setting
1. Setting a target module type
Set a target module with the lower 8 bits of SD1362 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration target module, execution unit
setting).
Target module type Description
3H: Ethernet Set this to specify a device supporting iQSS which is connected to Ethernet.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set a unit to specify the range of data to be backed up at once.
Specify the execution unit to the upper 8 bits of SD1362.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to collect the information of the device supporting iQSS connected to an Ethernet and to perform data
backup.
Device supporting iQSS which communicate with a backup target module are backed up.
2H: IP address unit Set this to specify the device supporting iQSS with the specified IP address among the devices supporting iQSS
which are connected to Ethernet.

3. Setting a number for a data backup folder name

Set a folder number to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration folder number setting).
Target folder Description
FFFFH: Automatic specification (default) Among the numbers (0 to 99) that are not used for backup folder names, the smallest number is used for a new
backup folder name.
An error occurs when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached
the upper limit.
FFFEH: Automatic specification (folder Among the numbers (0 to 99) that are not used for backup folder names, the smallest number is used for a new
deletion supported) backup folder name.
The oldest backup folder (date_number) is deleted and the number of the deleted folder is used for a new backup
folder name when unused number is no longer available due to such cases as the number of folders reached the
upper limit.
0 to 99: Target folder specification Specify a number (0 to 99) of the backup folder name.
When another folder with the same number exists, the target data is overwritten in execution unit without
changing the folder name.*1

*1 When the specified folder number exists, the operation to be performed depends on the specification of the execution unit as follows:

Execution unit Operation

1H: Module unit When the backup data with the same target module exists, the backup folder (target module_IP address) is
deleted before performing data backup.
2H: IP address unit When the backup data with the same target module and the same target IP address exists, the backup folder
(target module_IP address) is deleted before performing data backup.

4. Setting a target device

• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set a module to SD1364 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration
target setting (target module)).
Target device (Module) Description
03FFH: Built-in Ethernet Set this to specify a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a built-in Ethernet.

• Setting IP addresses
When '2H' (IP address unit) is set for the execution unit, set target devices (IP address) to SD1365 (iQ Sensor Solution data
backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)) and SD1366 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration target setting
(target device 2)).
Number Target device (IP address) Description
*1
SD1365 0 to 65536 (FFFFH): IP address (lower 16 bits) Set the IP address of a target device supporting iQSS.
SD1366 0 to 57343 (DFFFH): IP address (upper 16 bits)*1

*1 IP addresses within the range from 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

11 Ethernet
336 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
5. Setting the operation setting when a data backup error occurs
Set the operation to be performed when the data backup fails on some devices while being processed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS to the lower 8 bits of SD1367 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration operation setting).
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data backup even if it fails on some devices.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data backup if it fails on some devices.

■Performing a data backup

Turn ON SM1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup request) to request a data backup.
Data is backed up after a data backup request.
11
SM1361 is turned OFF when a data backup is completed.

1. Checking the execution status of a data backup

The execution status of a data backup can be checked with the following special registers.
Special register Description
SD1371 This register stores the number of target devices for each execution unit when starting a data backup or
restoration.
SD1372 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has normally be completed for each execution
unit. (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed normally.)
SD1373 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has abnormally be completed for each
execution unit.*1 (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed abnormally.)
SD1374 This register stores the progress of processing being executed for a device in percent, from 0 to 100.

*1 For an iQ Sensor Solution related error (error code: 4805H), the number of devices in which the processing has been abnormally
completed is not counted.
2. Canceling a data backup
Turn ON SM1367 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration cancellation request) to cancel a data backup.
A cancellation is performed for each device supporting iQSS, so it will be canceled when a data backup which is being
performed to a device supporting iQSS at the time a cancellation request is made is completed.

3. Checking the completion of a data backup

When the data backup is completed, the backup completion status can be checked with the following special relays.
• Normally completed: SM1362 (iQ Sensor Solution backup normal completion) is turned ON.
• Abnormally completed: SM1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup abnormal completion) is turned ON.
The number of the folder where backup data was saved at the completion of data backup is stored to SD1375 (iQ Sensor
Solution backup folder number).
Backup folder number Description
0 to 99: Folder number The number (0 to 99) of the folder in which backup data was saved is stored.
FFFFH: Backup data not saved Backup data has not been saved.

4. Checking a data backup error

Even if a data backup of a target device supporting iQSS is completed with an error, a diagnostic error will not be detected.
Check the errors with the following special registers.
• SD1376 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module): The error code of an error occurred in a
MELSEC iQ-R CPU module can be checked.
• SD1377 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a device): The error code of an error occurred in a device
supporting iQSS can be checked.
• SD1378 to SD1382: An error occurrence source can be checked.
For details on special registers, refer to the user's manual of each CPU module and device supporting iQSS used.

■Releasing the right to use

Set SD1360 to '0000H' in order to turn SM1360 ON . The right to use is released and the next data backup is ready to be
performed.
SM1360 is turned OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1360 remains ON because no processing is
performed. In that case, turn OFF SM1360.

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 337
 Example of a data backup
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data backup.

10.97.95.1 10.97.95.6

(1)

I0.97.95.40 10.97.95.50 10.97.95.60

(2) (3)

(1) Backup target

(2) Devices supporting iQSS which communicate with the Ethernet-equipped module (IP address: 10.97.95.1)
(3) Devices supporting iQSS which communicate with the Ethernet-equipped module (IP address: 10.97.95.6)

• Target module type: Ethernet

• Execution unit: Module
• Folder number setting: Automatic specification
• Target device (target module): Built-in Ethernet
• Operation setting on error: Continue

11 Ethernet
338 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Categor Device Label name Description
y
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1361 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Request Backup request
11
SM1362 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Normal_Completion Backup normal completion
SM1363 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Error_Completion Backup abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_ Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
No
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_ Backup/restoration target module, execution unit setting
Unit_Setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Sett Backup/restoration folder number setting
ing
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Mod Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
ule
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Devi Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
ce_1
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Devi Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
ce_2
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Nu Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
mber_of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
_of_Normal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully)
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
_of_Error_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed with
an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessi Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
ng_Per_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Caus Backup/restoration error cause in a device
e
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execu Backup/restoration error target module, execution unit
tion_Unit_Information information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Numbe Backup/restoration target folder number information
r_Information
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_M Backup/restoration error information (target module)
odule
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_D Backup/restoration error device information (target
evice_1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_D Backup/restoration error device information (target
evice_2 device 2)

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 339
 Categor Device Label name Description
y
Label to be Define global labels as follows:
defined

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

11 Ethernet
340 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Sample program

11

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 341
 [Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the backup execution trigger.
[Requesting backup right to use]
(9) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
Set the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking backup right to use]
(22) Set the backup setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
[Setting and starting data backup]
(36) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data backup operation setting (on error).
Set the backup request.
[Checking data backup execution]
(51) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(56) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the backup error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data backup process]
(65) Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the backup execution trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the backup right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the backup setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(75) Set the backup cancellation request.
[Releasing backup right to use]
(80) Set the backup right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating backup right to use]
(89) Set the backup right-to-use request.

11 Ethernet
342 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Data restoration
Information saved in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS for each IP address by using an
engineering tool.

Operating procedure
1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the "Ethernet
Configuration" window, then right-click it and select [Online]
 [Restore Ethernet Device] from the shortcut menu. 11
2. Read the message and click the [Yes] button.

3. Select backup data to be restored, and click the [Execute]

button.
Data is restored.

A list of the backup folder names (date_number) is

displayed in the column of "Folder Name."
Backup data is stored in backup folders for each
folder name (Start I/O number_Station number) in
an SD memory card.
For details on the backup folder configuration,
refer to the following:
Page 331 Backup folder configuration

Considerations for data restoration

■Setting the restoration setting
The initial value of the restoration setting (SD1367) is as follows:
• Lower 8 bits of SD1367 (operation setting on error): 0H (continue)
Use a program when restoring data with the settings other than above. (Page 344 Program execution for data restoration)

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 343
 Program execution for data restoration
Information in an SD memory card can be restored to a device supporting iQSS.
Select a backup folder to be restored. In the data restoration, information such as a model name or device version in the
system file ($BKUP_UNIT_INF.BSI) created with backup is compared with that of a device supporting iQSS. If the information
is mismatched, a restoration error will occur.
Data backup and restoration can be performed regardless of the operating status of a CPU module.
The following shows the procedure to restore data with a program.
Procedu Item Reference
re
1 Acquire a right to use. Page 344 Acquiring a right to use
2 Set the restoration target setting and the operation setting. Page 345 Setting the restoration setting
3 Perform a data restoration. Page 346 Performing a data restoration
4 Release the right to use. Page 346 Releasing the right to use

Results of the data backup and restoration functions can be checked in the event history of an engineering
tool. (Page 405 Event List)

Execution method of data restoration

Special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) are used for data restoration.

■Acquiring a right to use

To prevent the same special relay (SM) and special register (SD) from being set at the same time by other request sources,
acquiring a right to use of them is required.
A right to use can be acquired when other request sources do not have the right to use them (when SD1361 is '0000H').

1. Setting a right-to-use request number

Set a request number (a value that has not been used by multiple request sources within the range of '1000H' to '1FFFH') to
SD1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request number).

2. Requesting a right to use

Turn ON SM1360 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration right-to-use request) to acquire a right to use for data
restoration. SM1360 turns ON to OFF when the right to use is acquired.

3. Checking the acquisition of the right to use

Check that the value of SD1361 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number) is the same as the
value set to SD1360. If backup/restoration is performed without checking the acquisition of the right to use, the normal
operation is not guaranteed.

Precautions
The values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration are cleared when a
right to use is acquired. (However, SD1375 is set to 'FFFFH'.)
Save the values of the special relays (SM) and special registers (SD) as required.

11 Ethernet
344 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
■Setting the restoration setting
1. Setting a target module type
Set a target module with the lower 8 bits of SD1362 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration target module, execution unit
setting).
Target module type Description
3H: Ethernet Set this to specify a device supporting iQSS which is connected to Ethernet.

2. Setting an execution unit

Set a unit to specify the range of data to be restored at once. 11
Specify the execution unit to the upper 8 bits of SD1362.
Execution unit Description
1H: Module unit Set this to collect the information of the device supporting iQSS connected to an Ethernet and to perform data
restoration.
Devices supporting iQSS which communicate with a restoration target module are restored.
2H: IP address unit Set this to specify the device supporting iQSS with the specified IP address among the devices supporting iQSS
which are connected to Ethernet.

3. Selecting a folder for data restoration

Set a folder number to SD1363 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration folder number setting).
Target folder Description
0 to 99: Target folder specification Specify a number (0 to 99) of the backup folder name to be restored.

4. Setting a target device

• Setting a module
When '1H' (module unit) is set for the execution unit, set a module to SD1364 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration
target setting (target module)).
Target device (Module) Description
03FFH: Built-in Ethernet Set this to specify a device supporting iQSS which is connected to a built-in Ethernet.

• Setting IP addresses
When '2H' (IP address unit) is set for the execution unit, set target devices (IP address) to SD1365 (iQ Sensor Solution data
backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)) and SD1366 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration target setting
(target device 2)).
Number Target device (IP address) Description
SD1365 0 to 65536 (FFFFH): IP address (lower 16 bits)*1 Set the IP address of a target device supporting iQSS.
SD1366 0 to 57343 (DFFFH): IP address (upper 16 bits)*1

*1 IP addresses within the range from 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254

5. Setting the operation setting when a data restoration error occurs
Set the operation to be performed when the data restoration fails on some devices while being processed to multiple devices
supporting iQSS to the lower 8 bits of SD1367 (iQ Sensor Solution data backup/restoration operation setting).
Operation on error Description
0H: Continue Set this to continue a data restoration even if it fails on some devices.
1H: Stop Set this to stop a data restoration if it fails on some devices.

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 345
 ■Performing a data restoration
Turn ON SM1364 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration request) to request a data restoration.
Data is restored after a data restoration request.
SM1364 is turned OFF when a data restoration is completed.

1. Checking the execution status of a data restoration

The execution status of a data restoration can be checked with the following special register areas.
Special register Description
SD1371 This register stores the number of target devices for each execution unit when starting a data backup or
restoration.
SD1372 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has normally be completed for each execution
unit. (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed normally.)
SD1373 This register stores the number of devices in which the processing has abnormally be completed for each
execution unit.*1 (The number is incremented every time the processing of one device is completed abnormally.)
SD1374 This register stores the progress of processing being executed for a device in percent, from 0 to 100.

*1 For an iQ Sensor Solution related error (error code: 4805H), the number of devices in which the processing has been abnormally
completed is not counted.
2. Canceling a data restoration
Turn ON SM1367 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration cancellation request) to cancel a data restoration.
A cancellation is performed for each device supporting iQSS, so it will be canceled when a data restoration which is being
performed to a device supporting iQSS at the time a cancellation request is made is completed.

3. Checking the completion of a data restoration

When a data restoration is completed, the restoration completion status can be checked with the following special relays.
• Normally completed: SM1365 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration normal completion) is turned ON.
• Abnormally completed: SM1366 (iQ Sensor Solution restoration abnormal completion) is turned ON.

4. Checking a data restoration error

Even if a data restoration to a target device supporting iQSS is completed with an error, a diagnostic error will not be detected.
Check the errors with the following special registers.
• SD1376 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a module): The error code of an error occurred in a CPU
module can be checked.
• SD1377 (iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration error cause in a device): The error code of an error occurred in a device
supporting iQSS can be checked.
• SD1378 to SD1382: An error occurrence source can be checked.
For details on special registers, refer to the user's manual of each CPU module and device supporting iQSS used.

■Releasing the right to use

Set SD1360 to '0000H' in order to turn SM1360 ON. The right to use is released and the next data restoration is ready to be
performed.
SM1360 is turned OFF when the right to use is released.
If the right to use is released even though it has already been done, SM1360 remains ON because no processing is
performed. In that case, turn OFF SM1360.

11 Ethernet
346 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Example of a data restoration
■Example of a system configuration
The following shows the example of a system configuration for data restoration.

10.97.95.1

11

(1)

10.97.95.40 10.97.95.50

(1) Restoration target

• Target module type: Ethernet

• Execution unit: IP address
• Folder number setting: 7
• Target device (target module): Built-in Ethernet
• Target device (IP address): 10.97.95.40
• Operation setting on error: Continue

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 347
 ■Label setting
GX Works3 provides functions that support the creation of a program.
The following table shows the module labels and the global labels used in the sample program.
There is no need to change the settings of the module labels. For details on the global labels, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Program Design)
Categor Device Label name Description
y
Module SM1360 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request Backup/restoration right-to-use request
label
SM1364 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Request Restoration request
SM1365 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Normal_Completion Restoration normal completion
SM1366 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Restoration_Error_Completion Restoration abnormal completion
SM1367 RCPU.stSM.biQSS_Backup_Restoration_Cancel_Request Backup/restoration cancellation request
SD1360 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Request_No Backup/restoration right-to-use request number
SD1361 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Use_Authority_Acquisition_ Backup/restoration right-to-use acquisition number
No
SD1362 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Module_Execution_ Backup/restoration target module, execution unit setting
Unit_Setting
SD1363 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Folder_Number_Sett Backup/restoration folder number setting
ing
SD1364 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Mod Backup/restoration target setting (target module)
ule
SD1365 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Devi Backup/restoration target setting (target device 1)
ce_1
SD1366 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Setting_Target_Devi Backup/restoration target setting (target device 2)
ce_2
SD1367 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Operation_Setting Backup/restoration operation setting
SD1371 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uTotal_Nu Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
mber_of_Target_Devices target devices)
SD1372 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
_of_Normal_Completed_Devices devices in which the processing has been completed
successfully)
SD1373 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uNumber Backup/restoration execution status (total number of
_of_Error_Completed_devices devices in which the processing has been completed with
an error)
SD1374 RCPU.stSD.stiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Execution_Status.uProcessi Backup/restoration execution status (progress per
ng_Per_Devices device)
SD1375 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Target_Folder_Number Backup/restoration folder number setting
SD1376 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Module_Error_Cause Backup/restoration error cause in a module
SD1377 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Target_Devices_Error_Caus Backup/restoration error cause in a device
e
SD1378 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Module_Execu Backup/restoration error target module, execution unit
tion_Unit_Information information
SD1379 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Target_Folder_Numbe Backup/restoration target folder number information
r_Information
SD1380 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_M Backup/restoration error information (target module)
odule
SD1381 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_D Backup/restoration error device information (target
evice_1 device 1)
SD1382 RCPU.stSD.uiQSS_Backup_Restoration_Error_Information_Target_D Backup/restoration error device information (target
evice_2 device 2)

11 Ethernet
348 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
Categor Device Label name Description
y
Label to be Define global labels as follows:
defined

11

For details on special relays (SM) and special registers (SD), refer to the user's manual of a CPU module
used.

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 349
 ■Sample program

11 Ethernet
350 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
[Initialization]
(0) Initialize the execution result.
Initialize the normal completion display.
Initialize the abnormal completion display.
Set the restoration execution trigger.
[Requesting restoration right to use]
(9) Store the right-to-use number.
Set a right-to-use request.
Set the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
[Checking restoration right to use]
(22) Set the restoration setting and starting trigger.
Display the right-to-use acquisition failure.
11
[Setting and starting data restoration]
(36) Set the target module/execution unit.
Set the target folder number.
Set the target module.
Set the target device 1.
Set the target device 2.
Set the data restoration operation setting (on error).
Set the restoration request.
[Checking data restoration execution]
(51) Display the normal completion.
Save the number of normally completed devices.
(56) Display the abnormal completion.
Save the number of devices completed with an error.
Save the error cause in a module.
Save the restoration error cause in a device.
[Enabling the next data restoration process]
(65) Clear the initialization trigger.
Clear the restoration execution trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use request trigger.
Clear the restoration right-to-use confirmation trigger.
Clear the restoration setting and starting trigger.
[Setting for cancelling the process]
(75) Set the restoration cancellation request.
[Releasing restoration right to use]
(80) Set the restoration right-to-use release trigger.
[Updating restoration right to use]
(89) Set the restoration right-to-use request.

11 Ethernet
11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS 351
 MEMO

11 Ethernet
352 11.5 Backing up/Restoring Data of Devices Supporting iQSS
 PART 4
PART 4 MI Configurator

This part explains the operation methods when using the iQ Sensor Solution functions in MI Configurator.

12 CC-Link IE Field Network

13 Ethernet

353
 12 CC-Link IE Field Network
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for a MELIPC connected to CC-Link IE
Field Network.

System configuration
This section explains the iQ Sensor Solution functions for CC-Link IE Field Network using the following system configuration.

(1) (2) (3)

Type Model name Manufacturer

(1) Engineering tool MI Configurator SW1DNN-MICONF-M Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation
(2) Module MELIPC MI5122-VW
(3) Basic digital output module Screw terminal block type NZ2GF2B1-16T
NZ2GF2B1-16TE

For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link IE Field Network, refer
to the following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

• Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system
configuration, and set parameters and other settings required for communication.
For details on the settings, refer to the following:
MELIPC MI5000 Series User's Manual (Startup)
MELIPC MI5000 Series User's Manual (Application)

12 CC-Link IE Field Network

354
12.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A slave station connected to a MELIPC can be detected and the information can be displayed in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window.
For the creation method of a new project and the operation methods of the "CC-Link IE Field Network Configuration" window,
refer to the following:
MI Configurator Operating Manual

Operating procedure
Create a new project in an engineering tool.

1. Select "Parameter"  "(module type)"  "Application 12

Parameter" , and double-click "CC-Link IE Field NetWork
Parameter" in the "Navigation" window.

2. Select "Required Settings""Station Type," and specify

"Master Station" for "Station Type" in the "CC-Link IE Field
NetWork Parameter" screen.

3. Select "Basic Settings"  "Network Configuration Settings"

and double-click "Detail Setting" in the "CC-Link IE Field
NetWork Parameter" screen.

The "CC IE Field Configuration" window appears.

4. Click the [Detect Now] button.

12 CC-Link IE Field Network

12.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 355
 The actual system configuration is displayed in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window.

5. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "CC IE Field

Configuration" window.
Information such as parameters displayed in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window is applied to the network parameter.

Information may not be read correctly when performing an automatic detection of connected devices right
after a slave station is connected. In that case, perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.
When the "User Authentication" screen appears, enter the user name and the password of a MELIPC.

Considerations when detecting devices supporting iQSS

The following shows the considerations when performing an automatic detection of connected devices for MELIPC CC-Link
IE Field Network.

■The actual system configuration is not connected/configured properly

An automatic detection of connected devices cannot be performed when the actual system configuration is not connected/
configured properly (duplication of stations, etc.).
In that case, correct the actual system configuration and perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

■Information of slave stations is not detected correctly

Information may not be read correctly when performing an automatic detection of connected devices right after a slave station
is connected.
In that case, perform an automatic detection of connected devices again.

Detected devices to be displayed in the CC IE Field Configuration window

Modules detected after performing an automatic detection of connected devices are displayed differently depending on
whether a profile has been registered.

■A profile has been registered

• The module model names are displayed in "Model Name."
• "Local Station," "Intelligent Device Station," "Remote Device Station," or "Remote I/O Station" is displayed in the column of
"Station Type."

■A profile has not been registered

• The module model names, "General Local Station," "Gen. Intelligent Device Station," "General Remote Device Station," or
"General Remote I/O Station" is displayed in the column of "Model Name."
• "Local Station," "Sub-Master Station," "Intelligent Device Station," "Remote Device Station," or "Remote I/O Station" is
displayed in the column of "Station Type."

When using the versions of modules that do not support an automatic detection of connected devices, the
information will not be displayed properly in the column of "Model Name" and "Station Type," even though a
profile has been registered.
A reserved station and a data link faulty station cannot be detected by the automatic detection function of
connected devices.

12 CC-Link IE Field Network

356 12.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
12.2 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS
Parameters can be read from and written to a slave station.

Window
1. Select a device supporting iQSS in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window, then right-click and select [Online] 
[Parameter Processing of Slave Station]/[The Parameter
Processing of Same Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.
• The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen appears by 12
selecting [The Parameter Processing of Same Slave Station].
• The "The Parameter Processing of Same Slave Station" screen
appears by selecting [The Parameter Processing of Same
Slave Station].

Operating procedure
■"Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen
• Reading parameters

1. Select "Parameter read."

2. Click the [Execute] button.

The selected parameter is read and the value is displayed in the
column of "Read Value."
• Writing parameters

1. Select "Parameter write."

2. Enter a value in the column of "Write Value."

3. Click the [Execute] button.

The value entered in the column of "Write Value" is written to the
device supporting iQSS.

12 CC-Link IE Field Network

12.2 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 357
 ■"The Parameter Processing of Same Slave Station" screen
1. Click the [Editing Parameter] button.
The "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" screen appears.

2. Set the parameter information, and click the [Close with

setting] button.

3. Select a target device.

Note that the devices with the same model name and the same
device version can be the target.

4. Click the [Execute] button.

The execution result is output by clicking the [Export Execution
Result] button.

12 CC-Link IE Field Network

358 12.2 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS
Option setting
The "Option Setting" screen will appear by selecting [Tool]  [Options] in the "CC IE Field Configuration" window.
In the option setting, parameter information can be saved in a project.
Parameter information is saved in a project by selecting the checkbox.

Conditions under which saved parameter information is cleared

12
Saved parameter information will be deleted under the following condition.
Read the parameters of a slave station by selecting [Parameter Processing of Slave Station]/[The Parameter Processing of
Same Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.
Item Operation Description
"CC IE Field Configuration" window Open the "CC IE Field Configuration" window. Parameter information will be skipped and not read when the
module with the station number that match with the saved
parameter information is not placed in the "CC IE Field
Configuration" window.
In addition, parameter information which was skipped and
not read will be deleted from the storage file.
Close with the setting applied. Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file
when the target module is not included in the system
configuration.
Perform an automatic detection of connected devices. All parameter information will be deleted once.
Change the function version, and close the property Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file
screen. by closing the property screen after changing the function
version.
Unselect the checkbox in the option setting. Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file
by saving the setting after unselecting the checkbox.
"Parameter Processing of Slave Open the "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" Parameter information that does not match with the target
Station" screen screen. module will be skipped and not read.
In addition, parameter information which was skipped and
not read will be deleted from the storage file.
Close the "Parameter Processing of Slave Station" Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file
screen. by closing the "Parameter Processing of Slave Station"
screen under the following condition.
• Blank all values entered in the column of "Read Value"/
"Write Value."
• Unselect all checkboxes.

■Operations that delete the parameters of a slave station in MI Configurator

Parameter information will be deleted from the storage file when performing any of the following operations in MI Configurator.
Read the parameters of a slave station by selecting [Parameter Processing of Slave Station]/[The Parameter Processing of
Same Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.
Group Station type Location Operation
Operation that returns the Master station CC-Link IE Field Network Delete and apply a network configuration diagram
parameters of the network parameter manually.
configuration diagram to the default
Change the station type, and set the parameter for which
the network configuration diagram is default or not existed.
Operation that overwrites parameters Master station Data reading from a Read CC-Link IE Field Network parameters from a MELIPC
MELIPC in a different network configuration.

12 CC-Link IE Field Network

12.2 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 359
 13 Ethernet
This chapter explains the operation methods when using iQ Sensor Solution functions for a MELIPC connected to Ethernet.

System configuration
This section explains the iQ Sensor Solution functions for Ethernet using the following system configuration.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Type Model name Manufacturer

(1) Engineering tool MI Configurator SW1DNN-MICONF-M Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation
(2) Module MELIPC MI5122-VW
(3) Device supporting iQSS Laser displacement sensor HL-C2 Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
(4) COGNEX Vision System In-Sight EZ-700 Cognex Corporation

For details on the devices supporting iQSS and the iQ Sensor Solution functions available for Ethernet, refer to the following:
Page 368 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
For information on the engineering tools available for iQ Sensor Solution and the versions of engineering tools supporting
each iQ Sensor Solution function, refer to the following:
Page 381 Engineering Tool and Version List

• Before using each iQ Sensor Solution function, complete the installation and wiring of the actual system
configuration, and set parameters and other settings required for communication with a device supporting
iQSS.
• A device supporting iQSS, which is connected to the tip of a router, does not support.
For details on the settings, refer to the following:
MELIPC MI5000 Series User's Manual (Startup)
MELIPC MI5000 Series User's Manual (Application)

Precautions
An error is returned to the request source when multiple iQ Sensor Solution functions are performed at the same time on an
Ethernet network.
The following iQ Sensor Solution functions via a built-in Ethernet port cannot be performed at the same time.
• Automatic detection of connected devices
• Reflection of the communication setting
• Sensor parameter read/write function

13 Ethernet
360
13.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
A device supporting iQSS connected to a MELIPC can be detected and the information can be displayed in the "Ethernet
Configuration" window.
For the creation method of a new project and the operation methods of the "Ethernet Configuration" window, refer to the
following:
MI Configurator Operating Manual

Operating procedure
Create a new project in an engineering tool.

1. Select "Parameter"  "(module type)" and double-click "Basic

Parameter" in the "Navigation" window, then select "External
Device Cooperate Settings"  "External Device
Configuration" and double-click "Detail Setting." 13

The "Ethernet Configuration" window appears.

2. Click the [Detect Now] button.

The actual system configuration is displayed in the "Ethernet

Configuration" window.

3. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting] in the "Ethernet

Configuration" window.
The setting in the "Ethernet Configuration" window is applied to the
network parameter and completed.

13 Ethernet
13.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically 361
 • Up to 16 devices supporting iQSS can be displayed in the "Ethernet Configuration" window (in ascending
order of MAC address) by performing an automatic detection of connected devices.
• The system configuration cannot be detected if an error occurs on a MELIPC and a device supporting iQSS.
Take corrective actions and perform the automatic detection function of connected devices again.
• Error information is displayed in the "Output" window when an error occurred.
Double-click the information and correct the error at the jumped destination.
• When a module not supporting iQSS is detected, it is displayed as shown below:
"Module with No Profile Found"
"General Module"
• When the "User Authentication" screen appears, enter the user name and the password of a MELIPC.

■All connected devices supporting iQSS are not detected

If all devices supporting iQSS are not detected, remove the following error factors and perform an automatic detection of
connected devices again.
• The Ethernet line is overloaded due to another function of a MELIPC being performed.
• The communication cannot be established due to a reason such as a disconnection of an Ethernet cable.

13 Ethernet
362 13.1 Detecting Devices Supporting iQSS Automatically
13.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device
Supporting iQSS
The communication setting set in the "Ethernet Configuration" window can be applied to a device supporting iQSS.
Perform this function after adding, deleting or changing the setting of a device supporting iQSS.

Operating procedure
1. Enter the communication setting.

2. Select a target device supporting iQSS in the "Ethernet

Configuration" window, then right-click and select [Online] 
[Communication Setting Reflection of Ethernet Device] from
the shortcut menu.
The communication setting is applied to the target device
supporting iQSS.
13

When using a device supporting iQSS that does

not support the host name, even if the reflection
function of the communication setting is performed
with a host name entered, it will not be applied to
the device.
After performing the automatic detection function
of connected devices, the "Host Name" field will be
blank.
For the applicability of the host name of a device
supporting iQSS, refer to the manuals of each
device supporting iQSS.

The target device supporting iQSS must be restarted after performing a reflection of communication setting to
Ethernet devices.
For the operating status of a device supporting iQSS, refer to the manuals of each device supporting iQSS.

13 Ethernet
13.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting iQSS 363
 Considerations when applying the communication setting to a device supporting iQSS
■Specifying a port number
• Do not specify '45237' for a port number in other devices on the same Ethernet network.
It may cause an error in other devices on the same Ethernet network.
• Do not specify the number from '61440' to '65534' for the own station port number.
• Do not specify the IP address of a device supporting iQSS for the IP address of an external device, nor the number from
'61440' to '65534' for the destination port number.
Doing so may cause an abnormal completion when performing a sensor parameter read/write.

■Changing the communication setting in the "Ethernet Configuration" window

When the communication setting written to a MELIPC in the "Ethernet Configuration" window does not match with that of a
device supporting iQSS, the communication cannot be established normally.
When the communication setting is changed in the "Ethernet Configuration" window, perform a reflection of communication
setting to Ethernet devices in order to match the communication setting between a MELIPC and a device supporting iQSS.

■Selecting devices supporting iQSS in the "Module List" window

A reflection of communication setting to Ethernet devices cannot be performed to a device supporting iQSS, which is selected
in the "Module List" window and dragged and dropped onto the 'List of devices' or 'Device map area'.
Perform an automatic detection of connected devices in order to detect the communication setting, then perform a reflection
of communication setting to Ethernet devices.

■Changing the IP address of an Ethernet port

When the IP address of the Ethernet port CH1 is changed, open the "Ethernet Configuration" window in order to match the IP
address on a MELIPC side in the "Ethernet Configuration" window.
Perform a reflection of communication setting to Ethernet devices in order to match the communication setting of a device
supporting iQSS.

13 Ethernet
364 13.2 Applying the Communication Setting to a Device Supporting iQSS
13.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices
Supporting iQSS
Sensor parameters can be read from and written to a device supporting iQSS.

Window
1. Select a device supporting iQSS in the "Ethernet
Configuration" window, then right-click and select [Online] 
[Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device] from the shortcut
menu.
The "Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device" screen appears.

13

Operating procedure
• Reading parameters

1. Select "Parameter read."

2. Select the checkbox of the parameter to be read.

3. Click the [Execute] button.

The selected parameter is read and the value is displayed in the
column of "Read Value."
• Writing parameters

1. Select "Parameter write."

2. Select the checkbox of the parameter to be written.

3. Enter a value in the column of "Write Value."

4. Click the [Execute] button.

The value entered in the column of "Write Value" is written to the
device supporting iQSS.

13 Ethernet
13.3 Reading/Writing Parameters from/to Devices Supporting iQSS 365
 APPENDIX
Appendix 1 Useful Functions
Linkage with dedicated tools (association with properties)
A dedicated tool and manual can be activated from a device supporting iQSS on 'Device map area' by linking the properties.

Operating procedure
For Ethernet

1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'Device map area'

in the "Ethernet Configuration" window, then right-click and
select [Property] from the shortcut menu.
1. Select

2. Select

2. Select the [Attachment] tab in the "Properties" screen, and

specify the dedicated tool to be linked to "File or Application."
1. Select 2. Specify

3. Double-click the device supporting iQSS, which is linked with

the dedicated tool, to start the dedicated tool.
Double-click

• The setting applications, setting files, and manuals can be linked with devices supporting iQSS on the
"Properties" screen.
• Laser displacement sensors manufactured by OPTEX FA CO.,LTD. can also be linked with dedicated tools.
Mount the laser displacement sensors on the I/O slot of a MELSEC-Q series base unit.
For details, refer to the website of the manufacturer.

APPX
366 Appendix 1 Useful Functions
Command execution to slave station
Commands can be executed to slave stations connected to CC-Link master/local module or CC-Link IE Field Network master/
local module.
Before executing commands to a slave station, complete the settings so that the communication with a device supporting
iQSS can be established successfully.
• CC-Link(Page 56 Before using iQ Sensor Solution functions)

Operating procedure
For CC-Link

1. Select a target device supporting iQSS in 'Device map area'

in the "CC-Link Configuration" window, then right-click and

1. Select
select [Online]  [Command Execution of Slave Station] from
the shortcut menu.

2. Select

2. Select a command from "Method selection," and click the

[Execute] button.
1. Select
The command is executed and the result is displayed on
"Execution Result."
Specify values in "Command Setting" as necessary.

A
The commands that can be executed differ
depending on the target slave station.

2. Click

APPX
Appendix 1 Useful Functions 367
 Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
This section shows the list of the available devices for iQ Sensor Solution.

CPU module
The following shows the CPU modules available for each connection method for iQ Sensor Solution.

AnyWireASLINK
CPU modules available for AnyWireASLINK are as follows.
: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name AnyWireASLINK
Master module Bridge module
CC-Link CC-Link IE CC-Link IE
TSN Field
Network
RCPU R00CPU*1, R01CPU, R02CPU *2 *3 *4 
R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU *5*6 *7 *4 *5*8
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU *5*6 *7 *4 *5
R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, R120PCPU *4*9   
R08PSFCPU, R16PSFCPU, R32PSFCPU, R120PSFCPU    
R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU *4  *4 
LHCPU L04HCPU, L08HCPU, L16HCPU, L32HCPU *4   
FX5CPU FX5U-32MR/DS, FX5U-32MR/ES, FX5U-32MT/DS, FX5U-32MT/DSS,    
FX5U-32MT/ES, FX5U-32MT/ESS, FX5U-64MR/DS, FX5U-64MR/ES,
FX5U-64MT/DS, FX5U-64MT/DSS, FX5U-64MT/ES, FX5U-64MT/ESS,
FX5U-80MR/DS, FX5U-80MR/ES, FX5U-80MT/DS, FX5U-80MT/DSS,
FX5U-80MT/ES, FX5U-80MT/ESS, FX5UC-32MT/D, FX5UC-32MT/DSS,
FX5UC-64MT/D, FX5UC-64MT/DSS, FX5UC-96MT/D, FX5UC-96MT/
DSS, FX5UC-32MT/DS-TS, FX5UC-32MR/DS-TS, FX5UC-32MT/DSS-TS
FX5UJ-24MR/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ESS, FX5UJ-40MR/    
ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ESS, FX5UJ-60MR/ES, FX5UJ-
60MT/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ESS
LCPU L02CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU, L06CPU-P, L26CPU, L26CPU-P, L26CPU- *10 *11  *12
BT, L26CPU-PBT
QCPU Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, *13 *13  *14
Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDVCPU,
Q26UDPVCPU
FXCPU FX3G, FX3GC*15, FX3U*16, FX3UC*16 *4   

*1 The data backup/restoration function cannot be used on these modules with no SD memory card slot.
*2 Modules a firmware version of which is 11 or later support word slave modules.
*3 Modules a firmware version of which is 05 or later support the data backup/restoration function.
*4 The data backup/restoration function is not supported.
*5 Modules a firmware version of which is 22 or later support the data backup/restoration function.
*6 Modules a firmware version of which is 43 or later support the data backup/restoration function for word slave modules.
*7 Modules a firmware version of which is 35 or later support the data backup/restoration function.
*8 Modules a firmware version of which is 03 or later support it.
*9 Only modules in the process mode support it.
*10 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '14112' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*11 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '16042' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*12 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '16072' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*13 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17012' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*14 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17052' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*15 Modules with the version 1.40 or later support it.
*16 Modules with the version 2.20 or later support it.

APPX
368 Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
Other connection methods
CPU modules available for CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, and Ethernet are as follows.
: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name Connection method
CC-Link CC-Link CC-Link IE CC-Link IE Ethernet
IE TSN Field Field
Network Network
Basic
RCPU R00CPU*1, R01CPU, R02CPU *2    *3
R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU *4  *5*6 *7 *3*8*9
*4 *6 *7
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU,     *3*8*10
R120ENCPU
R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, R120PCPU   *11*12  
R08PSFCPU, R16PSFCPU, R32PSFCPU, R120PSFCPU   *11*12  
R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU   *13  
LHCPU L04HCPU, L08HCPU, L16HCPU, L32HCPU  *14   *3
FX5CPU FX5U-32MR/DS, FX5U-32MR/ES, FX5U-32MT/DS, FX5U-     *15
32MT/DSS, FX5U-32MT/ES, FX5U-32MT/ESS, FX5U-
64MR/DS, FX5U-64MR/ES, FX5U-64MT/DS, FX5U-64MT/
DSS, FX5U-64MT/ES, FX5U-64MT/ESS, FX5U-80MR/DS,
FX5U-80MR/ES, FX5U-80MT/DS, FX5U-80MT/DSS, FX5U-
80MT/ES, FX5U-80MT/ESS, FX5UC-32MT/D, FX5UC-
32MT/DSS, FX5UC-64MT/D, FX5UC-64MT/DSS, FX5UC-
96MT/D, FX5UC-96MT/DSS, FX5UC-32MT/DS-TS,
FX5UC-32MR/DS-TS, FX5UC-32MT/DSS-TS
FX5UJ-24MR/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ESS,     
FX5UJ-40MR/ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ESS,
FX5UJ-60MR/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ESS
LCPU L02CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU, L06CPU-P, L26CPU, *16*17  *18 *19 *3*20*21
L26CPU-P, L26CPU-BT, L26CPU-PBT
QCPU Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, *22  *23 *19 *3*24 A
Q06UDVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDVCPU,
Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
FXCPU FX3G, FX3GC*25, FX3U*26, FX3UC*26     

*1 The data backup/restoration function cannot be used on these modules with no SD memory card slot.
*2 Modules a firmware version of which is 05 or later support the data backup/restoration function.
*3 Only built-in Ethernet port CPUs support it. (Connection via an Ethernet port of an Ethernet module is not supported.)
*4 Modules a firmware version of which is 35 or later support the data backup/restoration function.
*5 Modules a firmware version of which is 03 or later support it.
*6 Modules a firmware version of which is 22 or later support the data backup/restoration function.
*7 Modules a firmware version of which is 25 or later support it.
*8 Modules a firmware version of which is 12 or later support it.
*9 Modules a firmware version of which is 25 or later support a data backup and restoration with a program.
*10 Only the Ethernet port of the CPU part (CPU P1) can be used for iQ Sensor Solution functions.
The Ethernet ports of the network part (P1/P2) are not available.
For the part names of RnENCPUs, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup)
*11 The data backup/restoration function is not supported.
*12 It is not available in a redundant line configuration.
For a redundant line configuration, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application)
*13 Modules a firmware version of which is 18 or later support the data backup/restoration function.
*14 Modules a firmware version of which is 05 or later support it.
*15 Modules a firmware version of which is 1.040 or later support it.
*16 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '15052' or higher support the devices connected to communication unit for CC-
Link.
*17 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '14112' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*18 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '16072' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*19 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '18112' or higher support it.
*20 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '15043' or higher support it.
*21 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '15072' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.

APPX
Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution 369
 *22 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17012' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*23 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17052' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*24 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '18072' or higher support it.
*25 Modules with the version 1.40 or later support it.
*26 Modules with the version 2.20 or later support it.

MELIPC
: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name Connection method
AnyWireASLIN CC-Link CC-Link IE CC-Link IE Ethernet
K Field Field
Network Network
Basic
MELIPC MI5122-VW     

Devices supporting iQSS (CPU module)

The devices supporting iQSS available for each connection method for iQ Sensor Solution are listed in the following sections.
• Page 371 AnyWireASLINK
• Page 372 CC-Link
• Page 373 CC-Link IE TSN
• Page 374 CC-Link IE Field Network
• Page 376 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
• Page 377 Ethernet

Each iQ Sensor Solution function name is shown as the following symbols in the table.
iQ Sensor Solution function
 Automatic detection of connected devices
 Verification of connected devices and configurations
 Reflection of the communication setting
 Sensor parameter read/write
 Sensor/device monitor
 Data backup/restoration

For considerations for using each device supporting iQSS, refer to the following:
Page 391 Considerations for Using Device Supporting iQSS
For details on the devices supporting iQSS, refer to the website of each manufacturer.

iQ Sensor Solution functions cannot be used for a module controlled by another CPU in a multiple CPU
system.

APPX
370 Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
AnyWireASLINK
The following shows the devices supporting iQSS and iQ Sensor Solution functions available for AnyWireASLINK.

■Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
AnyWireASLINK master module*1 RJ51AW12AL*2      
FX5-ASL-M      
LJ51AW12AL*3      
QJ51AW12AL*4      *5
FX3U-128ASL-M      
Bridge module CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module*6*7 NZ2AW1C2AL      *8
CC-Link IE TSN-AnyWireASLINK bridge NZ2AW1GNAL      
module*9
CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK NZ2AW1GFAL      
bridge module*7*10*11

*1 When connecting word slave modules, use RJ51AW12AL.

*2 Modules with a serial number whose first two digits are '03' or higher support word slave modules.
*3 When using in an LCPU, modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '14102' or higher, and when using in an LHCPU,
modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '18072' or higher support the functions.
*4 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '14102' or higher support the functions.
*5 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17022' or higher support the function.
*6 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '16042' or higher (device version: 2) support the functions. Modules with a serial
number whose first five digits are '16041' or earlier (device version: 1) do not support the functions.
*7 Word slave modules are not supported.
*8 When connecting a CC-Link master/local module (QJ61BT11N), use the module with a serial number whose first five digits are '17012'
or higher.
*9 The module supports the functions only when connecting a CC-Link IE TSN master/local module (RJ71GN11-T2).
*10 When connecting a CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/local module (RJ71GF11-T2 or RJ71EN71), use the module with a serial A
number whose first five digits are '16072' or higher.
*11 When connecting a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module (LJ71GF11-T2), use the module with a serial number whose first four
digits are '1611' or higher (device version: 2).

■AnyWire Corporation
: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
ASLINKER For the supported model names, please contact      
AnyWire Corporation.
ASLINKAMP
ASLINKSENSOR
ASLINKTERMINAL

APPX
Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution 371
 CC-Link
The following shows the devices supporting iQSS and iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link.

■Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
CC-Link master/local module*1*2 L26CPU-BT*3, L26CPU-PBT*3      
LJ61BT11*4      
QJ61BT11N*5      
CC-Link system master/local module*1*2 RJ61BT11*6      
Analog input module (Voltage/Current input) AJ65SBT2B-64AD*7      
Analog input module RTD AJ65SBT2B-64RD3*8
(Temperature input) Thermocouple AJ65SBT2B-64TD*9
Analog output module (Voltage/Current AJ65SBT2B-64DA*10
output)

*1 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '14112' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*2 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '15052' or higher support the devices connected to communication unit for CC-
Link.
*3 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '16042' or higher support the devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
*4 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '15052' or higher support the devices supporting iQSS, which are connected to a
bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL).
*5 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17012' or higher support the functions.
*6 Modules a firmware version of which is 06 or later support the functions.
*7 Modules with a serial number '1211DB' or higher support the functions.
*8 Modules with a serial number '1211DC' or higher support the functions.
*9 Modules with a serial number '1211BC' or higher support the functions.
*10 Modules with a serial number '1211GC' or higher support the functions.

■Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
Communication unit for CC-Link SC-GU3-01*1      
Analog input unit*2 SC-T1JA, SC-A01, SC-A02
Digital fiber sensor*2 FX-301*3, FX-305, FX-501, FX-502
Digital laser sensor*2 LS-403
Head-separated dual display digital pressure DPS-401, DPS-402
sensor*2

*1 Products manufactured from December, 2012 onward support the functions.

A cascading connector unit (SC-71) is required separately.
An end unit (SC-GU3-EU) is required separately.
Use the dedicated software (SC-PC1) to configure the required settings.
*2 The unit/sensor supports each function by being connected to a communication unit for CC-Link (SC-GU3-01).
A sensor head is required separately.
*3 Products manufactured from June, 2004 onward support the functions.

APPX
372 Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
CC-Link IE TSN
The following shows the devices supporting iQSS and iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link IE TSN.

■Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
CC-Link IE TSN master/local module RJ71GN11-T2      
FX5-CCLGN-MS
Motion module RD78G4, RD78G8, RD78G16, RD78G32,      
RD78G64, RD78GHV, RD78GHW
FX5-40SSC-G, FX5-80SSC-G      
LD78G4, LD78G16      

APPX
Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution 373
 CC-Link IE Field Network
The following shows the devices supporting iQSS and iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link IE Field Network.

■Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/ RJ71GF11-T2*1, RJ71EN71*1      *2
local module
CC-Link IE Field Network master/local LJ71GF11-T2*3      
module *4
     
QJ71GF11-T2
Basic digital input Screw terminal block NZ2GF2B1-16D*5*6, NZ2GF2B1N-16D*5*6,      
module type NZ2GF2B1N1-16D*6, NZ2GF2B2-16A*6,
NZ2GF2B1-32D
NZ2GN2B1-16D, NZ2GN2B1-32D    *7  *7
e-CON type NZ2GFCE3-16D*5*6, NZ2GFCE3-16DE*5*6,      
NZ2GFCE3N-32D*6
Sensor connector type NZ2GNCE3-32D    *7  *7
(e-CON)
MIL connector type*5 NZ2GFCM1-16D*6, NZ2GFCM1-16DE*6      
FCN connector type NZ2GFCF1-32D*6      
*7
40-pin connector type NZ2GNCF1-32D      *7
Spring clamp terminal NZ2GF2S2-16A*6      
block type
NZ2GN2S1-16D, NZ2GN2S1-32D    *7  *7
Waterproof/dustproof NZ2GN12A4-16D, NZ2GN12A4-16DE    *7  *7
type
Basic digital Screw terminal block NZ2GF2B1-16T*5*6, NZ2GF2B1-16TE*5*6,      
output module type NZ2GF2B1N-16T*5*6, NZ2GF2B1N-16TE*5*6,
NZ2GF2B1N1-16T*6, NZ2GF2B1N1-16TE*6,
NZ2GF2B2-16R*6, NZ2GF2B2-16S*6, NZ2GF2B1-
32T, NZ2GF2B1-32TE
NZ2GN2B1-16T, NZ2GN2B1-16TE, NZ2GN2B1-    *7  *7
32T, NZ2GN2B1-32TE
e-CON type NZ2GFCE3-16T*5*6, NZ2GFCE3-16TE*5*6,      
NZ2GFCE3N-32T*6
MIL connector type*5 NZ2GFCM1-16T*6, NZ2GFCM1-16TE*6      
FCN connector type NZ2GFCF1-32T*6      
40-pin connector type NZ2GNCF1-32T    *7  *7
Spring clamp terminal NZ2GF2S2-16R*6, NZ2GF2S2-16S*6      
block type
NZ2GN2S1-16T, NZ2GN2S1-16TE, NZ2GN2S1-    *7  *7
32T, NZ2GN2S1-32TE
Waterproof/dustproof NZ2GN12A2-16T, NZ2GN12A2-16TE    *7  *7
type
Basic digital I/O Screw terminal block NZ2GF2B1-32DT, NZ2GF2B1-32DTE      
combined module type
NZ2GN2B1-32DT, NZ2GN2B1-32DTE    *7  *7
e-CON type NZ2GFCE3N-32DT*6      
Sensor connector type NZ2GNCE3-32DT    *7  *7
(e-CON)
FCN connector type NZ2GFCF1-32DT*6      
Spring clamp terminal NZ2GN2S1-32DT, NZ2GN2S1-32DTE    *7  *7
block type
Waterproof/dustproof NZ2GN12A42-16DT, NZ2GN12A42-16DTE    *7  *7
type
Basic analog Screw terminal block NZ2GF2BN-60AD4*6      *8
input module type NZ2GN2B-60AD4      
e-CON type NZ2GFCE-60ADV8, NZ2GFCE-60ADI8      
Spring clamp terminal NZ2GN2S-60AD4
block type

APPX
374 Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
*6
Basic analog Screw terminal block NZ2GF2BN-60DA4      *8
output module type
NZ2GN2B-60DA4      
e-CON type NZ2GFCE-60DAV8, NZ2GFCE-60DAI8      
Spring clamp terminal NZ2GN2S-60DA4
block type
Basic multiple input (voltage/current/ NZ2GF2S-60MD4      
temperature) module
Basic temperature control module NZ2GF2B-60TCTT4, NZ2GF2B-60TCRT4      
Basic high-speed counter module NZ2GFCF-D62PD2*6      *9

*1 Modules a firmware version of which is 03 or later support the functions.

*2 Modules a firmware version of which is 09 or later support the function.
*3 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17022' or higher support the functions.
*4 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17062' or higher support the functions.
*5 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are 17042' or higher support the functions.
*6 An automatic detection of connected device is available for a basic module. If the function is performed for an extension module, the
total number of points of the basic module and the extension module is read and the setting of the extension module will be empty.
*7 Modules a firmware version of which is 06 or later support it.
*8 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '19092' or higher support it.
*9 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17122' or higher support it.

APPX
Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution 375
 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
The following shows the devices supporting iQSS and iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link IE Field Network
Basic.

■Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
RCPU R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU      
R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU      
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU,      
R120ENCPU
LHCPU L04HCPU, L08HCPU, L16HCPU, L32HCPU      
FX5CPU FX5U-32MR/DS, FX5U-32MR/ES, FX5U-32MT/DS,      
FX5U-32MT/DSS, FX5U-32MT/ES, FX5U-32MT/
ESS, FX5U-64MR/DS, FX5U-64MR/ES, FX5U-
64MT/DS, FX5U-64MT/DSS, FX5U-64MT/ES,
FX5U-64MT/ESS, FX5U-80MR/DS, FX5U-80MR/
ES, FX5U-80MT/DS, FX5U-80MT/DSS, FX5U-
80MT/ES, FX5U-80MT/ESS, FX5UC-32MT/D,
FX5UC-32MT/DSS, FX5UC-64MT/D, FX5UC-64MT/
DSS, FX5UC-96MT/D, FX5UC-96MT/DSS, FX5UC-
32MT/DS-TS, FX5UC-32MR/DS-TS, FX5UC-32MT/
DSS-TS, FX5UJ-24MR/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ES,
FX5UJ-24MT/ESS, FX5UJ-40MR/ES, FX5UJ-40MT/
ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ESS, FX5UJ-60MR/ES, FX5UJ-
60MT/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ESS
Built-in Ethernet port LCPU L02CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU, L06CPU-P, L26CPU,      
L26CPU-P, L26CPU-BT, L26CPU-PBT
High-speed universal model QCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,
universal model process CPU Q06UDVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDVCPU,
Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
Input module Screw terminal block NZ2MFB1-32D, NZ2MFB2-16A      
type
Spring clamp terminal NZ2MF2S1-32D
block type
Output module Screw terminal block NZ2MFB1-32T, NZ2MFB1-32TE1, NZ2MFB2-16R
type
Spring clamp terminal NZ2MF2S1-32T, NZ2MF2S1-32TE1
block type
I/O combined Screw terminal block NZ2MFB1-32DT, NZ2MFB1-32DTE1
module type
Spring clamp terminal NZ2MF2S1-32DT, NZ2MF2S1-32DTE1
block type

APPX
376 Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
Ethernet
The following shows the devices supporting iQSS and iQ Sensor Solution functions available for Ethernet.

■Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
RCPU*1 R00CPU*2, R01CPU, R02CPU     *3 
R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU     *4 *5
R04ENCPU*6, R08ENCPU*6, R16ENCPU*6,     *7 *5
R32ENCPU*6, R120ENCPU*6
LHCPU L04HCPU, L08HCPU, L16HCPU, L32HCPU      
*8 *8 *8
FX5CPU FX5U-32MR/DS, FX5U-32MR/ES, FX5U-32MT/DS,      
FX5U-32MT/DSS, FX5U-32MT/ES, FX5U-32MT/ESS,
FX5U-64MR/DS, FX5U-64MR/ES, FX5U-64MT/DS,
FX5U-64MT/DSS, FX5U-64MT/ES, FX5U-64MT/ESS,
FX5U-80MR/DS, FX5U-80MR/ES, FX5U-80MT/DS,
FX5U-80MT/DSS, FX5U-80MT/ES, FX5U-80MT/ESS,
FX5UC-32MT/D, FX5UC-32MT/DSS, FX5UC-64MT/D,
FX5UC-64MT/DSS, FX5UC-96MT/D, FX5UC-96MT/
DSS, FX5UC-32MT/DS-TS, FX5UC-32MR/DS-TS,
FX5UC-32MT/DSS-TS
FX5UJ-24MR/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ESS,      
FX5UJ-40MR/ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ESS,
FX5UJ-60MR/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ESS
Built-in Ethernet port LCPU*9*10 L02CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU, L06CPU-P, L26CPU,      
L26CPU-P, L26CPU-BT, L26CPU-PBT
High-speed universal model QCPU*11, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,      
universal model process CPU*11 Q06UDVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDVCPU,
Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
GOT2000 series*12 GT27, GT25, GT23, GT21*13      
A
*1 Modules a firmware version of which is 12 or later support the functions.
*2 The data backup/restoration function cannot be used on these modules with no SD memory card slot.
*3 Modules a firmware version of which is 05 or later support it.
*4 Modules a firmware version of which is 35 or later support it.
*5 Modules a firmware version of which is 25 or later support it.
*6 Only the Ethernet port of the CPU part (CPU P1) can be used for iQ Sensor Solution functions.
The Ethernet ports of the network part (P1/P2) are not available.
For the part names of RnENCPUs, refer to the following:
MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup)
*7 Modules a firmware version of which is 24 or later support it.
*8 Modules a firmware version of which is 1.040 or later support it.
*9 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '15043' or higher support the functions.
*10 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '15072' or higher support the data backup/restoration function.
*11 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '18072' or higher support the functions.
*12 The Screen Design Software for Graphic Operation Terminal for GOT, GT Works3 (SW1DND-GTWK3) with a version 1.136S or later
supports the function.
For the information to obtain profiles, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
*13 Only the models with built-in Ethernet ports support the function.

APPX
Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution 377
 ■Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
*1
Laser displacement sensor HL-C2      

*1 For the information to obtain profiles, please contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting iQSS.

■Cognex Corporation
: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
COGNEX Vision System*1*2 In-Sight 5000, In-Sight 7000, In-Sight Micro, In-Sight      
EZ-100, In-Sight EZ-700

*1 LCPUs with a serial number whose first five digits are '15043' or higher support the functions.
*2 GX Works2 Version 1.499V or later supports the functions.

Device supporting iQSS (MELIPC)

The devices supporting iQSS available for each connection method for iQ Sensor Solution are listed in the following sections.
• Page 379 CC-Link IE Field Network
• Page 380 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
• Page 380 Ethernet

Each iQ Sensor Solution function name is shown as the following symbols in the table.
iQ Sensor Solution function
 Automatic detection of connected devices
 Verification of connected devices and configurations
 Reflection of the communication setting
 Sensor parameter read/write
 Sensor/device monitor
 Data backup/restoration

For considerations for using each device supporting iQSS, refer to the following:
Page 391 Considerations for Using Device Supporting iQSS
For details on the devices supporting iQSS, refer to the website of each manufacturer.

iQ Sensor Solution functions cannot be used for a module controlled by another CPU in a multiple CPU
system.

APPX
378 Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
CC-Link IE Field Network
The following shows the devices supporting iQSS and iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link IE Field Network.

■Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped master/ RJ71GF11-T2*1, RJ71EN71*1      
local module
CC-Link IE Field Network master/local LJ71GF11-T2*2      
module *3
     
QJ71GF11-T2
MELIPC MI5000 series MI5122-VW      
*4*5 *4*5
Basic digital input Screw terminal block NZ2GF2B1-16D , NZ2GF2B1N-16D ,      
module type NZ2GF2B1N1-16D*5, NZ2GF2B2-16A*5,
NZ2GF2B1-32D
e-CON type NZ2GFCE3-16D*4*5, NZ2GFCE3-16DE*4*5,
NZ2GFCE3N-32D*5
MIL connector type*4 NZ2GFCM1-16D*5, NZ2GFCM1-16DE*5
FCN connector type NZ2GFCF1-32D*5
Spring clamp terminal NZ2GF2S2-16A*5
block type
Basic digital Screw terminal block NZ2GF2B1-16T*4*5, NZ2GF2B1-16TE*4*5,
output module type NZ2GF2B1N-16T*4*5, NZ2GF2B1N-16TE*4*5,
NZ2GF2B1N1-16T*5, NZ2GF2B1N1-16TE*5,
NZ2GF2B2-16R*5, NZ2GF2B2-16S*5, NZ2GF2B1-
32T, NZ2GF2B1-32TE
e-CON type NZ2GFCE3-16T*4*5, NZ2GFCE3-16TE*4*5,
NZ2GFCE3N-32T*5
MIL connector type*4 NZ2GFCM1-16T*5, NZ2GFCM1-16TE*5
FCN connector type NZ2GFCF1-32T*5
A
Spring clamp terminal NZ2GF2S2-16R*5, NZ2GF2S2-16S*5
block type
Basic digital I/O Screw terminal block NZ2GF2B1-32DT, NZ2GF2B1-32DTE
combined module type
e-CON type NZ2GFCE3N-32DT*5
FCN connector type NZ2GFCF1-32DT*5
Basic analog Screw terminal block NZ2GF2BN-60AD4*5      
input module type
Basic analog Screw terminal block NZ2GF2BN-60DA4*5
output module type
Basic high-speed counter module*6 NZ2GFCF-D62PD2*5      

*1 Modules a firmware version of which is 03 or later support the functions.

*2 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17022' or higher support the functions.
*3 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17062' or higher support the function.
*4 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are 17042' or higher support the functions.
*5 An automatic detection of connected device is available for a basic module. If the function is performed for an extension module, the
total number of points of the basic module and the extension module is read and the setting of the extension module will be empty.
*6 Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '17122' or higher support the functions.

APPX
Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution 379
 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
The following shows the devices supporting iQSS and iQ Sensor Solution functions available for CC-Link IE Field Network
Basic.

■Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
Input module Screw terminal block NZ2MFB1-32D, NZ2MFB2-16A      
type
Output module Screw terminal block NZ2MFB1-32T, NZ2MFB1-32TE1, NZ2MFB2-16R
type
I/O combined Screw terminal block NZ2MFB1-32DT, NZ2MFB1-32DTE1
module type

Ethernet
The following shows the devices supporting iQSS and iQ Sensor Solution functions available for Ethernet.

■Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
GOT2000 series*1 GT23, GT25, GT27      

*1 The Screen Design Software for Graphic Operation Terminal for GOT, GT Works3 (SW1DND-GTWK3) with a version 1.136S or later
supports the function.
For the information to obtain profiles, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

■Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
Laser displacement sensor*1 HL-C2      

*1 For the information to obtain profiles, please contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting iQSS.

■Cognex Corporation
: Supported, : Not supported
Type Model name iQ Sensor Solution function
     
COGNEX Vision System In-Sight 5000, In-Sight 7000, In-Sight Micro, In-Sight      
EZ-100, In-Sight EZ-700

APPX
380 Appendix 2 Devices that Support iQ Sensor Solution
Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List
The following tables show the usable engineering tools and their versions for each connection method.

GX Works2/MELSOFT Navigator

AnyWireASLINK
■LCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.98C or later 1.62Q or later
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations 1.492N or later 1.62Q or later
Data backup/restoration

■QCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.98C or later 1.62Q or later
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations 1.492N or later 1.62Q or later
Data backup/restoration 1.530C or later 2.07H or later

■FXCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
A
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.501X or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor
Verification of connected devices and configurations
Data backup/restoration Not supported

APPX
Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List 381
 CC-Link
■LCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.98C or later 1.62Q or later
Sensor parameter read/write 1.68W or later 1.25B or later
Sensor/device monitor 1.98C or later Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations 1.492N or later 1.62Q or later
Data backup/restoration

• For a CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)

iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.513K or later 2.01B or later
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations 2.01B or later
Data backup/restoration

■QCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.530C or later 2.07H or later
Sensor parameter read/write 1.68W or later 1.25B or later
Sensor/device monitor 1.530C or later Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations 2.07H or later
Data backup/restoration

• For a CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)

iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.530C or later 2.07H or later
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations 2.07H or later
Data backup/restoration

APPX
382 Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List
CC-Link IE Field Network
■LCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices*1 1.530C or later 2.07H or later
Sensor parameter read/write 1.501X or later 1.74C or later
Sensor/device monitor 1.530C or later Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations Not supported
Data backup/restoration

*1 GX Works2 Version 1.545T or later support displaying two or more extension modules which are connected to a remote I/O module.
• For a CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL)
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.530C or later 2.07H or later
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations Not supported
Data backup/restoration

■QCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices*1 1.575Z or later 2.50C or later
Sensor parameter read/write 1.501X or later 1.74C or later
Sensor/device monitor 1.575Z or later Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations
Data backup/restoration
2.50C or later
A
*1 GX Works2 Version 1.575Z or later support displaying two or more extension modules which are connected to a remote I/O module.
• For a CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL)
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.575Z or later 2.50C or later
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations 2.50C or later
Data backup/restoration

APPX
Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List 383
 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
■LCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.565P or later 2.42U or later
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported Not supported
Data backup/restoration

■QCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.565P or later 2.42U or later
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported Not supported
Data backup/restoration

Ethernet
■LCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.492N or later 1.74C or later
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Data backup/restoration 1.497T or later 1.74C or later

■QCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works2 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.550Y or later 2.42U or later*1
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Data backup/restoration 2.42U or later*1

*1 Only high-speed universal model QCPUs and universal model process CPUs (Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,
Q06UDVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU) support it.

APPX
384 Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List
GX Works3/MELSOFT Navigator

AnyWireASLINK
■RCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3*1 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.030G or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor 1.040S or later
Verification of connected devices and configurations 1.070Y or later
Data backup/restoration 1.040S or later

*1 GX Works3 Version 1.055H or later supports word slave modules.

■LHCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.082L or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor
Verification of connected devices and configurations
Data backup/restoration Not supported

■FX5CPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.035M or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write A
Sensor/device monitor 1.050C or later
Verification of connected devices and configurations Not supported
Data backup/restoration

APPX
Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List 385
 CC-Link
■RCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.045X or later 2.50C or later
Sensor parameter read/write 1.000A or later 2.00A or later
Sensor/device monitor 1.045X or later Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations Not supported
Data backup/restoration 1.045X or later 2.50C or later

• For a CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)

iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.045X or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor
Verification of connected devices and configurations 1.080J or later
Data backup/restoration 1.045X or later

■LHCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.060N or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor
Verification of connected devices and configurations Not supported
Data backup/restoration 1.060N or later

APPX
386 Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List
CC-Link IE TSN
■RCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.055H or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations
Data backup/restoration

• For a CC-Link IE TSN-AnyWireASLINK bridge module (NZ2AW1GNAL)

iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.075D or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor
Verification of connected devices and configurations Not supported
Data backup/restoration

■LHCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.090U or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations
Data backup/restoration
A
■FX5CPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.065T or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations
Data backup/restoration

APPX
Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List 387
 CC-Link IE Field Network
■RCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices*1 1.007H or later 2.03D or later
Sensor parameter read/write 1.000A or later 2.00A or later
Sensor/device monitor 1.032J or later Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations Not supported
Data backup/restoration 1.040S or later 2.46Y or later

*1 To display two or more extension modules connected to a remote I/O module, use GX Works3 version 1.025B or later.
• For a CC-Link IE Field Network-AnyWireASLINK bridge module (NZ2AW1GFAL)
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.060N or later Not supported
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor
Verification of connected devices and configurations 1.080J or later
Data backup/restoration 1.060N or later

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

■RCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.035M or later 2.42U or later
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported Not supported
Data backup/restoration

■LHCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.060N or later Not supported
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Data backup/restoration

■FX5CPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.035M or later 2.42U or later
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported Not supported
Data backup/restoration

APPX
388 Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List
Ethernet
■RCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.015R or later 2.11M or later
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor 1.045X or later Not supported
Data backup/restoration

■LHCPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.060N or later Not supported
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor
Data backup/restoration

■FX5CPU
iQ Sensor Solution function Engineering tool
GX Works3 MELSOFT Navigator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.030G or later 2.38Q or later
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported Not supported
Data backup/restoration
A

APPX
Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List 389
 MI Configurator

CC-Link IE Field Network

■MELIPC
iQ Sensor Solution function MI Configurator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.001B or later
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Verification of connected devices and configurations
Data backup/restoration

CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

■MELIPC
iQ Sensor Solution function MI Configurator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.001B or later
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Data backup/restoration

Ethernet
■MELIPC
iQ Sensor Solution function MI Configurator
Automatic detection of connected devices 1.001B or later
Reflection of the communication setting
Sensor parameter read/write
Sensor/device monitor Not supported
Data backup/restoration

APPX
390 Appendix 3 Engineering Tool and Version List
Appendix 4 Considerations for Using Device
Supporting iQSS
This section shows considerations for using each device supporting iQSS.

AnyWireASLINK

AnyWire Corporation
Type/model name Function Consideration
■Device supporting iQSS Sensor/device monitor For details on the status display of AnyWireASLINK devices, refer to the
• Page 371 AnyWire contact the manufacturer of the devices used.
Corporation

CC-Link

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Type/model name Function Consideration
■Analog input module (Voltage/ Data backup/restoration Data to be backed up/restored is offset/gain values.
Current Input) After completing data restoration normally, target modules are operated with
• AJ65SBT2B-64AD the offset/gain values which are restored automatically.
■RTD analog input module
When data backup/restoration failed, an error code is stored to SD1453.
(Temperature input)
Check the error code and take corrective actions. (Page 396 Error Code
• AJ65SBT2B-64RD3
List, or User's manual for data backup/restoration target modules)
■Thermocouple analog input
module (Temperature input) Even if a stop error occurs in a CPU module, data can be backed up and
• AJ65SBT2B-64TD restored by setting "PLC Down Select" in the "Network Parameter - CC-Link
■Analog output module (Voltage/ Module Configuration" screen of an engineering tool. However, they may not
Current output) be performed depending on the error description.
• AJ65SBT2B-64DA When using AJ65SBT2B-64AD, AJ65SBT2B-64RD3, or AJ65SBT2B-64TD,
the conversion process is stopped and the conversion completion flag (RXn0 A
to RXn3) is turned OFF by the module while the data such as setting data is
sent/received by the data backup/restoration function.
When using AJ65SBT2B-64DA, the value specified by the analog output
HOLD/CLEAR function (analog output status when the CPU module is in
STOP status) is output while the data such as setting data is sent/received by
the data backup/restoration function.

APPX
Appendix 4 Considerations for Using Device Supporting iQSS 391
 Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
Type/model name Function Consideration
■Communication unit for CC-Link • Sensor parameter read/write Communication unit for CC-Link is required to be interconnected with
• SC-GU3-01 • Sensor/device monitor respective sensor amplifiers supporting optical communication, and to which
an end unit (SC-GU3-EU) is attached at the end.
Neither the sensor parameter read/write function nor the sensor/device
monitor function can be performed on the station without an end unit.
Data backup/restoration Communication unit for CC-Link is required to be interconnected with
respective sensor amplifiers supporting optical communication, to which an
end unit (SC-GU3-EU) is attached at the end.
The station to which no end unit is attached, the data may not be backed up
properly.
When one communication unit for CC-Link is connected to the CC-Link
master/local module, the error code 4805H is stored to SD1452 during the
data backup process.
When two or more communication unit for CC-Link are connected to CC-Link
master/local module, and if a station without an end unit is included, data
backup is performed only on the station with an end unit, not on the station
without an end unit.
Note that error code is not stored.
■Analog input unit Sensor/device monitor When performing the Sensor/Device Monitor function, connecting an analog
• SC-T1JA voltage output signal of other device to an analog voltage input terminal is
• SC-A01 required.
• SC-A02 If no signal is connected, '0' is obtained as a current value.
■Digital fiber sensor Sensor/device monitor When performing the sensor/device monitor function, connecting a fiber
• FX-301 head to a digital fiber sensor is required.
• FX-305 Data can be obtained even if a fiber head is not connected, but a detected
• FX-501 value differs from a value detected when a fiber head is connected.
• FX-502
Data backup/restoration When data backup/restoration failed, an error code is stored to SD1453.
Check the error code and take corrective actions. (Page 396 Error Code
List, or User's manual for data backup/restoration target modules)
■Digital laser sensor Sensor/device monitor When performing the sensor/device monitor function, connecting a laser
• LS-403 sensor head to a digital laser sensor is required.
Data can be obtained even if a laser sensor head is not connected, but a
detected value differs from a value detected when a laser sensor head is
connected.
Data backup/restoration When data backup/restoration failed, an error code is stored to SD1453.
Check the error code and take corrective actions. (Page 396 Error Code
List, or User's manual for data backup/restoration target modules)
■Head-separated dual display Sensor/device monitor When performing the sensor/device monitor function, connecting a pressure
digital pressure sensor sensor head to a head-separated dual display digital pressure sensor is
• DPS-401 required.
• DPS-402 When a pressure sensor head is not connected, '0' is acquired for a detected
value and 'Er42' is displayed on a sensor amplifier.
Data backup/restoration When data backup/restoration failed, an error code is stored to SD1453.
Check the error code and take corrective actions. (Page 396 Error Code
List, or User's manual for data backup/restoration target modules)

APPX
392 Appendix 4 Considerations for Using Device Supporting iQSS
CC-Link IE Field Network

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Type/model name Function Consideration
■Basic digital input module Data backup/restoration When data backup/restoration failed, an error code is stored to SD1453.
• NZ2GF2B1-16D, NZ2GF2B1N- Check the error code and take corrective actions. (Page 396 Error Code
16D, NZ2GF2B1N1-16D, List, or User's manual for data backup/restoration target modules)
NZ2GF2B2-16A, NZ2GF2B1-32D,
Check that the restoration target module operates normally after performing
NZ2GN2B1-16D, NZ2GN2B1-32D
the data restoration.
• NZ2GFCE3-16D, NZ2GFCE3-
When an error occurs on the restoration target module, check the error code
16DE, NZ2GFCE3N-32D,
and take corrective actions. (User's manual for data backup/restoration
NZ2GNCE3-32D
target modules)
• NZ2GFCM1-16D, NZ2GFCM1-
16DE Backup data (parameter) cannot be restored to a module whose model name
• NZ2GFCF1-32D, NZ2GNCF1-32D is different from the one used for data backup.
• NZ2GF2S2-16A, NZ2GN2S1-16D, However, it can be restored to a module having a compatibility of functions
NZ2GN2S1-32D even if its model name is different from the one used for data backup.
• NZ2GN12A4-16D, NZ2GN12A4- For details, check the following table 'List of combinations of modules for data
16DE backup and for data restoration'.
■Basic digital output module
• NZ2GF2B1-16T, NZ2GF2B1-16TE,
NZ2GF2B1N-16T, NZ2GF2B1N-
16TE, NZ2GF2B1N1-16T,
NZ2GF2B1N1-16TE, NZ2GF2B2-
16R, NZ2GF2B2-16S, NZ2GF2B1-
32T, NZ2GF2B1-32TE,
NZ2GN2B1-16T, NZ2GN2B1-
16TE, NZ2GN2B1-32T,
NZ2GN2B1-32TE
• NZ2GFCE3-16T, NZ2GFCE3-
16TE, NZ2GFCE3N-32T
• NZ2GFCM1-16T, NZ2GFCM1-
16TE
• NZ2GFCF1-32T, NZ2GNCF1-32T
• NZ2GF2S2-16R, NZ2GF2S2-16S, A
NZ2GN2S1-16T, NZ2GN2S1-
16TE, NZ2GN2S1-32T,
NZ2GN2S1-32TE
• NZ2GN12A2-16T, NZ2GN12A2-
16TE
■Basic digital I/O combined module
• NZ2GF2B1-32DT, NZ2GF2B1-
32DTE, NZ2GN2B1-32DT,
NZ2GN2B1-32DTE
• NZ2GFCE3N-32DT, NZ2GNCE3-
32DT
• NZ2GFCF1-32DT
• NZ2GN2S1-32DT, NZ2GN2S1-
32DTE
• NZ2GN12A42-16DT,
NZ2GN12A42-16DTE
■Basic analog input module
• NZ2GF2BN-60AD4
• NZ2GFCE-60ADV8
• NZ2GFCE-60ADI8
• NZ2GN2B-60AD4, NZ2GN2S-
60AD4
■Basic analog output module
• NZ2GF2BN-60DA4
• NZ2GFCE-60DAV8
• NZ2GFCE-60DAI8
• NZ2GN2B-60DA4, NZ2GN2S-
60DA4
■Basic multiple input (voltage/
current/temperature) module
• NZ2GF2S-60MD4
■Basic high-speed counter module
• NZ2GFCF-D62PD2

APPX
Appendix 4 Considerations for Using Device Supporting iQSS 393
 ■List of combinations of modules for data backup and for data restoration
Module for data backup Module for data restoration
NZ2GF2B1-16D NZ2GF2B1-16D, NZ2GF2B1N-16D, NZ2GF2B1N1-16D
NZ2GF2B1-16T NZ2GF2B1-16T, NZ2GF2B1N-16T, NZ2GF2B1N1-16T
NZ2GF2B1-16TE NZ2GF2B1-16TE, NZ2GF2B1N-16TE, NZ2GF2B1N1-16TE
NZ2GF2B1N-16D NZ2GF2B1N-16D, NZ2GF2B1N1-16D
NZ2GF2B1N-16T NZ2GF2B1N-16T, NZ2GF2B1N1-16T
NZ2GF2B1N-16TE NZ2GF2B1N-16TE, NZ2GF2B1N1-16TE
NZ2GF2B1-32D, NZ2GF2B1-32DT, NZ2GF2B1-32DTE Only a module with the same model name as one used for data backup can
be used for data restoration.
NZ2GF2B1-32T, NZ2GF2B1-32TE
NZ2GF2B1N1-16D, NZ2GF2B1N1-16T, NZ2GF2B1N1-16TE
NZ2GF2B2-16A, NZ2GF2B2-16R, NZ2GF2B2-16S
NZ2GFCE3-16D, NZ2GFCE3-16DE, NZ2GFCE3-16T, NZ2GFCE3-16TE
NZ2GFCE3N-32D, NZ2GFCE3N-32DT, NZ2GFCE3N-32T
NZ2GFCM1-16D, NZ2GFCM1-16DE, NZ2GFCM1-16T, NZ2GFCM1-16TE
NZ2GFCF1-32D, NZ2GFCF1-32T, NZ2GFCF1-32DT
NZ2GF2S2-16A, NZ2GF2S2-16R, NZ2GF2S2-16S
NZ2GN2B1-32D, NZ2GN2B1-32T, NZ2GN2B1-32TE, NZ2GN2B1-32DT,
NZ2GN2B1-32DTE
NZ2GN2S1-32D, NZ2GN2S1-32T, NZ2GN2S1-32TE, NZ2GN2S1-32DT,
NZ2GN2S1-32DTE
NZ2GNCE3-32D, NZ2GNCE3-32DT
NZ2GNCF1-32D, NZ2GNCF1-32T
NZ2GN12A4-16D, NZ2GN12A4-16DE
NZ2GN12A2-16T, NZ2GN12A2-16TE
NZ2GN12A42-16DT, NZ2GN12A42-16DTE
NZ2GN2B1-16D, NZ2GN2B1-16T, NZ2GN2B1-16TE
NZ2GN2S1-16D, NZ2GN2S1-16T, NZ2GN2S1-16TE
NZ2GF2S-60MD4
NZ2GF2BN-60AD4, NZ2GF2BN-60DA4
NZ2GFCE-60ADV8, NZ2GFCE-60DAV8
NZ2GFCE-60ADI8, NZ2GFCE-60DAI8
NZ2GN2B-60AD4, NZ2GN2B-60DA4
NZ2GN2S-60AD4, NZ2GN2S-60DA4
NZ2GFCF-D62PD2

APPX
394 Appendix 4 Considerations for Using Device Supporting iQSS
Ethernet

Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

Type/model name Function Consideration
■Laser displacement sensor Automatic detection of connected Make sure whether the iQ Sensor Solution function is enabled on a target
• HL-C2 devices device of the automatic detection function using the setting tool of HL-C2.
■Device supporting iQSS
Reflection of the communication setting Setting a subnet mask and default gateway is required.
• Page 378 Panasonic
If the cells for subnet mask and default gateway setting are blank, the
Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
communication settings can not be reflected.
The protocol is fixed to 'UDP'.
Do not configure the following IP addresses in the IP address settings.
An HL-C2 may not operate properly.
• 0.0.0.0
• *.*.*.0
• *.*.*.255
• 255.*.*.*
Status When the head unit is not connected to the controller, the unconnected flag is
set to the status.
Sensor/device monitor To change the items to be monitored, use the application software
"Configurator WD" manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX
Co., Ltd.
Data backup/restoration When a timeout occurs, perform a data backup or restoration again.
If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer.

Cognex Corporation
Type/model name Function Consideration
■COGNEX Vision System Automatic detection of connected Make sure whether the iQ Sensor Solution function is enabled on a target
• In-Sight 5000 devices device of the automatic detection function using the setting tool of COGNEX
• In-Sight 7000 Vision System.
• In-Sight EZ-100
• In-Sight EZ-700
Reflection of the communication
setting
Select 'TCP' for the protocol.
A
• In-Sight Micro Set the IP address within the range from 1.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254.
■Device supporting iQSS Do not make the host name a blank.
• Page 378 Cognex For usable characters to the host name, refer to the manuals of COGNEX
Corporation Vision System.
Sensor/device monitor After completing the In-Sight job loading , perform the sensor/device monitor
function.

APPX
Appendix 4 Considerations for Using Device Supporting iQSS 395
 Appendix 5 Error Code List
The following shows the list of error codes.

iQ Sensor Solution-related errors

For details on the error codes, error information, error causes, and corrective actions, refer to the manual of the CPU module
used.
QCPU User's Manual(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

AnyWireASLINK
For details on the error codes, error information, error causes, and corrective actions, refer to the manual of the
AnyWireASLINK device used.
When using GX Works2, these information can be checked in the "Monitoring Information" window. (Page 33 Monitoring
Devices Supporting iQSS)

CC-Link

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Error code Error and cause Corrective action Type/model name
BAD1H Data backup failed. Perform data backup again. ■Analog input module (Voltage/
If RXnB turns ON when turning the power ON, the error is on the Current input)
hardware. • AJ65SBT2B-64AD
■RTD analog input module
BAD2H Data restoration failed. The restored data may be corrupted.
(Temperature input)
If RXnC turns ON when turning the power ON, the error is on the
• AJ65SBT2B-64RD3
hardware.
■Thermocouple analog input
BC55H CC-Link communication error A communication error occurred. module (Temperature input)
Perform the data backup/restoration function again. • AJ65SBT2B-64TD
■Analog output module (Voltage/
Current output)
• AJ65SBT2B-64DA

APPX
396 Appendix 5 Error Code List
Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
Error code Error and cause Corrective action Type/model name
4805H The data backup/restoration The data backup/restoration function is not supported by SC- ■Analog input unit
function was performed for the T1JA, SC-A01, and SC-A02. • SC-T1JA
device which is not supported by Perform the data backup/restoration function for the device which • SC-A01
the data backup/restoration is supported by the data backup/restoration function of iQ Sensor • SC-A02
function of iQ Sensor Solution. Solution.
4805H The end unit is not recognized Check that the end unit unconnected flag (for one-station ■Digital fiber sensor
because the end unit is not occupied operation: 15th bit of RWr0, for four-station occupied • FX-301
attached to the sensor amplifier operation: RX1F) is not set. • FX-305
properly. Check that the end unit is attached to the sensor amplifier • FX-501
properly. • FX-502
E0C4H Data backup/restoration function Check that the sensor amplifier is connected properly, and
was performed for the station perform data backup/restoration function to the connected station
sub-ID to which the sensor sub-ID.
amplifier is not connected.
E0C5H Data backup failed because the Check that the end unit is attached to the sensor amplifier
end unit is not attached to the properly, and perform data backup again.
sensor amplifier properly.
E0C6H Data restoration failed because Check that the end unit is attached to the sensor amplifier
the end unit is not attached to properly or the specified backup data is correct. Then perform the
the sensor amplifier properly or data restoration again.
the specified backup data is not
correct.
4805H The end unit is not recognized Check that the end unit unconnected flag (for one-station ■Digital laser sensor
because the end unit is not occupied operation: 15th bit of RWr0, for four-station occupied • LS-403
attached to the sensor amplifier operation: RX1F) is not set.
properly. Check that the end unit is attached to the sensor amplifier
properly.
E0C4H Data backup/restoration function Check that the sensor amplifier is connected properly, and
was performed for the station perform data backup/restoration function to the connected station
sub-ID to which the sensor sub-ID.
amplifier is not connected.
E0C5H Data backup failed because the Check that the end unit is attached to the sensor amplifier
A
end unit is not attached to the properly, and perform data backup again.
sensor amplifier properly.
E0C6H Data restoration failed because Check that the end unit is attached to the sensor amplifier
the end unit is not attached to properly or the specified backup data is correct. Then perform the
the sensor amplifier properly or data restoration again.
the specified backup data is not
correct.
4805H The end unit is not recognized Check that the end unit unconnected flag (for one-station ■Head-separated dual display
because the end unit is not occupied operation: 15th bit of RWr0, for four-station occupied digital pressure sensor
attached to the sensor amplifier operation: RX1F) is not set. • DPS-401
properly. Check that the end unit is attached to the sensor amplifier • DPS-402
properly.
E0C4H Data backup/restoration function Check that the sensor amplifier is connected properly, and
was performed for the station perform data backup/restoration function to the connected station
sub-ID to which the sensor sub-ID.
amplifier is not connected.
E0C5H Data backup failed because the Check that the end unit is attached to the sensor amplifier
end unit is not attached to the properly, and perform data backup again.
sensor amplifier properly.
E0C6H Data restoration failed because Check that the end unit is attached to the sensor amplifier
the end unit is not attached to properly or the specified backup data is correct. Then perform the
the sensor amplifier properly or data restoration again.
the specified backup data is not
correct.

APPX
Appendix 5 Error Code List 397
 CC-Link IE Field Network
Error code Error and cause Corrective action Type/model name
BAD1H Data restoration was performed Use the data that was backed up by using a module with the ■Basic digital input module
using backup data of module same model name as one used for data restoration. • NZ2GF2B1-16D, NZ2GF2B1N-
that is different from module for 16D, NZ2GF2B1N1-16D*1,
data restoration target. NZ2GF2B2-16A, NZ2GF2B1-32D,
NZ2GN2B1-16D, NZ2GN2B1-32D
BAD2H Data restoration was performed Perform the data restoration function by using the data that was
• NZ2GFCE3-16D, NZ2GFCE3-
using backup data of newer backed up from a module with the same version or earlier than
16DE, NZ2GFCE3N-32D,
module than module for data one used for data restoration.
NZ2GNCE3-32D
restoration target.
• NZ2GFCM1-16D, NZ2GFCM1-
BAD3H Corrupted backup data was Use another backup data and retry. 16DE
restored. • NZ2GFCF1-32D, NZ2GNCF1-
32D
• NZ2GF2S2-16A, NZ2GN2S1-
16D, NZ2GN2S1-32D
• NZ2GN12A4-16D, NZ2GN12A4-
16DE
■Basic digital output module
• NZ2GF2B1-16T, NZ2GF2B1-
16TE, NZ2GF2B1N-16T,
NZ2GF2B1N-16TE,
NZ2GF2B1N1-16T*1,
NZ2GF2B1N1-16TE*1,
NZ2GF2B2-16R, NZ2GF2B2-16S,
NZ2GF2B1-32T, NZ2GF2B1-
32TE, NZ2GN2B1-16T,
NZ2GN2B1-16TE, NZ2GN2B1-
32T, NZ2GN2B1-32TE
• NZ2GFCE3-16T, NZ2GFCE3-
16TE, NZ2GFCE3N-32T
• NZ2GFCM1-16T, NZ2GFCM1-
16TE
• NZ2GFCF1-32T, NZ2GNCF1-32T
• NZ2GF2S2-16R, NZ2GF2S2-16S,
NZ2GN2S1-16T, NZ2GN2S1-
16TE, NZ2GN2S1-32T,
NZ2GN2S1-32TE
• NZ2GN12A2-16T, NZ2GN12A2-
16TE
■Basic digital I/O combined module
• NZ2GF2B1-32DT, NZ2GF2B1-
32DTE, NZ2GN2B1-32DT,
NZ2GN2B1-32DTE
• NZ2GFCE3N-32DT, NZ2GNCE3-
32DT
• NZ2GFCF1-32DT
• NZ2GN2S1-32DT, NZ2GN2S1-
32DTE
• NZ2GN12A42-16DT,
NZ2GN12A42-16DTE
■Basic analog input module
• NZ2GF2BN-60AD4
• NZ2GFCE-60ADV8
• NZ2GFCE-60ADI8
• NZ2GN2B-60AD4, NZ2GN2S-
60AD4
■Basic analog output module
• NZ2GF2BN-60DA4
• NZ2GFCE-60DAV8
• NZ2GFCE-60DAI8
• NZ2GN2B-60DA4, NZ2GN2S-
60DA4
■Basic multiple input (voltage/
current/temperature) module
• NZ2GF2S-60MD4
■Basic high-speed counter module
• NZ2GFCF-D62PD2

APPX
398 Appendix 5 Error Code List
Error code Error and cause Corrective action Type/model name
BAD4H Data backup was performed in Non-volatile memory data (parameter) error occurred. Retry ■Basic digital input module
the state of being unable to data backup after removing the error. • NZ2GF2B1-16D, NZ2GF2B1N-
create backup data of module. 16D, NZ2GF2B1N1-16D*1,
NZ2GF2B2-16A, NZ2GF2B1-32D
• NZ2GFCE3-16D, NZ2GFCE3-
16DE, NZ2GFCE3N-32D
• NZ2GFCM1-16D, NZ2GFCM1-
16DE
• NZ2GFCF1-32D
• NZ2GF2S2-16A
■Basic digital output module
• NZ2GF2B1-16T, NZ2GF2B1-
16TE, NZ2GF2B1N-16T,
NZ2GF2B1N-16TE,
NZ2GF2B1N1-16T*1,
NZ2GF2B1N1-16TE*1,
NZ2GF2B2-16R, NZ2GF2B2-16S,
NZ2GF2B1-32T, NZ2GF2B1-
32TE
• NZ2GFCE3-16T, NZ2GFCE3-
16TE, NZ2GFCE3N-32T
• NZ2GFCM1-16T, NZ2GFCM1-
16TE
• NZ2GFCF1-32T
• NZ2GF2S2-16R, NZ2GF2S2-16S
■Basic digital I/O combined module
• NZ2GF2B1-32DT, NZ2GF2B1-
32DTE
• NZ2GFCE3N-32DT
• NZ2GFCF1-32DT
■Basic analog input module
• NZ2GF2BN-60AD4
• NZ2GFCE-60ADV8
• NZ2GFCE-60ADI8
• NZ2GN2B-60AD4, NZ2GN2S-
60AD4
■Basic analog output module A
• NZ2GF2BN-60DA4
• NZ2GFCE-60DAV8
• NZ2GFCE-60DAI8
• NZ2GN2B-60DA4, NZ2GN2S-
60DA4
■Basic multiple input (voltage/
current/temperature) module
• NZ2GF2S-60MD4
■Basic high-speed counter module
• NZ2GFCF-D62PD2
BAD5H An attempt was made to restore Data cannot be restored to a remote I/O module when the ■Basic digital input module
data to a remote I/O module automatic I/O parameter setting is enabled. • NZ2GF2B1N1-16D, NZ2GFCF1-
when the automatic I/O Disable the automatic I/O parameter setting for the restoration 32D
parameter setting is enabled. target remote I/O module. ■Basic digital output module
• NZ2GF2B1N1-16T,
NZ2GF2B1N1-16TE, NZ2GFCF1-
32T
■Basic digital I/O combined module
• NZ2GFCF1-32DT
BAD6H Data backup or restoration was Data of the remote analog module cannot be backed up or ■Basic analog input module
performed to a remote analog restored when the setting is enabled. • NZ2GN2B-60AD4, NZ2GN2S-
module when the input range Disable the setting for the backup or restoration target remote 60AD4
switch enable/disable setting or analog module. ■Basic analog output module
the output range switch enable/ • NZ2GN2B-60DA4, NZ2GN2S-
disable setting is enabled. 60DA4

*1 The error code '4807H' is stored to SD1452 if data is backed up and restored with any of the following combinations of modules.
Data backup for NZ2GF2B1N1-16D, and data restoration for NZ2GF2B1-16D or NZ2GF2B1N-16D
Data backup for NZ2GF2B1N1-16T, and data restoration for NZ2GF2B1-16T or NZ2GF2B1N-16T
Data backup for NZ2GF2B1N1-16TE, and data restoration for NZ2GF2B1-16TE or NZ2GF2B1N-16TE

APPX
Appendix 5 Error Code List 399
 Ethernet (Error codes that occur on communication)
The following table shows the error codes displayed in the "Ethernet Configuration" window of an engineering tool.
Error code is displayed when the communication error or iQ Sensor Solution related error occurred. (Page 396 iQ Sensor
Solution-related errors)

The error codes in the

following table indicate the
lower 4 digits of 2C09****.

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Error code Error and cause Corrective action
C055H to System error • Check the considerations for the performed function.
C056H • Check the operating status and connection status of the devices
supporting iQSS.
• Check the connection of Ethernet cable and a hub.
• Check the Ethernet line status.
• Reset the CPU module and the devices supporting iQSS and retry.
If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting
iQSS.
C059H The function which is not supported by the device Check if the function is supported by the connected device supporting iQSS.
supporting iQSS was performed.
C05CH • The setting value of the communication setting is out of Review the settings and retry.
the range.
• The items of communication setting which cannot be set
on the target device supporting iQSS were set.
• The required setting items have not been set to the target
device supporting iQSS.
C061H System error • Check the considerations for the performed function.
• Check the operating status and connection status of the devices
supporting iQSS.
• Check the connection of Ethernet cable and a hub.
• Check the Ethernet line status.
• Reset the CPU module and the devices supporting iQSS and retry.
If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting
iQSS.
CEE0H The devices supporting iQSS, which were detected by the After the automatic detection function of connected devices is completed,
other peripheral device or other iQ Sensor Solution function perform the other function.
was performed while the automatic detection function of
connected devices is processing.

APPX
400 Appendix 5 Error Code List
Error code Error and cause Corrective action
CEE1H to System error • Check the considerations for the performed function.
CEE2H • Check the operating status and connection status of the devices
supporting iQSS.
CF10H System error
• Check the connection of Ethernet cable and a hub.
• Check the Ethernet line status.
• Reset the CPU module and the devices supporting iQSS and retry.
If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting
iQSS.
CF20H • The setting value of the communication setting is out of Review the settings and retry.
the range.
• The items of communication setting which cannot be set
on the target device supporting iQSS were set.
• The required setting items have not been set to the target
device supporting iQSS.
CF30H The parameter which is not supported by devices Check the version of devices supporting iQSS.
supporting iQSS was specified.
CF31H System error • Check the considerations for the performed function.
• Check the operating status and connection status of the devices
supporting iQSS.
• Check the connection of Ethernet cable and a hub.
• Check the Ethernet line status.
• Reset the CPU module and the devices supporting iQSS and retry.
If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting
iQSS.
CF41H The required information for monitoring could not be • Check the operating status and connection status of the devices
obtained from the devices supporting iQSS. supporting iQSS.
• Reset the devices supporting iQSS and retry.
If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting
iQSS.
CF50H System error • Check the considerations for the performed function.
• Check the operating status and connection status of the devices
supporting iQSS.
• Check the connection of Ethernet cable and a hub.
• Check the Ethernet line status.
• Reset the CPU module and the devices supporting iQSS and retry. A
If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting
iQSS.
CF51H The function could not be performed because the other Retry after a while.
peripheral devices are in process.
CF52H The required information for monitoring could not be • Check the operating status and connection status of the devices
obtained from the devices supporting iQSS. supporting iQSS.
• Reset the devices supporting iQSS and retry.
If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting
iQSS.
CF53H to System error • Check the considerations for the performed function.
CF56H • Check the operating status and connection status of the devices
supporting iQSS.
• Check the connection of Ethernet cable and a hub.
• Check the Ethernet line status.
• Reset the CPU module and the devices supporting iQSS and retry.
If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting
iQSS.
CF60H to At the data backup for the iQ Sensor Solution function (data • Check the operating status and connection status of the devices
CF61H backup/restoration), the process cannot be started. supporting iQSS.
• Reset the CPU module and the devices supporting iQSS and retry.
CF62H At the data backup for the iQ Sensor Solution function (data
backup/restoration), the process cannot be terminated. If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting
iQSS.
CF63H At the data restoration for the iQ Sensor Solution function Check the devices supporting iQSS (manufacturer, model name, version) of
(data backup/restoration), the device supporting iQSS of the the specified backup data and the restoration target.
specified backup data and the one as data restoration target
are not consistent.
CF64H At the data restoration for the iQ Sensor Solution function • Check the operating status and connection status of the devices
(data backup/restoration), the process cannot be started. supporting iQSS.
• Reset the CPU module and the devices supporting iQSS and retry.
CF65H At the data restoration for the iQ Sensor Solution function
If the problem persists, contact the manufacturer of the devices supporting
(data backup/restoration), the process cannot be
iQSS.
terminated.

APPX
Appendix 5 Error Code List 401
 Error code Error and cause Corrective action
CF70H An error occurred on the Ethernet communication route. • Check the operation of the devices supporting iQSS.
• Check that the cable is connected.
CF71H Timeout error • Check the considerations for the performed function.
• Check the operation of the devices supporting iQSS.
• The line may be busy due to too many packets. Perform the function after
a while.

APPX
402 Appendix 5 Error Code List
Ethernet (Error codes of devices supporting iQSS)
An error code of a device supporting iQSS is displayed in the "Monitor Information" window of an engineering tool.
For details on the error, refer to the manuals of each device supporting iQSS.

Check on the Monitor

Information window of the
Sensor/Device Monitor screen.

Cognex Corporation
Error code Error and cause Corrective action Type/model name
0001H SLMP scanner is connecting. Check the status of the SLMP scanner after wait several seconds and ■COGNEX Vision System
the connection is established. • In-Sight 5000
• In-Sight 7000
0002H SLMP scanner connection was Check that the In-Sight camera is connected over the same port
• In-Sight EZ-100
rejected. number that the CPU module is accepting connections.
• In-Sight EZ-700
0003H SLMP scanning failed. • Check that the network setting and configuration are correct. • In-Sight Micro
• Check that the connection between devices is not disconnected.
0004H The setting time of polling interval Set the available time to the polling interval of the In-Sight camera.
is too short.

APPX
Appendix 5 Error Code List 403
 Appendix 6 Special Relay (SM)/Special Register (SD)
For special relays (SM)/special registers (SD) used for the data backup/restoration function, refer to the manual of the CPU
module used.
QCPU User's Manual(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

APPX
404 Appendix 6 Special Relay (SM)/Special Register (SD)
Appendix 7 Event List
A CPU module collects information, such as errors detected by the module; operations performed for the module; and errors
occurred on the network, from modules, and stores the collected data into the data memory or an SD memory card.
For details and settings on the event function, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)
When an event occurs, its event code and details of the event can be read by using an engineering tool.

For details on the events occurred in each module, refer to the manuals for the respective modules.

Viewing an event history

The event history can be viewed by the menu operation of an engineering tool. For details on the operation procedures, refer
to the following manual.
GX Works3 Operating Manual

Window
1. Select [Diagnostics]  [Module Diagnostics (CPU Diagnostics)].

2. Click the [Event History] button in the "Module Diagnostics" screen or "System Monitor" screen.

How to read the event list

The event list contains the following information.
Item Description
Event code Indicates an ID number assigned to an event.
Event type Indicates the type of an event.
Event category Indicates the category of an event.
A
Detected event Indicates the description of a detected event.
Detailed information 1 to 2 Indicates the detail of the detected event.

Detailed information
The following shows the description of the information in the detailed information 1 to 2.
Detailed Item Description
information
Detailed information 1 Operation source information The following information related to the operation source is displayed.
• Connection port (connection information such as Ethernet and USB)
• Start I/O number
• CPU number (PLC number in a multiple CPU system)
• Network number
• Station number
• IP address
• User name (when the user authentication function is enabled)
Event history file information Displays information related to the event history file.
Data backup/restoration information of iQ Displays the information on iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration (operation,
Sensor Solution target device, execution unit, target module, folder number setting, total number of
executions, number of successful executions, number of executions completed
with an error, target folder number).
Information on the execution status of the data Displays the information on the execution status (result, error category, error code)
backup/restoration function of iQ Sensor of iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration.
Solution
Information on the right to use the data backup/ Displays the information on the right to use (right-to-use number, operation) for iQ
restoration function of iQ Sensor Solution Sensor Solution backup/restoration.
Detailed information 2 Target device information of the data backup/ Displays the information on the target device (station number, station sub-ID
restoration function of iQ Sensor Solution number, ID number) for iQ Sensor Solution backup/restoration.

APPX
Appendix 7 Event List 405
 Event list
The following shows the lists of events related to a CPU module.
Event Event Event Detected event Description Detailed information
code type category Detailed Detailed
information 1 information 2
20600 Operation Info iQ Sensor Solution data iQ Sensor Solution data backup succeeded. Information on the Target device
backup succeeded execution status of information of the
the data backup/ data backup/
20601 iQ Sensor Solution data iQ Sensor Solution data backup failed.
restoration function restoration function
backup failed
of iQ Sensor of iQ Sensor
20602 iQ Sensor Solution data iQ Sensor Solution data restoration Solution Solution
restoration succeeded succeeded.
20603 iQ Sensor Solution data iQ Sensor Solution data restoration failed.
restoration failed
20610 iQ Sensor Solution data iQ Sensor Solution data backup was started/ Data backup/ 
backup start/cancel/end canceled/ended. restoration
information of iQ
20611 iQ Sensor Solution data iQ Sensor Solution data restoration was
Sensor Solution
restoration start/cancel/ started/canceled/ended.
end
20620 Right-to-use The right to use for iQ Sensor Solution Information on the
acquisition/release backup/restoration was acquired or released. right to use the data
backup/restoration
function of iQ
Sensor Solution

APPX
406 Appendix 7 Event List
Appendix 8 Backup File Capacity
The approximate file size for one file created by the data backup function can be calculated using the formula shown in the
following table.
The capacity of a file created at data backup differs depending on the devices supporting iQSS connected.

Backup data file (.QBR)

The file capacity of a backup data file (.QBR) differs depending on the devices supporting iQSS connected.
For details on the file capacity of a backup data file (.QBR), consult the manufacturer of devices supporting iQSS.

System file for backup/restoration (.QSI)

The length of the file name that can be named on a backup data file differs depending on the devices supporting iQSS
connected.
For details on the length of the backup data file name, consult the manufacturer of devices supporting iQSS.

MELSEC-L series/Q series

Connection method Capacity
AnyWireASLINK/CC-Link/CC-Link IE Field Network 72 + 20  N bytes (N: Number of devices supporting iQSS whose data backup
process has been completed normally)
Ethernet 88 + M bytes (M: Length of the file name of backup data)

MELSEC iQ-R series

Connection method Capacity
AnyWireASLINK/CC-Link/CC-Link IE Field Network 36 + 20  N bytes (N: Number of devices supporting iQSS whose data backup
process has been completed normally)
Ethernet 52 + M bytes (M: Length of the file name of backup data)*1

*1 The total size is adjusted to be a multiple of 4 bytes.

A
MELSEC iQ-L series
Connection method Capacity
CC-Link 36 + 20  N bytes (N: Number of devices supporting iQSS whose data backup
process has been completed normally)
Ethernet 52 + M bytes (M: Length of the file name of backup data)*1

*1 The total size is adjusted to be a multiple of 4 bytes.

APPX
Appendix 8 Backup File Capacity 407
 INDEX

A
Automatic detection of connected devices . . . . . . 15

B
Backup file capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Backup folder/file
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,76,121,158,189,228,289,331
Backup/restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

C
Command execution to slave stations . . . . . . . . 367

E
Easy startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Easy tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

L
Link refresh setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

P
Profile registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

R
Read Model Name of Slave Station. . . . . . . . . . . 56
Reflection of the communication setting . . . . . . . . 16
Requiring a data backup cancellation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,84,128,164
Requiring a data restoration cancellation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,96,139,172

S
Sensor parameter read/write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sensor/device monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Setting refresh devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting the operation mode for CC-Link Ver.2-
compatible slave station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,216

V
Verification of connected devices and
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

408
MEMO

409
 REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Revision date *Manual number Description
March 2013 SH(NA)-081133ENG-A Due to the transition to the e-Manual, the details of revision have been deleted.
to to
April 2014 SH(NA)-081133ENG-E
March 2015 SH(NA)-081133ENG-F Complete revision (layout change)
June 2015 SH(NA)-081133ENG-G ■Added or modified parts
TERMS, Section 5.5, Appendix 2, Appendix 3, Appendix 4, Appendix 5
August 2015 SH(NA)-081133ENG-H ■Added or modified parts
Section 6.2, Appendix 2, Appendix 4, Appendix 5
December 2015 SH(NA)-081133ENG-I ■Added or modified parts
Appendix 2, Appendix 4, Appendix 5
September 2016 SH(NA)-081133ENG-J ■Added or modified parts
TERMS, Section 2.1, Section 3.5, Section 4.5, Section 5.5, Section 6.2, Section 6.5, Appendix 2,
Appendix 3, Appendix 4, Appendix 5, Appendix 6
November 2016 SH(NA)-081133ENG-K ■Added or modified parts
TERMS, Section 1.2, Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Section 3.1, Section 3.2, Section 3.4, Section 4.1,
Section 5.1, Section 5.2, Chapter 7, Chapter 8, Chapter 9, Appendix 1, Appendix 2, Appendix 3,
Appendix 5, Appendix 6, Appendix 7, Appendix 8
January 2017 SH(NA)-081133ENG-L ■Added or modified parts
Section 9.4, Appendix 2, Appendix 5
May 2017 SH(NA)-081133ENG-M ■Added or modified parts
Section 2.2, Section 8.2, Section 8.3, Section 9.1, Appendix 2, Appendix 3
July 2017 SH(NA)-081133ENG-N ■Added or modified parts
Section 7.3, Section 8.4, Section 9.4
October 2017 SH(NA)-081133ENG-O ■Added or modified parts
Section 2.2, Section 7.3, Section 7.4, Section 8.4, Appendix 2, Appendix 3, Appendix 4, Appendix 5,
Appendix 6
April 2018 SH(NA)-081133ENG-P ■Added or modified parts
TERMS, Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Chapter 8, Section 10.4, Section 10.5, Chapter 11, Chapter 12,
Appendix 2, Appendix 3, Appendix 4, Appendix 6, Appendix 8
June 2018 SH(NA)-081133ENG-Q ■Added or modified parts
Section 2.2, Section 5.5, Appendix 2, Appendix 3
December 2018 SH(NA)-081133ENG-R ■Added or modified parts
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, TERMS, Section 7.3, Section 7.4, Chapter 9, Appendix 2, Appendix 3,
Appendix 4, Appendix 5
April 2019 SH(NA)-081133ENG-S ■Added or modified parts
Section 7.1, Section 7.3, Section 7.4, Appendix 2, Appendix 3
August 2019 SH(NA)-081133ENG-T ■Added or modified parts
Section 9.4, Appendix 2, Appendix 5
October 2019 SH(NA)-081133ENG-U ■Added or modified parts
TERMS, Section 2.2, Chapter 8, Section 9.1, Section 9.4, Chapter 10, Appendix 2, Appendix 3,
Appendix 4, Appendix 5, Appendix 6, Appendix 8
October 2020 SH(NA)-081133ENG-V ■Added or modified parts
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Section 2.2, Section 7.1,
Section 7.2, Section 7.3, Section 7.4, Section 7.5, Section 8.1, Section 8.2, Section 8.3, Section 9.1,
Section 9.2, Section 9.3, Appendix 2, Appendix 3, Appendix 4, Appendix 5
May 2021 SH(NA)-081133ENG-W ■Added or modified parts
TERMS, Chapter 1, Section 2.2, Chapter 3, Section 4.1, Section 5.1, Chapter 7, Section 8.1, Section
8.3, Chapter 9, Section 9.1, Section 9.2, Section 9.3, Section 10.1, Section 10.3, Appendix 2,
Appendix 3
October 2021 SH(NA)-081133ENG-X ■Added or modified parts
Section 3.1, Section 3.3, Section 3.4, Section 4.1, Section 4.4, Section 5.1, Section 5.4, Section 7.1,
Section 7.3, Section 7.4, Section 8.1, Section 8.2, Section 8.4, Section 9.1, Section 9.3, Section
10.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.4, Appendix 2, Appendix 3, Appendix 4, Appendix 5
January 2022 SH(NA)-081133ENG-Y ■Added or modified parts
Chapter 7, Appendix 2, Appendix 3
May 2022 SH(NA)-081133ENG-Z ■Added or modified parts
Section 3.1, Section 3.4, Section 4.1, Section 4.4, Section 5.1, Section 5.4, Section 7.1, Section 7.4,
Section 8.1, Section 8.4, Section 9.1, Section 9.3, Section 10.1, Section 10.3, Section 10.4

410
Revision date *Manual number Description
October 2022 SH(NA)-081133ENG-AA ■Added or modified parts
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 3.1, Section 3.3, Section 3.4, Section 4.1, Section 4.2, Section
4.3, Section 4.4, Section 5.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 5.4, Section 6.3, Section 6.4, Section
7.1, Section 8.1, Section 8.2, Section 8.3, Section 8.4, Section 9.1, Section 9.3, Section 10.1,
Section 10.3, Section 10.4, Section 11.3, Section 11.4, Appendix 2, Appendix 3

Japanese manual number: SH-081132-AB

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot
be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

411
 TRADEMARKS
Anywire and AnyWireASLINK are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Anywire Corporation.
The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies.
In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.

412
SH(NA)-081133ENG-AA(2210)KWIX
MODEL: IQSS-R-E
MODEL CODE: 13JV28

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

Specifications subject to change without notice.